Service Manual: Ir1200 Series

Service Manual
iR1200 Series
iR1210
Feb 20 2008
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this
manual that does not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When
changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need
arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition
of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Introduction
Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo
Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.
Provides a description of a service mode.
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

Introduction
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with refer-
ence to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the
direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in
supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".(The voltage value, how-
ever, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors
used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the
DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be com-
municated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be
able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................1- 1
1.1.1 Names of Parts........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 1
1.1.1.1 External View (ADF type)......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 1
1.1.1.2 External View (copyboard type) ............................................................................................................................................... 1- 2
1.1.1.3 External View (ADF) ................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 3
1.1.1.4 External Covers ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 3
1.1.1.5 Cross Section (Body) ............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 4
1.1.1.6 Cross Section (ADF) ................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 5
1.1.2 Using the Machine................................................................................................................................................... 1- 5
1.1.2.1 Control Panel ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 5
1.1.3 User Mode Items ..................................................................................................................................................... 1- 8
1.1.3.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 8
1.1.3.2 COMMON SETTINGS ............................................................................................................................................................. 1- 8
1.1.3.3 COPY SETTINGS.................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 11
1.1.3.4 FAX SETTINGS*1.................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 12
1.1.3.5 ADD. REGISTRATION*1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 1- 18
1.1.3.6 TIMER SETTINGS................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 19
1.1.3.7 ADJUST./CLEAN ................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 20
1.1.3.8 PRINT LISTS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 20
1.1.3.9 COUNT CHECK..................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 20
1.1.3.10 Report Generating ............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 20
1.1.3.11 Reports Generating (Automatically Generating Reports: if equipped with fax functions) .................................................... 1- 21
1.1.4 Maintenance by the User....................................................................................................................................... 1- 22
1.1.4.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 22
1.1.4.2 Cleaning the Fixing Pressure Roller ...................................................................................................................................... 1- 22
1.1.4.3 Other Cleaning....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 22
1.1.4.4 Storing and Handling the Cartridge (Storing a Drum Unit Before Unpacking) ....................................................................... 1- 22
1.1.4.5 Storing After Unpacking the Cartridge ................................................................................................................................... 1- 23
1.1.4.6 Points to Note When Handling the Cartridge ......................................................................................................................... 1- 23
1.1.4.7 Cleaning the White Roller (ADF)............................................................................................................................................ 1- 24
1.1.4.8 Other Cleaning....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 24
1.1.5 Safety .................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 24
1.1.5.1 Safety of the Laser Scanner Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 1- 24
1.1.5.2 CDRH Requirements ............................................................................................................................................................. 1- 25
1.1.5.3 Handling the Laser Scanner Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 1- 25
1.1.5.4 Safety of the Toner ................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 25
1.1.6 Product Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 1- 26
1.1.6.1 Mechanisms/Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 26
1.1.6.2 Others .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 26
1.1.6.3 Reproduction Ratio ................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 27
1.1.6.4 Mechanisms/Functions (ADF)................................................................................................................................................ 1- 27
1.1.6.5 Mechanisms/Functions (FAX)................................................................................................................................................ 1- 27
1.1.7 Function List .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 28
1.1.7.1 Printing Speed (AB type, A type) ........................................................................................................................................... 1- 28
1.1.7.2 Printing Speed (Inch type) ..................................................................................................................................................... 1- 29
1.1.7.3 Mechanisms/Functions (ADF)................................................................................................................................................ 1- 29
1.1.7.4 Mechanisms/Functions (FAX)................................................................................................................................................ 1- 30
Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Making Pre-Checks ....................................................................................................................................2- 1
2.1.1 Selecting the Site..................................................................................................................................................... 2- 1
2.2 Unpacking and Installation .........................................................................................................................2- 1
Contents
2.2.1 Before Starting .........................................................................................................................................................2- 1

2.2.2 Installation Procedure ..............................................................................................................................................2- 1
2.2.3 Unpacking ................................................................................................................................................................2- 1
2.2.4 Fitting the Cartridge .................................................................................................................................................2- 2
2.2.5 Fitting the Toner bottle .............................................................................................................................................2- 2
2.2.6 Putting Paper in the Cassette ..................................................................................................................................2- 3
2.2.7 Putting Paper in the Manual Feed Tray ...................................................................................................................2- 3
2.2.8 Connecting the Interface Cable ...............................................................................................................................2- 4
2.2.9 Connect the power cord...........................................................................................................................................2- 4
2.2.10 Fitting the Delivery Tray .........................................................................................................................................2- 4
2.2.11 Setting the Printer Functions..................................................................................................................................2- 4
2.3 Connection to Telephone Line ................................................................................................................... 2- 4
2.3.1 Connecting the Modular Cable (if equipped with fax functions)...............................................................................2- 4
2.3.2 Setting the Date/Time (user mode)..........................................................................................................................2- 4
2.3.3 Setting the Dial Type................................................................................................................................................2- 4
2.3.4 Executing Communications Testing.........................................................................................................................2- 4
2.4 Checking the Images/Operations ............................................................................................................... 2- 5
2.4.1 Checking the Copy Images......................................................................................................................................2- 5
2.5 Relocating the Machine .............................................................................................................................. 2- 5
2.5.1 When Relocating the Machine .................................................................................................................................2- 5
Chapter 3 Basic Operation

3.1 Construction ............................................................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.1.1 Functional Construction ...........................................................................................................................................3- 1
3.1.2 Functional Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................................3- 2
3.1.3 Image Processor PCB .............................................................................................................................................3- 2
3.1.4 DC Controller PCB...................................................................................................................................................3- 3
3.1.5 Control Panel PCB...................................................................................................................................................3- 3
3.1.6 Power Supply PCB ..................................................................................................................................................3- 3
3.1.7 Analog Processor PCB ............................................................................................................................................3- 3
3.1.8 Sensor PCB .............................................................................................................................................................3- 3
3.1.9 Laser Driver/BD PCB ...............................................................................................................................................3- 3
3.1.10 Main Motor/Scanner Motor Driver ..........................................................................................................................3- 3
3.1.11 Printer Controller PCB............................................................................................................................................3- 3
3.1.12 NCU PCB (if equipped with fax functions) .............................................................................................................3- 4
3.1.13 Modular Jack PCB (if equipped with fax functions)................................................................................................3- 4
3.1.14 Sensor Relay PCB .................................................................................................................................................3- 4
3.1.15 Controlling the Main Motor .....................................................................................................................................3- 4
3.1.16 Reproduction Processes ........................................................................................................................................3- 4
3.2 Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 3- 6
3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ...........................................................................................................3- 6
Chapter 4 Original Exposure System

4.1 Construction ............................................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.1.1 Major Components...................................................................................................................................................4- 1
4.2 Parts Replacement Procedure ................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.2.1 Reader Unit..............................................................................................................................................................4- 1
4.2.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover ....................................................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.2.1.2 Removing the Right Cover....................................................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.2.1.3 Removing the ADF................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.2.1.4 Removing the Printer Controller PCB ...................................................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.2.1.5 Removing the Image Processor PCB ...................................................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.2.1.6 Removing the Control Panel .................................................................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.2.1.7 Removing the Reader Unit....................................................................................................................................................... 4- 3
Contents
4.2.2 Copyboard glass...................................................................................................................................................... 4- 3

4.2.2.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 3
4.2.3 Sensor PCB............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 3
4.2.3.3 Removing the ADF................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 3
4.2.3.5 Removing the Sensor PCB ...................................................................................................................................................... 4- 4
4.2.4 Scanner Motor ......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 5
4.2.4.2 Removing the Reader Motor Drive Unit ................................................................................................................................... 4- 5
4.2.5 Contact sensor ........................................................................................................................................................ 4- 5
4.2.5.2 Removing the Contact Sensor ................................................................................................................................................. 4- 5
Chapter 5 Laser Exposure

5.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................5- 1
5.1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.2 Parts Replacement Procedure ...................................................................................................................5- 1
5.2.1 Laser Scanner Unit.................................................................................................................................................. 5- 1
5.2.1.2 Removing the Toner Supply Cover.......................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.2.1.4 Removing the Front Cover....................................................................................................................................................... 5- 2
5.2.1.5 Removing the Cartridge Cover ................................................................................................................................................ 5- 2
5.2.1.6 Removing the Upper Cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 5- 2
5.2.1.7 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 5- 3
Chapter 6 Image Formation

6.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................6- 1
6.1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.2.1 Developing Cylinder ................................................................................................................................................ 6- 1
6.2.1.1 Removing the Developing Cylinder.......................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.2.1.2 Notes on replacing the Developing Cylinder............................................................................................................................ 6- 1
6.2.2 Developing Blade .................................................................................................................................................... 6- 2
6.2.2.1 Removing the Developing Cylinder.......................................................................................................................................... 6- 2
6.2.2.2 Removing the Developing Blade.............................................................................................................................................. 6- 2
6.2.2.3 Notes on replacing the Developing Developing Blade............................................................................................................. 6- 3
6.2.3 Transfer Charging Roller ......................................................................................................................................... 6- 3
6.2.3.1 Removing the Transfer Charging Roller .................................................................................................................................. 6- 3
6.2.4 Toner Bottle Sensor................................................................................................................................................. 6- 3
6.2.4.5 Removing the Toner Bottle Sensor.......................................................................................................................................... 6- 4
6.2.5 Waste Toner Full Sensor......................................................................................................................................... 6- 4
6.2.5.1 Removing the Waste Toner Full Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 6- 4
Chapter 7 Pickup/Feeding System

7.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................7- 1
7.1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 1
7.2 Detecting Jams ...........................................................................................................................................7- 1
7.2.1 Jam Detection Outline ............................................................................................................................................. 7- 1
7.2.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 1
Contents
7.2.1.2 Types of Jams.......................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 1

7.2.2 Delay Jams ..............................................................................................................................................................7- 1
7.2.2.1 Pickup Delay Jam .................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 1
7.2.2.2 Delivery Sensor Leading Edge Delay Jam .............................................................................................................................. 7- 1
7.2.2.3 Delivery Sensor Trailing Edge Delay Jam ............................................................................................................................... 7- 1
7.2.3 Stationary Jams .......................................................................................................................................................7- 2
7.2.3.1 Paper Leading Edge Sensor Stationary Jam........................................................................................................................... 7- 2
7.2.3.2 Delivery Sensor Stationary Jam............................................................................................................................................... 7- 2
7.2.4 Other Jams ..............................................................................................................................................................7- 2
7.2.4.1 Fixing Wrap Jam ...................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 2
7.2.4.2 Auto Delivery Jam.................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 2
7.2.4.3 Door Open Jam........................................................................................................................................................................ 7- 2
7.3 Cassette Pick-Up Unit ................................................................................................................................ 7- 2
7.3.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................7- 2
7.3.2 Retry Pickup.............................................................................................................................................................7- 3
7.3.3 Detecting the Size of Paper .....................................................................................................................................7- 3
7.4 Manual Feed Pickup Unit ........................................................................................................................... 7- 3
7.4.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................7- 3
7.4.2 Retry Pickup.............................................................................................................................................................7- 4
7.4.3 Detecting the Size of Paper .....................................................................................................................................7- 4
7.5 Delivery ...................................................................................................................................................... 7- 4
7.5.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................7- 4
7.5.2 Auto Delivery Control ...............................................................................................................................................7- 5
7.5.3 Reducing the Copying Speed ..................................................................................................................................7- 5
7.6.1 Pickup Roller............................................................................................................................................................7- 5
7.6.1.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller ..................................................................................................................................... 7- 5
7.6.2 Cassette Pickup Solenoid ........................................................................................................................................7- 5
7.6.2.4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid................................................................................................................................. 7- 6
7.6.3 Manual Feed (Upper)...............................................................................................................................................7- 7
7.6.3.2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray (upper) ................................................................................................................................ 7- 7
7.6.4 Manual Feed (Lower)...............................................................................................................................................7- 7
7.6.4.2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray (lower)................................................................................................................................. 7- 7
7.6.5 Manual Pickup Roller ...............................................................................................................................................7- 7
7.6.5.2 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller............................................................................................................................... 7- 7
7.6.6 Manual Feed Tray paper sensor..............................................................................................................................7- 8
7.6.6.5 Removing the Cartridge Cover ................................................................................................................................................ 7- 9
7.6.6.6 Removing the Upper Cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 7- 9
7.6.6.7 Removing the Rear Cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 7- 10
7.6.6.8 Removing the Image Processor PCB .................................................................................................................................... 7- 10
7.6.6.9 Removing the NCU PCB (if equipped with fax functions) ...................................................................................................... 7- 10
7.6.6.10 Removing the Modular Jack PCB ........................................................................................................................................ 7- 10
7.6.6.11 Removing the Main Motor Unit............................................................................................................................................. 7- 10
7.6.6.12 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid ...................................................................................................................... 7- 11
7.6.6.13 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Paper Sensor.................................................................................................................. 7- 11
7.6.7 Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid ...............................................................................................................................7- 11
7.6.7.1 Removing the Right Cover..................................................................................................................................................... 7- 11
7.6.7.2 Removing the Toner Supply Cover........................................................................................................................................ 7- 12
7.6.7.3 Removing the Control Panel .................................................................................................................................................. 7- 12
Contents
7.6.7.4 Removing the Front Cover..................................................................................................................................................... 7- 12

7.6.7.5 Removing the Cartridge Cover .............................................................................................................................................. 7- 13
7.6.7.6 Removing the Upper Cover ................................................................................................................................................... 7- 13
7.6.7.10 Removing the Modular Jack PCB ........................................................................................................................................ 7- 14
7.6.7.11 Removing the Main Motor Unit............................................................................................................................................. 7- 14
7.6.7.12 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid ...................................................................................................................... 7- 15
7.6.8 Registration Roller Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 7- 15
7.6.8.2 Removing the Printer Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................... 7- 15
7.6.8.4 Removing the Registration Roller Unit................................................................................................................................... 7- 16
7.6.9 Vertical Path Roller................................................................................................................................................ 7- 16
7.6.9.1 Removing the Vertical Path Roller ......................................................................................................................................... 7- 16
7.6.10 Separation Pad .................................................................................................................................................... 7- 17
7.6.10.1 Removing the Right Cover ................................................................................................................................................... 7- 17
7.6.10.2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray (upper) ............................................................................................................................ 7- 17
7.6.10.3 Removing the Manual Feed Tray (lower)............................................................................................................................. 7- 17
7.6.10.4 Removing the Separation Pad ............................................................................................................................................. 7- 17
Chapter 8 Fixing System

8.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................8- 1
8.1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 1
8.2 Various Control Mechanisms......................................................................................................................8- 1
8.2.1 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature............................................................................................................... 8- 1
8.2.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Temperature.......................................................................................................................................... 8- 1
8.2.2 Controlling the Fixing File Bias Temperature .......................................................................................................... 8- 2
8.2.2.1 Controlling the Fixing Film Bias ............................................................................................................................................... 8- 2
8.3 Protective Functions ...................................................................................................................................8- 3
8.3.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 3
8.3.2 Detecting a Fault in the Fixing Assembly ................................................................................................................ 8- 3
8.4.1 Fixing Unit................................................................................................................................................................ 8- 3
8.4.1.1 Removing the Left Cover ......................................................................................................................................................... 8- 3
8.4.1.2 Removing the Delivery Cover .................................................................................................................................................. 8- 3
8.4.1.3 Removing the Delivery Upper Cover ....................................................................................................................................... 8- 3
8.4.1.4 Removing the Delivery Rear Cover ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 3
8.4.1.5 Disconnect connector .............................................................................................................................................................. 8- 4
8.4.1.8 Removing the Fixing Assembly................................................................................................................................................ 8- 4
8.4.2 Pressure Roller........................................................................................................................................................ 8- 5
8.4.2.9 Removing the Fixing Film Unit ................................................................................................................................................. 8- 7
8.4.2.10 Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller..................................................................................................................................... 8- 7
8.4.3 Fixing Film ............................................................................................................................................................... 8- 7
Contents

8.4.3.9 Removing the Fixing Film Unit ................................................................................................................................................. 8- 9
8.4.4 Fixing Delivery Sensor ...........................................................................................................................................8- 10
8.4.4.1 Removing the Left Cover ....................................................................................................................................................... 8- 10
8.4.4.2 Removing the Delivery Cover ................................................................................................................................................ 8- 10
8.4.4.3 Removing the Delivery Upper Cover ..................................................................................................................................... 8- 10
8.4.4.4 Removing the Delivery Rear Cover ....................................................................................................................................... 8- 10
8.4.4.5 Disconnect connector ............................................................................................................................................................ 8- 10
8.4.4.7 Removing the Copyboard Glass ............................................................................................................................................ 8- 11
8.4.4.8 Removing the Fixing Assembly.............................................................................................................................................. 8- 11
8.4.4.9 Removing the Delivery Sensor .............................................................................................................................................. 8- 12
Chapter 9 External and Controls

9.1 Fans ........................................................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.1.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................9- 1
9.2 Power Supply System ................................................................................................................................ 9- 1
9.2.1 Power Supply...........................................................................................................................................................9- 1
9.2.1.1 Route of Low Voltage Power Supply ...................................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.2.1.2 Hegh-Voltage Power Supply Circuit......................................................................................................................................... 9- 2
9.2.2 Protection Function ..................................................................................................................................................9- 2
9.2.2.1 Protective Functions ................................................................................................................................................................ 9- 2
9.2.3 Backup Battery.........................................................................................................................................................9- 2
9.2.3.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 2
9.2.3.2 Lithium Battery (BAT1)............................................................................................................................................................. 9- 2
9.2.3.3 Vanadium Lithium Secondary Battery (BAT2) ......................................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.2.3.4 Types of Data........................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.2.3.5 Printing the Backup Data List................................................................................................................................................... 9- 5
9.2.4 Energy-Saving Function...........................................................................................................................................9- 5
9.2.4.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 5
9.2.4.2 Operation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 9- 5
9.3.1 Control Panel ...........................................................................................................................................................9- 5
9.3.2 Analog Processor PCB ............................................................................................................................................9- 6
9.3.2.2 Removing the Analog Processor PCB ..................................................................................................................................... 9- 6
9.3.3 DC Controller PCB...................................................................................................................................................9- 6
9.3.3.7 Removing the DC Controller PCB............................................................................................................................................ 9- 8
9.3.4 Image Processor PCB .............................................................................................................................................9- 9
9.3.5 Printer Controller PCB ...........................................................................................................................................9- 10
9.3.5.2 Removing the Printer Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................... 9- 10
9.3.6 NCU PCB...............................................................................................................................................................9- 10
9.3.7 Modular Jack PCB .................................................................................................................................................9- 10
Contents

9.3.7.2 Removing the Modular Jack PCB .......................................................................................................................................... 9- 11
9.3.8 Printer Power Supply PCB .................................................................................................................................... 9- 11
9.3.8.6 Removing the Delivery Cover ................................................................................................................................................ 9- 12
9.3.8.7 Removing the DC Controller PCB.......................................................................................................................................... 9- 12
9.3.8.8 Removing the Power Supply PCB ......................................................................................................................................... 9- 14
9.3.9 Relay PCB ............................................................................................................................................................. 9- 14
9.3.9.5 Removing the Sensor Relay PCB.......................................................................................................................................... 9- 15
9.3.10 Humidity Sensor .................................................................................................................................................. 9- 15
9.3.10.2 Removing the Toner Supply Cover ...................................................................................................................................... 9- 15
9.3.10.3 Removing the Control Panel ................................................................................................................................................ 9- 16
9.3.10.4 Removing the Front Cover ................................................................................................................................................... 9- 16
9.3.10.5 Removing the Humidity Sensor............................................................................................................................................ 9- 16
9.3.11 Reader Unit Slide Detecting Switch..................................................................................................................... 9- 17
9.3.11.5 Removing the Cartridge Cover............................................................................................................................................. 9- 18
9.3.11.6 Removing the Upper Cover.................................................................................................................................................. 9- 18
9.3.11.7 Removing the Reader Unit Slide Detecting Switch .............................................................................................................. 9- 19
9.3.12 Toner Supply Cover Switch ................................................................................................................................. 9- 19
9.3.12.5 Removing the Toner Supply Cover Switch .......................................................................................................................... 9- 20
9.3.13 Fans..................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 20
9.3.13.7 Removing the Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................... 9- 22
9.3.13.8 Removing the Printer Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................. 9- 22
9.3.13.9 Removing the NCU PCB (if equipped with fax functions) .................................................................................................... 9- 22
9.3.13.10 Removing the Modular Jack PCB ...................................................................................................................................... 9- 22
9.3.13.11 Remove the Fan................................................................................................................................................................. 9- 22
9.3.14 Motor of Main Drive Assembly............................................................................................................................. 9- 23
9.3.14.8 Removing the Image Processor PCB .................................................................................................................................. 9- 25
9.3.14.9 Removing the NCU PCB (if equipped with fax functions) .................................................................................................... 9- 25
9.3.14.10 Removing the Modular Jack PCB ...................................................................................................................................... 9- 25
9.3.14.11 Removing the Main Motor Unit........................................................................................................................................... 9- 26
Contents
9.3.15 Right Door ............................................................................................................................................................9- 26

9.3.15.2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray (lower)............................................................................................................................. 9- 26
9.3.15.3 Removing the Right Door..................................................................................................................................................... 9- 27
Chapter 10 Original Feeding System

10.1 Basic Construcion................................................................................................................................... 10- 1
10.1.1 Outline..................................................................................................................................................................10- 1
10.2 Basic Operation ...................................................................................................................................... 10- 1
10.2.1 Picking Up and Moving Originals .........................................................................................................................10- 1
10.2.2 Moving Down the Original Pickup Roller and Moving Up the Original Stopper....................................................10- 1
10.3 Detection Jams ....................................................................................................................................... 10- 2
10.3.1 Outline..................................................................................................................................................................10- 2
10.3.2 Types of Jams......................................................................................................................................................10- 2
10.4 Parts Replacement Procedure ............................................................................................................... 10- 2
10.4.1 ADF ......................................................................................................................................................................10- 2
10.4.1.3 Removing the ADF............................................................................................................................................................... 10- 3
10.4.2 ADF Drive Unit .....................................................................................................................................................10- 4
10.4.2.3 Removing the ADF............................................................................................................................................................... 10- 5
10.4.2.4 Removing the ADF Drive Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 10- 6
10.4.3 ADF Motor Unit ....................................................................................................................................................10- 7
10.4.3.3 Removing the ADF............................................................................................................................................................... 10- 8
10.4.3.4 Removing the ADF Drive Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 10- 9
10.4.3.5 Removing the White Roller .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 9
10.4.3.6 Removing the ADF Motor Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 10- 10
10.4.4 Feeding Outside Guide ......................................................................................................................................10- 10
10.4.4.1 Removing the Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................. 10- 10
10.4.4.2 Removing the Right Cover ................................................................................................................................................. 10- 10
10.4.4.3 Removing the ADF............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 11
10.4.4.4 Removing the ADF Drive Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 10- 12
10.4.4.5 Removing the Feeding Outside Guide ............................................................................................................................... 10- 13
10.4.5 Separation Roller Unit ........................................................................................................................................10- 13
10.4.5.3 Removing the ADF............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 14
10.4.5.5 Removing the White Roller ................................................................................................................................................ 10- 16
10.4.5.7 Removing the Separation Roller Unit................................................................................................................................. 10- 17
10.4.6 Separation Roller ...............................................................................................................................................10- 18
10.4.6.3 Removing the ADF............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 18
10.4.6.8 Removing the Original Pickup Roller ................................................................................................................................. 10- 22
10.4.6.9 Removing the Original Separation Roller........................................................................................................................... 10- 23
10.4.7 Pickup Roller ......................................................................................................................................................10- 23
10.4.7.3 Removing the ADF............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 23
Contents

10.4.7.8 Removing the Original Pickup Roller ................................................................................................................................. 10- 27
10.4.8 Original Separation Pad..................................................................................................................................... 10- 28
10.4.8.1 Removing the Original Separation Pad.............................................................................................................................. 10- 28
10.4.9 Registration Roller ............................................................................................................................................. 10- 28
10.4.9.3 Removing the ADF............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 29
10.4.9.5 Removing the ADF Registration Roller .............................................................................................................................. 10- 31
10.4.10 White Roller ..................................................................................................................................................... 10- 31
10.4.10.1 Removing the Rear Cover................................................................................................................................................ 10- 31
10.4.10.2 Removing the Right Cover ............................................................................................................................................... 10- 32
10.4.10.3 Removing the ADF ........................................................................................................................................................... 10- 32
10.4.10.4 Removing the ADF Drive Unit .......................................................................................................................................... 10- 33
10.4.10.5 Removing the White Roller............................................................................................................................................... 10- 34
10.4.11 Feed Roller ...................................................................................................................................................... 10- 34
10.4.11.3 Removing the ADF ........................................................................................................................................................... 10- 35
10.4.11.5 Removing the Feeding Outside Guide ............................................................................................................................. 10- 37
10.4.11.6 Removing the Feed Roll................................................................................................................................................... 10- 38
10.4.12 Original Feed Roller ......................................................................................................................................... 10- 38
10.4.12.3 Removing the ADF ........................................................................................................................................................... 10- 39
10.4.12.6 Removing the Delivery Stacking Tray .............................................................................................................................. 10- 41
10.4.12.7 Removing the Original Feed Roller .................................................................................................................................. 10- 42
10.4.13 Original Delivery Roller .................................................................................................................................... 10- 42
10.4.13.3 Removing the ADF ........................................................................................................................................................... 10- 43
10.4.13.7 Removing the Original Delivery Roller ............................................................................................................................. 10- 46
10.4.14 Original Sensor ................................................................................................................................................ 10- 46
10.4.14.3 Removing the ADF ........................................................................................................................................................... 10- 47
10.4.14.6 Removing the ADF Motor Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 10- 49
10.4.14.7 Removing the Original Sensor ......................................................................................................................................... 10- 50
10.4.15 Registration Sensor ......................................................................................................................................... 10- 50
10.4.15.3 Removing the ADF ........................................................................................................................................................... 10- 51
10.4.15.6 Removing the ADF Motor Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 10- 53
10.4.15.7 Removing the Original Sensor ......................................................................................................................................... 10- 54
10.4.15.8 Removing the Registration Sensor................................................................................................................................... 10- 54
10.4.16 Original Delivery Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 10- 54
Contents

10.4.16.3 Removing the ADF ........................................................................................................................................................... 10- 55
10.4.16.5 Removing the Original Delivery Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 10- 57
10.4.17 Slide Guide.......................................................................................................................................................10- 57
10.4.17.1 Removing the Slide Guide (front, rear)............................................................................................................................. 10- 57
10.4.17.2 Mounting the Slide Guide (front, rear) .............................................................................................................................. 10- 58
10.4.18 Delivery Stacking Tray .....................................................................................................................................10- 58
10.4.18.3 Removing the ADF ........................................................................................................................................................... 10- 59
Chapter 11 Maintenance and Inspection

11.1 Periodically Replaced Parts.................................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts .................................................................................................................................11- 1
11.2 Durables and Consumables ................................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.2.1 Durables...............................................................................................................................................................11- 1
11.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.3.1 Scheduled Servicing Chart...................................................................................................................................11- 1
11.4 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................................. 11- 1
11.4.1 Outline..................................................................................................................................................................11- 1
11.4.2 Selfoc Lens Array of the Contact Sensor .............................................................................................................11- 1
11.4.3 Cassette Pickup Roller.........................................................................................................................................11- 2
11.4.4 Manual Feed Pickup Roller ..................................................................................................................................11- 2
11.4.5 Separation Pad ....................................................................................................................................................11- 2
11.4.6 Registration Roller................................................................................................................................................11- 2
11.4.7 Transfer Guide .....................................................................................................................................................11- 2
11.4.8 Transfer Charging Roller......................................................................................................................................11- 2
11.4.9 Separation Static Eliminator.................................................................................................................................11- 2
11.4.10 Paper Path .........................................................................................................................................................11- 2
11.4.11 Fixing Inlet Guide ...............................................................................................................................................11- 2
11.4.12 Fixing Pressure Roller ........................................................................................................................................11- 2
11.4.13 Delivery Roller ....................................................................................................................................................11- 2
11.4.14 Back of Copyboard Glass (Back of Shading Plate)............................................................................................11- 2
11.4.15 Original Pickup Roller (ADF) ..............................................................................................................................11- 3
11.4.16 Original Separation Roller (ADF)........................................................................................................................11- 3
11.4.17 Original Separation Pad (ADF)...........................................................................................................................11- 3
11.4.18 ADF Registration Roller (ADF) ...........................................................................................................................11- 3
11.4.19 Original Feed Roller (ADF).................................................................................................................................11- 3
11.4.20 Original Delivery Roller (ADF) ............................................................................................................................11- 3
11.4.21 Copyboard Glass (Original Reading Area) (ADF) ..............................................................................................11- 3
Chapter 12 Standards and Adjustments

12.1 Image Adjustments ................................................................................................................................. 12- 1
12.1.1 Leading Edge Read Start Position Adjustment ....................................................................................................12- 1
12.1.2 Left/Right Edge Read Start Position Adjustment .................................................................................................12- 1
12.2 Scanning System.................................................................................................................................... 12- 1
12.2.1 Preparing a Test Sheet for Adjustment ................................................................................................................12- 1
12.2.2 Contact Sensor LED Intensity Auto Adjustment...................................................................................................12- 1
12.3 Fixing System ......................................................................................................................................... 12- 1
12.3.1 Nip Adjustment.....................................................................................................................................................12- 1
12.4 Electrical Components............................................................................................................................ 12- 2
Contents
12.4.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................. 12- 2

12.4.2 When Replacing the Image Processor PCB........................................................................................................ 12- 2
12.5 ADF.........................................................................................................................................................12- 2
12.5.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................. 12- 2
12.5.1.1 Items of Adjustment and Sequence of Work........................................................................................................................ 12- 2
12.5.1.2 Preparing a Test Sheet for Adjustment ................................................................................................................................ 12- 2
12.5.2 Adjusting the Mechanical System........................................................................................................................ 12- 3
12.5.2.1 Removing the Skew ............................................................................................................................................................. 12- 3
12.5.2.2 Left/Right Registration Adjustment....................................................................................................................................... 12- 3
12.5.3 Adjusting the Ellectrical System........................................................................................................................... 12- 3
12.5.3.1 Registration Arch Auto Adjustment ...................................................................................................................................... 12- 3
12.5.3.2 Original Read Position Adjustment ...................................................................................................................................... 12- 3
12.5.3.3 Original Speed Adjustment .................................................................................................................................................. 12- 3
12.5.3.4 Leading Edge Read Start Position Adjustment .................................................................................................................... 12- 4
12.5.3.5 Trailing Edge Read End Position Adjustment ...................................................................................................................... 12- 4
Chapter 13 Correcting Faulty Images

13.1 Making lnitial Checks ..............................................................................................................................13- 1
13.1.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................. 13- 1
13.1.2 Making Initial Checks........................................................................................................................................... 13- 1
13.1.3 Site Environment ................................................................................................................................................. 13- 1
13.1.4 Checking the Drum Unit....................................................................................................................................... 13- 1
13.1.5 Checking the Paper ............................................................................................................................................. 13- 1
13.1.6 Others .................................................................................................................................................................. 13- 1
13.1.7 Troubleshooting Flow Chart................................................................................................................................. 13- 1
13.1.8 Making Checks in Response to an Image Fault .................................................................................................. 13- 2
13.1.9 Checking the Photointerrupters ........................................................................................................................... 13- 2
13.2 Outline of Electrical Components............................................................................................................13- 4
13.2.1 Clutch/Solenoid.................................................................................................................................................... 13- 4
13.2.1.1 Body ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 13- 4
13.2.1.2 ADF ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 13- 4
13.2.2 Sensor ................................................................................................................................................................. 13- 5
13.2.2.1 Body ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 13- 5
13.2.2.2 ADF ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 13- 5
13.2.3 Lamps, Heaters, and Others................................................................................................................................ 13- 6
13.2.3.1 Others .................................................................................................................................................................................. 13- 6
13.2.4 PCBs.................................................................................................................................................................... 13- 7
13.2.4.1 PCBs .................................................................................................................................................................................... 13- 7
13.2.5 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB ................................................ 13- 9
13.2.5.1 Variable Resistors, Light Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB ......................................................................... 13- 9
Chapter 14 Self Diagnosis

14.1 Error Code Table ....................................................................................................................................14- 1
14.1.1 Troubleshooting Malfunctions (service error) ...................................................................................................... 14- 1
14.2 FAX Error Codes ....................................................................................................................................14- 5
14.2.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................. 14- 5
14.2.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 14- 5
14.2.1.2 Error Codes.......................................................................................................................................................................... 14- 5
14.2.1.3 How to Record the Protocol ................................................................................................................................................. 14- 6
14.2.2 User Error Code................................................................................................................................................... 14- 7
14.2.2.1 Causes and Remedies for User Error Codes....................................................................................................................... 14- 7
14.2.3 Service Error Code ............................................................................................................................................ 14- 12
14.2.3.1 Causes and Remedies for Service Error Codes ................................................................................................................ 14- 12
14.2.3.2 Common Faults.................................................................................................................................................................. 14- 37
Chapter 15 Service Mode

Contents
15.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 15- 1

15.1.1 Outline..................................................................................................................................................................15- 1
15.1.2 Using Service Mode .............................................................................................................................................15- 2
15.1.3 List of Menus........................................................................................................................................................15- 3
15.2 Service Mode Table................................................................................................................................ 15- 9
15.2.1 Bit Switch Settings ...............................................................................................................................................15- 9
15.2.2 Menu Switch Settings.........................................................................................................................................15- 18
15.2.3 Numeric Parameter Setting................................................................................................................................15- 19
15.2.4 SPECIAL Setting................................................................................................................................................15- 21
15.2.5 NCU Setting .......................................................................................................................................................15- 21
15.2.6 ISDN Setting ......................................................................................................................................................15- 21
15.2.7 Country/Region of Installation ............................................................................................................................15- 21
15.2.8 Setting the Original Reading Functions..............................................................................................................15- 22
15.2.9 Setting the Printer Parameters...........................................................................................................................15- 22
15.2.10 PDL ..................................................................................................................................................................15- 25
15.2.11 Counter.............................................................................................................................................................15- 25
15.2.12 Generating a Report.........................................................................................................................................15- 26
15.2.13 Downloading.....................................................................................................................................................15- 27
15.2.14 Clearing ............................................................................................................................................................15- 27
15.2.15 ROM Indication.................................................................................................................................................15- 28
15.2.16 Resetting the Contact Sensor Position.............................................................................................................15- 28
15.2.17 Service Mode Default Setting...........................................................................................................................15- 28
15.2.18 Test Mode ........................................................................................................................................................15- 40
15.2.19 Service Report..................................................................................................................................................15- 51
Chapter 16 Service Tools

16.1 Service Tools .......................................................................................................................................... 16- 1
16.1.1 List of Special Tools .............................................................................................................................................16- 1
16.1.2 List of Solvents and Oils.......................................................................................................................................16- 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Contents
Contents
1.1 Product Specifications....................................................................................................................................................1-1

1.1.1 Names of Parts ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.1.1 External View (ADF type) ..............................................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.1.2 External View (copyboard type) .....................................................................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.1.3 External View (ADF) ......................................................................................................................................................................................1-3
1.1.1.4 External Covers...............................................................................................................................................................................................1-3
1.1.1.5 Cross Section (Body) ......................................................................................................................................................................................1-4
1.1.1.6 Cross Section (ADF) .......................................................................................................................................................................................1-5
1.1.2 Using the Machine ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.1.2.1 Control Panel...................................................................................................................................................................................................1-5
1.1.3 User Mode Items.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.1.3.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................1-8
1.1.3.2 COMMON SETTINGS ..................................................................................................................................................................................1-8
1.1.3.3 COPY SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................................................................................1-11
1.1.3.4 FAX SETTINGS*1 .......................................................................................................................................................................................1-12
1.1.3.5 ADD. REGISTRATION*1 ...........................................................................................................................................................................1-18
1.1.3.6 TIMER SETTINGS ......................................................................................................................................................................................1-19
1.1.3.7 ADJUST./CLEAN ........................................................................................................................................................................................1-20
1.1.3.8 PRINT LISTS................................................................................................................................................................................................1-20
1.1.3.9 COUNT CHECK ..........................................................................................................................................................................................1-20
1.1.3.10 Report Generating ......................................................................................................................................................................................1-20
1.1.3.11 Reports Generating (Automatically Generating Reports: if equipped with fax functions) ........................................................................1-21
1.1.4 Maintenance by the User ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.1.4.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................1-22
1.1.4.2 Cleaning the Fixing Pressure Roller .............................................................................................................................................................1-22
1.1.4.3 Other Cleaning ..............................................................................................................................................................................................1-22
1.1.4.4 Storing and Handling the Cartridge (Storing a Drum Unit Before Unpacking) ...........................................................................................1-22
1.1.4.5 Storing After Unpacking the Cartridge .........................................................................................................................................................1-23
1.1.4.6 Points to Note When Handling the Cartridge ...............................................................................................................................................1-23
1.1.4.7 Cleaning the White Roller (ADF) .................................................................................................................................................................1-24
1.1.4.8 Other Cleaning ..............................................................................................................................................................................................1-24
1.1.5 Safety ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-24
1.1.5.1 Safety of the Laser Scanner Unit ..................................................................................................................................................................1-24
1.1.5.2 CDRH Requirements ....................................................................................................................................................................................1-25
1.1.5.3 Handling the Laser Scanner Unit ..................................................................................................................................................................1-25
1.1.5.4 Safety of the Toner........................................................................................................................................................................................1-25
1.1.6 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-26
1.1.6.1 Mechanisms/Functions..................................................................................................................................................................................1-26
1.1.6.2 Others ............................................................................................................................................................................................................1-26
1.1.6.3 Reproduction Ratio .......................................................................................................................................................................................1-27
1.1.6.4 Mechanisms/Functions (ADF) ......................................................................................................................................................................1-27
1.1.6.5 Mechanisms/Functions (FAX) ......................................................................................................................................................................1-27
1.1.7 Function List .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-28
1.1.7.1 Printing Speed (AB type, A type) .................................................................................................................................................................1-28
1.1.7.2 Printing Speed (Inch type) ............................................................................................................................................................................1-29
1.1.7.3 Mechanisms/Functions (ADF) ......................................................................................................................................................................1-29
1.1.7.4 Mechanisms/Functions (FAX) ......................................................................................................................................................................1-30
Chapter 1
1.1 Product Specifications
1.1.1 Names of Parts
1.1.1.1 External View (ADF type)

0006-2706
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[2]
[14] [1]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[7]
[10]
[8]
[9]
F-1-1
T-1-1
[1] Reader unit slide lever [8] Control panel
[2] Reader unit [9] Cassette
[3] White sheet [10] Delivery tray
[4] White roller [11] Power cord connector assembly
[5] Copyboard glass [12] Modular cable connector assembly*1
[6] Manual feed tray [13] USB cable connector assembly
[7] Toner supply cover [14] Parallel interface cable connector assembly
*1: If equipped with fax functions.
1-1
Chapter 1
1.1.1.2 External View (copyboard type)

0006-2715
[3]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[6]
[9]
[7]
[8]
F-1-2
T-1-2
[1] Reader unit slide lever [7] Control panel
[2] Reader unit [8] Cassette
[3] Copyboard cover [9] Delivery tray
[4] Copyboard glass [10] Power cord connector assembly
[5] Manual feed tray [11] USB cable connector assembly
[6] Toner supply cover [12] Parallel interface cable connector assembly
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5] [4]
F-1-3
1-2
Chapter 1
T-1-3
[1] Drum shutter stopper [4] Right door
[2] Cartridge cover [5] Shipping screw slot
[3] Cartridge
1.1.1.3 External View (ADF)

0006-2722
[1] [2] [3]
[4]
F-1-4
T-1-4
[1] Original placement area [3] Delivery slot
[2] Open/close cover [4] Slide guide
1.1.1.4 External Covers

0007-3730
[1] ADF (copyboard cover)

[2] Cartridge cover
[3] Toner supply cover
[4] Front cover
[5] Delivery cover
[6] Delivery upper cover
[7] Delivery rear cover
[8] Left cover
[1]
[2]
[7]
[6] [5]
[4] [3]
F-1-5
[8] Right door
[9] Manual feed tray
[10] Rear cover
1-3
Chapter 1
OK
7
0
4
8
#
1
5
9
2
6
3
[9]
[8]
[10]
F-1-6
1.1.1.5 Cross Section (Body)

0006-2724
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[23] [22] [20] [18] [16] [14] [12]

[21] [19] [17] [15] [13] [11]
F-1-7
T-1-5
[1] Contact sensor [13] Registration roller
[2] Copyboard [14] Cassette pickup roller
[3] Laser scanner motor unit [15] Developing cylinder
[4] Laser unit [16] Transfer charging roller
[5] Reflecting mirror [17] Separation static eliminator
[6] Cartridge [18] Photopositive drum
[7] Reader unit [19] Fixing film unit
[8] Registration shutter [20] Fixing pressure roller
[9] Manual feed pickup roller [21] Delivery roller
[10] Manual feed tray [22] Cassette
[11] Right door [23] Delivery tray
[12] Vertical path roller
1-4
Chapter 1
1.1.1.6 Cross Section (ADF)

0006-2770
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[8]
[9]
[15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10]

F-1-8
T-1-6
[1] Slide guide [9] Original feed roller
[2] Open/close cover [10] Contact sensor (body)
[3] Original pickup roller [11] White roller
[4] Original feed/separation roller [12] ADF registration roller
[5] Original delivery tray [13] Registration sensor
[6] Original delivery roller [14] Original separation pad
[7] Original delivery sensor [15] Original sensor
[8] Delivery external guide
1.1.2 Using the Machine
1.1.2.1 Control Panel

0006-2629
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
Function
Fax Monitor R
Redial / Pause
ABC DEF
Memory D.T.
Reference
Coded Dial
Report Tone/+ GHI JKL MNO

Directory
OK
Delayed Space
Transmission Receive Mode PQRS TUV WXYZ
Book Sending Delete

Fax Resolution
Clear
[20] [19] [18]

[22] [21] [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10]
F-1-9
T-1-7
[1] Additional Functions Key
Press it to bring up the user mode menu for making various settings and registering items. The key flashes
when the machine is in user mode menu, and goes OFF in response to a press.
[2] LCD
Use it to refer to the Copy/Fax basic screen, various Settings screens, and error messages.
[3] Collate Key
1-5
Chapter 1
Press it to select sorting. The key remains ON when the machine is in sort mode, and goes OFF in response
to a press.
[4] 2 on 1 Key
Press it to reduce 2 originals automatically and on a single sheet.
[5] Copy Key*1
Press it when using a copier function. The key remains ON when the machine is in copier mode.
[6] Fax Key*1
Press it when using a fax function. The key remains ON when the machine is in fax mode.
[7] In Use/Memory Lamp*1
It goes ON when an original has been read, a delayed fax transmission has been selected, or memory
reception has been used. Further, it flashes while fax transmission is under way.
[8] Alarm Lamp
It flashes when a fault has occurred in the machine (e.g., paper jam).
[9] Energy Saver Key
Press it to manually select or deselect energy save mode. It remains ON when the machine is in energy
save mode, and goes OFF when the machine leaves the mode.
[10] Stop/Reset Key
Press it to stop making copies or transmitting a fax. Or, press it to reset the machine white making mode
settings (i.e., to return copier/fax mode to standard mode).
[11] Start Key
Press it to start making a copy or sending a fax.
[12] # Key
Press it to enter a "symbol"when registering fax/telephone number or when entering a fax telephone
number.
[13] Keypad
Use it to enter a copy count or a value for Zoom, or when entering a fax telephone number.
[14] * Key
Press it to generate a tone signal from a dial (pulse) circuit when using a fax function.
[15] Right Arrow/+ Key
Press it to add a value when making various settings or to indicate the next setting or an item.
[16] Image Quality Key
Press it to select a copy image quality type (text, text/photo, photo).
[17] Paper Select Key
Press it to select a source of paper (drawer (cassette), stack bypass (manual feed)).
[18] OK Key (Set Key*2)
Press it to store various selections or settings.
[19] Exposure Key
Press it to change the copy density. (auto, or manual from 9 steps)
[20] Enlarge/Reduce Key
1-6
Chapter 1
Press it to select a default Enlarge/Reduce ratio or Zoom.
[21] Left Arrow/- Key
Press it to subtract a value when making various settings or to indicate the previous setting or an item.
[22] One-Touch/Fax Function Key (after a press on the Function key)*1
Press it to dial a pre-registered telephone number. A press on the Function key will cause it to serve as the
Fax Function key.
*2: Only for the iR1310/1330/1370F models.
[1] [2] [3]
Function
[17] [4]
Fax Monitor R
[16] Redial / Pause

Memory D.T. [5]
Reference
Coded Dial
[15]
[6]
Report Tone/+
Directory
[14] [7]
Delayed Space
Transmission Receive Mode
[13] [8]
Book Sending Delete
Fax Resolution
[9]
Clear
[12] [11] [10]

F-1-10
T-1-8
[1] Tone/+ Key*1
Press it to generate a tone from a dial circuit. Press it to enter a + symbol when registering a telephone
number.
[2] D.T. Key*1
Press it to use a D.T. function.
[3] R Key*1
Press it to use an R function.
[4] Function Key*2
Press it to use the function key. A press on the Function key will cause the key to go ON, and another press
will cause it to go OFF.
[5] Redial/Pause Key*2
Press it to redial a number that has been dialed using the keypad (as in fax wait). When entering a
telephone number, it services as a Pause key.
*1: Function key is ON.
1-7
Chapter 1
[6] Coded Dial Key*1
Press it to use speed dialing.
[7] Directly Key*1
Use it to search for a one-touch or speed number using a name.
[8] Receive Mode Key*1
Press it to change the reception mode (faxtel, faxonly, DPRD*3, manual, ansmode).
[9] FAX Resolution Key*1
Use it to change the transmission resolution (standard, fine, photo, super fine, ultra fine).
[10] Clear Key*2
Press it to clear various settings that have been registered or made. Also, press it to delete all telephone
number/text input.
[11] Delete Key*2
Use it to delete a single character input.
[12] Space Key*2
Press it to put a space in a telephone number or a string of characters.
[13] Book Send Key*2
Press it to transmit multiple originals using the copyboard glass.
[14] Delayed Transmission Key*2
Press it to set a transmission time.
[15] Report Key*2
Press it to print out a communication-related report, dial list, user data list, or document memory list.
[16] Memory Reference Key*2
Press it to check the file that has been processed by memory transmission or memory reception.
[17] Fax Monitor Key*2
Press it to check the state of a fax communication.
*2: Function key is ON.
*3: Only for the iR1370F model.
1.1.3 User Mode Items
1.1.3.1 Outline
0006-2653
A press on the Additional Functions key in the control panel brings up the user mode menu. On the user mode menu, press the left/right arrow key to make menu
settings or increase/decrease a value; press the OK key to store the selected input.
The user mode menu is constructed as follows:
(The factory default setting is in bold face.)
1.1.3.2 COMMON SETTINGS

0006-2666
1. DEFAULT SETTINGS*1
T-1-9
COPY
1-8
Chapter 1
FAX
2. SW AFTER AUTO CLR*1

T-1-10
DEFAULT MODE
CURRENT MODE
3. VOLUME CONTROL*1
T-1-11
1.KEYPAD VOLUME
ON
VOLUME1 to 3 (1)
OFF
2.ALARM VOLUME*1
ON
VOLUME1 to 3 (1)
OFF
3.TX DONE TONE
ON
VOLUME1 to 3 (1)
ERROR ONLY
VOLUME1 to 3 (1)
OFF
4.RX DONE TONE
ON
VOLUME1 to 3 (1)
ERROR ONLY
VOLUME1 to 3 (1)
OFF
*1: Only if equipped with fax functions.

T-1-12
5.PRINTING END TONE

ON
VOLUME1 to 3 (1)
ERROR ONLY
VOLUME1 to 3 (1)
OFF
6.SCANNING END TONE
ON
VOLUME1 to 3 (1)
ERROR ONLY
VOLUME1 to 3 (1)
OFF
7.CALLING VOLUME
1 to 3 (2)
8.LINE MONITOR VOL.
ON
1-9
Chapter 1
VOLUME1 to 3 (2)
OFF
4. STACK BYPASS SIZE

T-1-13
OFF
BYPASS PAPER SIZE
FREE SIZE
SET ON LOADING
ON
BYPASS PAPER SIZE
A4*2
B5
A5
LGL
LTR*3
STMT
CUSTOM PAER SIZE

1.VERTICAL SIZE 76 to 216mm (216)
2.HORIZONTAL SIZE 127 to 356mm

(356)

*2: Factory default for A/AB area.
*3: Factory default for Inch area.
5. DRAWER PAPER SIZE
T-1-14
A4*1
LTR/LGL*2
B5
FOLIO
FOOLSCAP
6. PRINT EXPOSURE
T-1-15
5 settings (Center)
7. MP PAPERTYPE
T-1-16
PLAIN PAPER
TRACING PAPER
TRANSPARENCY
SPECIAL PAPER 1
SPECIAL PAPER 2
8. COPY POWER LEVEL
1-10
Chapter 1
T-1-17
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
9. TONER SAVER MODE

T-1-18
ON
OFF
10. PRT FEED INTERVAL

T-1-19
LONG INTERVAL
NORMAL INTERVAL
11. DISPLAY LANGUAGE*3
T-1-20
ENGLISH
FRENCH
SPANISH
GERMAN
ITALIAN
DUTCH
FINNISH
PORTUGUESE
NORWEGIAN
SWEDISH
DANISH
SLOVENE
CZECH
HUNGARIAN
RUSSIAN

*3: This setting may be unavailable depending on the value set for service mode #5 TYPE.
1.1.3.3 COPY SETTINGS

0006-2683
1. STD. IMAGEQUALITY
T-1-21
TEXT ORIGINAL
TEXT/PHOTO
PHOTO
1-11
Chapter 1
2. STANDARD EXPOSURE
T-1-22
AUTO
MANUAL
9 settings (Center)
3. STD ZOOM RATIO

T-1-23
50 to 200% (100%)
4. STANDARD COPY QTY

T-1-24
01 to 99 (01)
5. AUTO SORT
T-1-25
ON
OFF
6.MAX. SCAN LENGTH

T-1-26
330mm*1
356mm*2
7. PAPER SIZE GROUP

T-1-27
INCH*2
A*3
AB*4
8. SHARPNESS
T-1-28
1 to 9 (5)

*3: Factory default for A area.
*4: Factory default for AB area.
1.1.3.4 FAX SETTINGS*1

0006-2692
T-1-29
1.USER SETTINGS
1.TEL LINE SETTINGS
1.USER TEL NO.
1-12
Chapter 1
2.TEL LINE TYPE
TOUCH TONE
ROTARY PULSE
3.TX START SPEED
33600bps
14400bps
9600bps
7200bps
4800bps
2400bps
4.RX START SPEED
33600bps
14400bps
9600bps
7200bps
4800bps
2400bps
2.UNIT NAME
3.TX TERMINAL ID
1.TTI POSITION
OUTSIDE IMAGE
INSIDE IMAGE
2.TEL NUMBER MARK
FAX
TEL
4.DENSITY CONTROL
LIGHT
STANDARD
DARK
5.PROG. 1-TOUCH KEY
01 to 12
USE
1.REPORT
2.DELAYED TX
3.FAX MONITOR
4.MEMORY REFERENCE
5.BOOK SENDING
DO NOT
USE
6.OFFHOOK ALARM
ON
1-13
Chapter 1
OFF
7.R-KEY SETTING*2
PSTN
PBX
HOOKING
EARTH CONNECTION
PREFIX
*1:Only if equipped with fax functions.
*2:Only if equipped with fax functions and a 230V model.
2.REPORT SETTINGS
1.TX REPORT
OUTPUT NO
PRINT ERROR ONLY
REPORT WITH TX IMAGE
ON
OFF
OUTPUT YES
REPORT WITH TX IMAGE
ON
OFF
2.RX REPORT
OUTPUT
NO
PRINT ERROR ONLY
OUTPUT YES
3.ACTIVITY REPORT
ON
OFF
3.TX SETTINGS
1.ECM TX
ON
OFF
2.PAUSE TIME
01 to 15SEC (02)
3.AUTO REDIAL
ON
1.REDIAL TIMES
01 to 10TIMES (02)
2.REDIAL INTERBAL
1-14
Chapter 1
02 to 99MIN. (02)
3.TX ERROR RESEND
ON
RESEND TX FROM
ERROR & 1ST PG
ERROR PAGE
ALL PAGES
OFF
OFF
*1:Only if equipped with fax functions
4.ERASE FAILED TX
OFF
ON
5.TIME OUT
ON
OFF
4.RX SETTINGS
1.ECM RX
ON
OFF
2.FAX/TEL OPT. SET
1.RING START TIME
00 to 30SEC (08)
2.F/T RING TIME
15 to 300SEC (15)
3.F/T SWITCH ACTION
RECEIVE
DISCONNECT
3.DRPD: SELECT FAX*2
NORMAL RING
DOUBLE RING
SHORT-SHORT-LONG
SHORT-LONG-SHORT
OTHER RING TYPE
4.INCOMING RING
OFF
ON
RING COUNT
1-15
Chapter 1
01 to 99TIMES (02)
5.MAN/AUTO SWITCH
OFF
ON
F/T RING TIME
01 to 99SEC (15)
6.REMOTE RX
ON
REMOTE RX ID
00 to 99 (25)
OFF
*2: Only for the iR1370F model.
5.PRINTER SETTINGS
1.RX REDUCTION
ON
1.RX REDUCTION
AUTO SELECTION
FIXED REDUCTION
97%
95%
90%
75%
2.SELECT
REDUCE
DIR
VERTICAL ONLY
HORIZ & VERTICAL
OFF
2.TONER SUPPLY LOW
KEEP PRINTING
RX TO MEMORY
6. SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.FAX DEFAULT
1.RESOLUTION
OFF
STANDARD
FINE
PHOTO
1-16
Chapter 1
SUPER FINE
ULTRA FINE
2.BOOK TX SCAN SIZE
A4*2
A5*2
LTR*2
LGL*2
SHEET
2.LOCK PHONE
ON
OFF
*2: This setting may be unavailable depending on the valve set for service mode #1
SSSW>SW-14>bit 0,1.
3.COUNTRY SELECT*2
UK
GERMANY
FRANCE
ITALY
SPAIN
HOLLAND
DENMARK
NORWAY
SWEDEN
FINLAND
AUSTRIA
BELGIUM
SWITZERLAND
PORTUGAL
IRELAND
GREECE
LUXEMBOURG
HUNGARY
CZECH
RUSSIA
SLOVENIA
SOUTH AFRICA
OTHERS
1-17
Chapter 1
*2: This setting may be unavailable depending on the value set for service mode #5 TYPE.
1.1.3.5 ADD. REGISTRATION*1

0006-2705
T-1-30
1.1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
01 to 12
1. TEL NUMBER ENTRY
2. NAME
3. OPTIONAL SETTING
ON
1. TX TIME SETTING
1 to 5
2. TX TYPE
REGULAR TX
SUBADDRESS TX
1. PASSWORD
2. SUBADDRESS
POLLING RX
1. PASSWORD
2. SUBADDRESS
OFF
2. CODED SPD DIAL
*00 to *99
1. TEL NUMBER ENTRY
2. NAME
3. OPTIONAL SETTING
ON
1. TX TIME SETTING
2. TX TYPE
REGULAR TX
1-18
Chapter 1
SUBADDRESS TX
1. PASSWORD
2. SUBADDRESS
POLLING RX
1. PASSWORD
2. SUBADDRESS
OFF
3. GROUP DIAL
01 to 12
1. TEL NUMBER ENTRY
2. NAME
3. TX TIME SETTING
1 to 5
1.1.3.6 TIMER SETTINGS

0006-2714
T-1-31
1 DATE/TIME SETTING
2 AUTO CLEAR
ON
AUTO CLEAR TIME
1 to 9MIN. (2)
OFF
3 ENERGY SAVER
ON
ENERGY SVR TIME
03 to 30MIN. (5)
OFF
4 DAILY TIMER SET
1. SUN
2. MON
3. TUE
4. WED
5. THU
6. FRI
7. SAT
1-19
Chapter 1
5 DATE SETUP
YYYY MM/
DD
MM/DD
YYYY
DD/MM
YYYY
1.1.3.7 ADJUST./CLEAN
0006-2719
1. ROLLER CLEANING
2. CLEAN ADF ROLLER*1
3. RESTART PRINTER
4. MIX TONER
*1: Only if equipped with ADF functions.
1.1.3.8 PRINT LISTS

0006-2720
T-1-32
1 USER DATA
2 SPEED DIAL LIST*1
1. 1-TOUCH LIST
1. NO SORT
2. SORT
2. CODED DIAL LIST
1. NO SORT
2. SORT
3. 1-TOUCH(DETAIL)
1. NO SORT
2. SORT
4. CODED(DETAIL)
1. NO SORT
2. SORT
5. GROUP DIAL LIST
3 CANCEL REPORT
1.1.3.9 COUNT CHECK

0006-2738
101: TOTAL T1: XX*2

201: COPY T1: XX*3
000*3
000*3
000*3
000*3
*2: Cannot be changed.
*3: The specifics indicated by the Count Check menu may be selected in service mode (#3 NUMERIC PARAM; No. 57 through 61).
1.1.3.10 Report Generating

0006-2742
The user can generate any of the following report manually:

T-1-33
Name of report Operation
User data list Select a report in the user mode menu. Or, select fax
mode. Press Function key and Report key in this order.
Use the Left or Right Arrow key to select a list to print,
then press OK key.
1-20
Chapter 1
Name of report Operation
1-touch spd dial list*1
1-touch dial spd dial list (detail)*1
Coded speed dial list*1
Coded speed dial list (detail)*1
Group dial list*1
Docement memory list*1 Select fax mode. Press Function key and Report key in
this order. Use the Left or Right Arrow key to select a
list to print, then press OK key.
Activity report*1
1.1.3.11 Reports Generating (Automatically Generating Reports: if equipped with fax functions)
0006-2750
The user can make appropriate settings in user mode so that the following reports may be generated automatically.
T-1-34
Name of report Settings
TX report Make output settings for auto generation under '2.REPORT

SETTINGS' in '3.FAX SETTINGS' of the user mode menu.
Error TX report
RX report
Activity report
Multiple activity report First, enable '2. TX REPORT' under '2.REPORT SETTINGS' of 3.
FAX SETTINGS' on the user mode menu; a report will be generated
if a broadcast transmission is used (instead of a TX report).
Memory clear list If the machine remains without power for a specific period of time
(about 2 hr or more) while an image exists in its memory, the power
of the vanadium lithium secondary battery (BAT2) will become
exhausted. A report will automatically be generated when the
machine is turned on.
Memory Clear List
07/30/2001 17:52 FAX 001
*** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * MEMORY CLEAR REPORT * * *
*** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
MEMORY FILES DELETED
TX/RX NO MODE DESTINATION TEL/ID PGS. SET TIME ST. TIME

0002 DELAYED TX 1 07/30 13:51 13:59
0002 DELAYED TX 1 07/30 13:51 13:51
0002 MEMORY RX 1 07/30 13:53 -----
0002 MEMORY RX 1 07/30 13:54 -----
F-1-11
T-1-35
TX/RX NO: 4-digit indication
1-21
Chapter 1
MODE: transmission, delayed transmission, or reception
DESTINATION TEL/ID: one-touch dial/speed dial number, abbreviation of other party
PGS.: number of pages stored
SET TIME : date/time (in 24-hr notation)
ST. TIME: start of storage (in 24-hr notation)
1.1.4 Maintenance by the User
1.1.4.1 Outline
0006-3080
The user is expected to perform the following so that the machine may be used in its best condition at all times.
1.1.4.2 Cleaning the Fixing Pressure Roller

0006-3081
If the faces or the backs of printed sheets show soiling in the form of black dots, clean the fixing pressure roller as follows:
1) Place an A4 or larger sheet of plain paper in the manual feed tray.
2) Press the Additional Functions key, and hold down the Right Arrow key or the Left Arrow key until the LCD indicates '6. ADJUST/CLEAN'.
3) Press the OK key.
4) Check to make sure that the LCD indicates '1.ROLLER CLEANING', and press the OK key. In response, the machine will start cleaning the fixing pressure
roller.
MEMO:
It takes about 3 min before the paper is delivered to the delivery tray after the cleaning of the fixing pressure roller is started.
1.1.4.3 Other Cleaning

0006-3084
If images tend to be soiled, advise the user to clean the following as needed.
T-1-36
No. Part Instructions
1 Copyboard glass Wipe it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well); then, dry
wipe it.
2 Copyboard glass retainer Wipe it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well); then, dry
wipe it.
3 Vertical size plate Wipe it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well); then, dry
wipe it.
4 White plate Wipe it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well); then, dry
wipe it.
1.1.4.4 Storing and Handling the Cartridge (Storing a Drum Unit Before Unpacking)
0007-3724
Whether it is left packed or unpacked, or is fitted to the machine, the cartridge is subject to the effects of the environment, and will deteriorate over time. The speed
of deterioration depends on the site or storage condition, and cannot be generalized. Take full care when storing or handing it.
If the drum unit is to be stored in a storeroom or a workshop, be sure to refer to the following tabre, and keep the following in mind:
- Avoid direct sunshine.
- Avoid vibration.
- Avoid impact. (Take care not to drop it.)
T-1-37
Temperature
Normal 0 to 35 deg C / 32 to 95 deg F

(9/10 of total storage period)
Severe High 35 to 40 deg C / 95 to 104 deg F

Low -20 to 0 deg C / -4 to 32 deg F
Change in temperature 40 to 15 deg C / 104 to 59 deg F

(within about 3 min) -20 to 25 deg C / -4 to 77 deg F
Humidity
Normal 35 to 85%RH
Severe High 85 to 95%RH

(1/10 of total storage time)
Low 10 to 35%RH
Atmospheric pressure 0.61 to 1.01hpa
1-22
Chapter 1
Effective period 2.5 yr (approx.)
1.1.4.5 Storing After Unpacking the Cartridge

0007-3726
The photosensitive drum is made of organic photo-conducting material (OPC), and will deteriorate if exposed to strong light. It is also used to hold toner inside it
after setting the toner bottle. Be sure to advise the user to be fully careful when storing and handling the cartridge.
(The cartridge must always be put inside a protective bag for storage.)
a. Use a protective bag for storage.

b. Avoid areas subject to direct sunshine (e.g., near a window). Do not leave it alone inside a card, as the temperature can rise to an extremely high level. (These
are also true even if the cartridge is put in a protective bag.)
c. Avoid areas subject to high temperature/humidity or low temperature/humidity, areas subject to rapid changes in temperature or humidity, or areas subject to
condensation (e.g., near an air conditioner).
d. Avoid areas exposed to corrosive gas (e.g., insecticide) or salty air.
e. Avoid areas subject to dust, ammonium gas, or organic solvent gas.
f. Avoid areas near a CRT display, disk drive, and floppy disk. (The magnetism from the cartridge can destroy the data.)
g. Keep it out of reach of children.
h. Keep the temperature between 0 deg and 35 deg C (32 deg and 95 deg F).
1.1.4.6 Points to Note When Handling the Cartridge

0007-3727
a. Do not shake the cartridge after setting the toner bottle.

b. Do not place the cartridge on its end or upside down as shown in the following firure. Also, do not swing it.
F-1-12
c. Do not touch the surface of the drum unit.
F-1-13
d. Do not touch the developing cylinder.
1-23
Chapter 1
F-1-14
e. Do not disassemble the cartridge.
f. Do not subject the cartridge to unnecessary vibration or impact. In particular, do not force down on the photosensitive drum through the shutter found under
the cartridge.
g. Do not keep the cartridge inside the machine when moving the machine. Be sure to put the cartridge in its protective bag, or wrap it in thick cloth to avoid light.
h. Do not place the cartridge near a CRT display, disk drive, or floppy disk, as the magnetism from the cartridge can destroy the data.
i. Keep the cartridge out of reach of children.
j. The photosensitive drum is susceptible to light, thus the presence of a shutter under the cartridge. If exposed to strong light for a long time, the copies may
start to develop white spots or vertical bands. These faults may disappear if the machine is left at rest for some time, or the memory (cause of the faults) may
remain permanently.
If you must take out the cartridge from the machine, be sure to put it in its protective bag, or cover it. Never leave it alone unprotected.
MEMO:
If the photosensitive drum is exposed to 1500 lux (general light) for 5 min and then left alone for 5 min in a dark place, it may recover to a level that will not cause
practical problems. Nevertheless, avoid direct sunshine by all means, which is as strong as 10000 to 30000 lux.
k. Advise the user to send all used drum unit to the designated place.
Do not throw a drum unit (used or not used) into fire. It may burst or explode.
Whenever possible, keep the drum unit intact with the developing unit. If you must separate the drum unit and the developing unit as when checking image faults,
be sure to keep it in a protective bag to prevent damage to the drum surface.
l. Be sure to use the drum shutter stopper as replacing the drum unit.
m. Use the packaging box of the new drum unit if available.
1.1.4.7 Cleaning the White Roller (ADF)

0006-3094
If the backs of originals tend to become soiled, clean the white roller as follows:
1) Open the ADF, and clean the bottom of the white roller with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well). If the dirt is excessive, use alcohol with lint-free
paper. Be sure to dry wipe it with a cloth or lint-free paper thereafter.
2) Press the Additional Functions key, and hold down the Right Arrow or Left Arrow key until the LCD indicates '6.ADJUST/CLEAN'.
4) Hold down the Right Arrow key or the Left Arrow key until the LCD indicates '2.CLEAN ADF ROLLER'.
6) When the LCD indicates 'START CLEAN : [SET]', press the OK key. In response, the white roller makes a 120 deg turn.
7) Wipe the bottom of the white roller with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well); then, dry wipe it.
8) Repeat steps 6) and 7) to clean the entire surface of the white roller.
9) Press the Stop key to end.
1.1.4.8 Other Cleaning

0006-3095
If images tend to become soiled, advise the user to clean the following as needed.
T-1-38
No. Part Instructions
1 White plate Wipe it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well); then, dry
wipe it.
1.1.5 Safety
1.1.5.1 Safety of the Laser Scanner Unit

0006-2781
The radiation from a laser until can be harmful to the human body. The machine's laser scanner unit is sealed by means of a protective housing and external covers,
so that the light
it produces will not escape outside, ensuring the safety of the user as long as the machine is used under normal conditions.
1-24
Chapter 1
1.1.5.2 CDRH Requirements

0006-2833
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the US Department of Health and Human Services put into force a set of requirements with a view to
regulating laser-related products on August 2, 1976. The requirements apply to laser products produced on August 1, 1996, or later, and all laser products must
comply with them if they are to be marketed in the US. The following is the label that indicates the compliance with the CDRH requirements, and it must be attached
to all laser products that are sold in the US.
O
K
7
0
4
8
#
1
5
9
2
6
3 F-1-15
The text may differ from product to product or from model to model.
1.1.5.3 Handling the Laser Scanner Unit

0006-2834
When servicing the area around the machine's laser scanner unit, take full care not to put any tool with a high reflectance (e.g., screwdriver) into the laser path. Be
sure also to remove any watch, ring, or the like, as they can reflect the laser beam to damage your eye. The machine's laser light is red, and its covers that can reflect
the laser beam are identified using the following label. The laser scanner unit of this model cannot be adjusted in the field.
Fa
x Mo
nitor
Re Memo 01
fer
en ry
ce 02
Re R
po 07
rt
Tran De 03 D.T. Fu
sm layed nctio
Bo
iss
ion 04 To
08 Ra n
ok ne dia Ad
Se /+ l / Pa dition
nd
ing 05 Sp
09 use al Fu
ace Co
rde nctio
06 De
10 d Di
al ns
lete Direc
11 Re
try
Clea cie Co
r ve llate
12 Mo
de
Re Send
solut ing 2 In
ion 1
Co
py
Ra
tio Set
Ex
po CO
sure PY
Pa
Im
ag
pe
r Se
lec
t
GH
I
1 AB
C
FA
X
e Qu
ality PQ
RS
4 JK
L
2 DE
F In
Us
e/
7 TU
V
5 MN
O
3 Me
Sto
mo
ry
Ala
En
erg
y Se
TO OP
8 WXY
Z
6 p/
Res
rm rve
et
NE
0 ER
SY
MB
9
# OL
S Sta
rt
F-1-16
The label is attached to covers inside the machine used to block out laser radiation.
1.1.5.4 Safety of the Toner

0006-2836
The machine's toner is a non-toxic material consisting of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye. If toner came into contact with your skin or clothes, remove as
much of it as possible with dry tissue, and wash with water. Do not use hot water, as it will turn the toner into a jelly and cause it to permanently fuse with the fibers
of the clothes. Also, do not bring toner into contact with vinyl material, as they are likely to react against each other.
Do not throw toner into fire. It may explode.
1-25
Chapter 1
1.1.6 Product Specifications
1.1.6.1 Mechanisms/Functions
0006-2624
Body Desk top (ADF standard type, copyboard standard type)

Copyboard Fixed
Light source type LED
Lens type CIS (contact sensor)
Photosensitive medium OPC drum (30-mm dia.): Drum unit
Reproduction method Indirect electrostatic
Charging method Roller contact
Exposure method Semiconductor laser
Copy density adjustment Auto (AE) or manual
function
Development method Dry, 1-component toner projection
Pickup method Cassette: 1 cassette Multifeeder: 1 feeder
Transfer method Roller transfer
Drum cleaning method Rubber blade
Separation method Static (static eliminator) + curvature
Fixing method SURF (on-demand)
Reading resolution 600 x 600 dpi
Copying resolution 1200 equivalent x 600 dpi
Printing resolution 2400 equivalent x 600 dpi
Original type Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.)
Maximum original size A4 (297 × 210 mm/11.7" × 8.3") LGL (356 × 216 mm/14.0" × 8.5")
Reproduction Ratio 4R3E (AB 4R3E
configuraiton)
Reproduction Ratio 2R2E (A 2R2E
configuration)
Reproduction Ratio 3R2E (Inch 3R2E
configuration)
Reproduction ratio 50% to 200% (1% increments)
Warm-up time 8.5 sec (after plug in)/1.0 sec (after pressing Energy Saver key)
First print time 13 sec or less 21.5 sec (after plug in) 18 sec (after pressing Energy Saver
key)
Continuous reproduction 99 pages max.
Cassette paper size 250-sheet cassette (Fixed to A4 size): A4 250-sheet cassette (Universal):
LGL, LTR, A4, B5 500-sheet cassette: LGL, LTR, A4
Multifeeder paper size Width: 76.2 to 216 mm (3.0" to 8.5") Length: 127 to 356 mm (5.0" to
14.0") Weight: 56 to 128 g/m2
Cassette paper type 250-sheet cassette: Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), recycled paper (64 to 80
g/m2), col-oredpaper (64 to 80 g/m2) 500-sheet cassette: Plain paper (64
to 80 g/m2), recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2), colored paper (64 to 80 g/
m2 )
Multifeeder tray paper type Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2 ), recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2 ), colored
paper (64 to 80 g/m2 ), transparency, tracing paper, label, postcard, thick
paper (56 to 128 g/m2 ), envelope
Cassette pickup method Claw separation, front loading
Multifeeder tray capacity 10 mm deep, (about 100 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper)
Non-image width (leading edge) 3.0 +/- 2.0 mm (0.12" +/- 0.08")
Non-image width (left/right) 2.5 +/- 2.0 mm (0.10" +/- 0.08")
Delivery tray stack 100 sheets max.
Image mode Yes (text, text/photo, photo)
Toner save mode Yes
Auto power off No
Energy save mode Yes (manually ON/OFF, auto OFF after specific time, auto ON after fax
reception/print data reception)
Toner level detection function Yes
1.1.6.2 Others
0006-2639
Operating environment 0 deg to 35 deg C/32 deg to 95 deg C

(temperature range)
Operating environment 35% to 85%
(humidity range)
Operating environment 0.61 to 1.01 hPa (0.6 to 1 atm)
(atmospheric pressure)
Power supply rating 120 V (50/60 Hz), 230 V (50/60 Hz)
1-26
Chapter 1
Power consumption Maximum: 780 W or less Standby: 16 W (approx.; reference

only) Operation: 280 W (approx.; reference only) Energy save
stanby: 2 W or less (approx.; reference only)
Noise Standby Copyboard type: 40 dB or less (impulse mode) ADF type: 40
dB or less (impulse mode: reference) Copying Copyboard type: 66 dB
or less (fast mode) ADF type: 69 dB or less (fast mode: reference)
Ozone 0.05 ppm (Ave.)
Dimensions Width Copyboard type: 475 mm (18.7"), ADF type: 475 mm (18.7")
Depth Copyboard type: 442 mm (17.4"), ADF type: 442 mm (17.4")
Height 250-Sheet cassette Copyboard type: 295 mm (11.6"), ADF
type: 352 mm (13.9") 500-Sheet cassette Copyboard type: 327 mm
(12.9"), ADF type: 384 mm (15.1")
Weight 250-Sheet cassette Copyboard type: 20.5 kg, ADF type: 22.6 kg 500-
Sheet cassette Copyboard type: 21.9 kg, ADF type: 24.0 kg
1.1.6.3 Reproduction Ratio

0006-4274
Reproduction Ratio 4R3E (AB Direct 1 : 1.000 Reduce I 1 : 0.500 Reduce III 1 : 0.707 Reduce
configuraiton) V 1 : 0.816 Reduce VI 1 : 0.865 Enlarge I 1 : 1.154 Enlarge III
1 : 1.414 Enlarge IV 1 : 2.000
Reproduction Ratio 2R2E (A Direct 1 : 1.000 Reduce I 1 : 0.500 Reduce III 1 : 0.707 Enlarge
configuration) III 1 : 1.414 Enlarge IV 1 : 2.000
Reproduction Ratio 3R2E (Inch Direct 1 : 1.000 Reduce I 1 : 0.500 Reduce II 1 : 0.647 Reduce
configuration) IV 1 : 0.786 Enlarge II 1 : 1.294 Enlarge IV 1 : 2.000
1.1.6.4 Mechanisms/Functions (ADF)

0006-2701
Pickup method Auto pickup/delivery (top separation by double-pad)

Original type Single-sided sheet (50 to 128 g/m2 )
Maximum original size A4R, B5R, A5R, B6, LGL, LTRR, STMTR Length: 128 to 356 mm (5"
to 14"), width: 139 to 216 mm (5.5" to 8.5")
Original orientation Face-down
Original position Center reference
Original processing mode From single-sided to single-sided
Original reading Stream reading
Stack 30 sheets or less (if A4/LTR or smaller) 15 sheets or less (if LGL)
Mixed original sizes Yes (only if of the same paper configuration)
Original AE detection No
Original size detection function No
Stamp No
Power supply rating From host (5 VDC and 24 V)
Operating environment Same as host
1.1.6.5 Mechanisms/Functions (FAX)

0006-4312
Applicable lines Analog line (one line) PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network)
Transmission method Half-duplex
Transmission control protocol ITU-T T.30 binary protocol/ECM protocol
Modulation method G3 image signals: ITU-T V.27ter (2.4kbps, 4.8kbps) ITU-T V.29
(7.2kbps, 9.6kbps) ITU-T V.17 (14.4kbps, 12kbps, TC9.6kbps,
TC7.2kbps) ITU-T V.34 (2.4Kbps, 4.8Kbps, 7.2Kbps, 9.6Kbps, 12Kbps,
14.4Kbps,16.8Kbps, 19.2Kbps, 21.6Kbps, 24Kbps, 26.4Kbps,
28.8Kbps, 31.2Kbps, 33.6Kbps) G3 procedure signals: ITU-T V.21
(No.2) 300bps ITU-T V.8, V34 (300bps, 600bps, 1200bps)
Transmission speed 33.6Kbps, 31.2Kbps, 28.8Kbps, 26.4Kbps, 24Kbps, 21.6Kbps,
19.2Kbps, 16.8Kbps, 14.4Kbps, 12Kbps, TC9.6Kbps, TC7.2Kbps,
9.6Kbps, 7.2Kbps, 4.8Kbps, 2.4Kbps With automatic fallback function
Coding MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Error correction ITU-T ECM
Canon express protocol None
Transmission output level from 0 to -15 dBm
Minimum receive input level -43 dBm (at. V.17)
Modem IC CONEXANT FM336
Image reading method Contact sensor scanning method
Scanning line density Horizontal: Standard/Fine/Superfine 203.2 dpi (8 dots/mm) Ultrafine
406.4 dpi (16 dots/mm) (Interpolated) Vertical: Standard 97.79 dpi
(3.85 lines/mm) Fine 195.58 dpi (7.7 lines/mm) Superfine/Ultrafine
391.16 dpi (15.4 lines/mm)
Scanning density adjustment Light, Standard, Dark: The density level of each mode can be selected
by the user mode menu.
Half tone 64-gradation error diffusion system
1-27
Chapter 1
Printing resolution 600dpi × 600dpi

Reduction for reception Fixed reduction (75%, 90%, 95%, 97%) Auto reduction (70 to 100%)
FAX/TEL switching Method CNG detection Message None Pseudo CI None
Answering machine connection Yes (Telephone answering priority type) CNG detection
DPRD Yes
Polling Polling transmission: None Polling reception: Receives from a fax in
automatic transmission mode One touch locations Max. 12
Confidential reception None
Confidential transmission None
Remote reception Method ID call# (ID input method) Remote ID (with ID call#) 2
digits (Default: 25)
Memory reception Yes
Auto dialing Telephone number digits Average 39 digits One-touch dial Max. 12
Coded speed dial Max. 100 Group dial Max. 111 (One-touch: 11,
Coded speed dial: 100) Redial Numeric button redial function (max.
120 digits)
Delayed transmission Locations Max. 122 (One-touch: 12, Coded speed dial: 100, Numeric
button: 10) No. of reseruation Max. 20
Broadcast transmission Locations Max. 122 (One-touch: 12, Coded speed dial: 100, Numeric
button: 10) Group button addresses Max. 111 (One-touch: 11, Coded
speed dial: 100)
Relay broadcasting originating None
Relay broadcasting None
Closed network None
Direct mail prevention None
Dual access File No. of reservation Max. 21 files
Activity management a) User report Activity report (Every 20 transactions) TX/RX report 1-
touch spd dial list Coded speed dial list Group dial list Memory clear list
User data list Multi activity report Document memory list b) Service
report System data list System dump list Key history report Counter
report Print spec report
Transmitting terminal Items: Time, telephone No. (max 20 digits), senders ID, address, number
identification of transmitted pages (max 3 digits) Address: Can be registered with one-
touch/ coded speed dial keys (16 characters) Senders ID: 20 characters
(1 name)
Program key None
Redial Interval: 2 min. (from 2 to 99 min. can be selected in user data) Count: 2
times (from 1 to 10 times can be selected in user data)
Memory backup Backup contents: dial registration data, user data, service data, time
Backup IC: 128 Kbyte SRAM Backup battery: Lithium battery 3.0 V
DC / 560 mAh Battery life: Approx. 5 years
Image data backup Backup contents: Memory reception, delayed transmission and
broadcast transmission image data, activity management report Backup
IC: 16 Mbyte SDRAM Backup coding method: JBIG Backup battery:
Rechargeable vanadium lithium battery 3.0V DC/ 50 mAh Battery life:
40 cycles with 100% discharge (Temperature 77 deg F (25 deg C))
Time precision +/-60 sec per month
1.1.7 Function List
1.1.7.1 Printing Speed (AB type, A type)

0006-2654
T-1-39
Ratio Size Paper size copies/min
Cassette Manual feed

tray*1
Direct A4 (210 × 297mm / 8.3" x A4 12 12

11.7")
B5 (182 × 257mm / 7.2" x B5 13 13
10.1")
A5 (149 × 210mm / 5.9" x A5 - 13
8.3")
Reduce I (50.0%) A4R -> postcard postcard - 6 *3
III (70.7%) A4R -> A5R A5 - 13
V*2 (81.6%) B5R -> A5R A5 - 13
VI*2 (86.5%) A4R -> B5R B5 13 13
1-28
Chapter 1

tray*1
Enlarge I *2 (115.4%) B5R -> A4R A4 12 12
III (141.4%) A5R -> A4R A4 12 12
IV (200.0%) postcard -> A4R A4 12 12
*1: If the manual feed tray is in use, the copying speed is indicated assuming that the paper
size setting is correct.
*2: AB-configured paper only.
*3: In the case of "Special paper 2 mode" selected at the user menu.
The machine performs 3-step copying speed reduction control designed to prevent cracking of the fixing heater, otherwise possibly occurring as a result overheating
of the ends of the fixing assembly.
1.1.7.2 Printing Speed (Inch type)

0006-2671
T-1-40

tray*1
Direct LTR (216 × 279mm / 8.5" LTR 13 13
x 11.0")
LGL (216 × 356mm / 8.5" LGL 10 10
x 14.0")
STMTR (139 × 216mm / STMT - 13
5.5" x 8.5")
Reduce I (50.0%) MIN STMT - 13
II (64.7%) LGL -> STMT STMT - 13
IV (78.6%) LGL -> LTR LTR 13 13
Enlarge II (129.4%) STMTR -> LTRR LTR 13 13
IV (200.0%) MAX (LTR) LTR 13 13
*1: If the manual feed tray is in use, the copying speed is indicated assuming that the paper size setting is correct.
The machine performs 3-step copying speed reduction control designed to prevent cracking of the fixing heater, otherwise possibly occurring as a result overheating
of the ends ofthe fixing assembly.
1.1.7.3 Mechanisms/Functions (ADF)

0006-2951
T-1-41
Items Specifications
Pickup Auto pickup/delivery (top separation by double-pad)
Original type Single-sided sheet (50 to 128 g/m2)
Original size A4R, B5R, A5R, B6, LGL, LTRR, STMTR
Length: 128 to 356 mm (5" to 14"), width: 139 to 216 mm (5.5" to 8.5")
Original orientation Face-down
Original position Center reference
Original processing mode From single-sided to single-sided
Original reading Stream reading
Stack 30 sheets or less (if A4/LTR or smaller)
15 sheets or less (if LGL)
Mixed original sizes Yes (only if of the same paper configuration)
Original AE detection No
Original size recognition No
1-29
Chapter 1
Items Specifications
Stamp No
Power supply From host (5 VDC and 24 V)
Operating environment Same as host
The machine may not be able to handle the following types of originals:
- original with a carbon back

- original made of multiple layers (pasted, bound)
- original with a cut-off, 5 or more holes, or tear
- original with a clip, adhesive tape, or glue
- original with curling, wrinkling, or appreciable bending
- transparency
Advise the user to remove as much curling as possible, if any, and place the original in the original tray so that the side with the curling is the trailing edge.
1.1.7.4 Mechanisms/Functions (FAX)

0006-2968
Applicable lines
Analog line (one line)
- PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network)
Transmission method
Half-duplex
Transmission control protocol

ITU-T T.30 binary protocol/ECM protocol
Modulation method
T-1-42
G3 image signals ITU-T V.27ter (2.4kbps, 4.8kbps)
ITU-T V.29 (7.2kbps, 9.6kbps)
ITU-T V.17 (14.4kbps, 12kbps, TC9.6kbps, TC7.2kbps)
ITU-T V.34 (2.4Kbps, 4.8Kbps, 7.2Kbps, 9.6Kbps, 12Kbps,

14.4Kbps, 16.8Kbps, 19.2Kbps, 21.6Kbps, 24Kbps, 26.4Kbps,
28.8Kbps, 31.2Kbps, 33.6Kbps)
G3 procedure signals ITU-T V.21 (No.2) 300bps
ITU-T V.8, V34 (300bps, 600bps, 1200bps)
Transmission speed
33.6Kbps, 31.2Kbps, 28.8Kbps, 26.4Kbps, 24Kbps, 21.6Kbps, 19.2Kbps, 16.8Kbps, 14.4Kbps, 12Kbps, TC9.6Kbps, TC7.2Kbps, 9.6Kbps, 7.2Kbps, 4.8Kbps,
2.4Kbps With automatic fallback function
Coding
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Error correction
ITU-T ECM
Canon express protocol

None
Transmission output level

from 0 to -15 dBm
Minimum receive input level

-43 dBm (at. V.17)
Modem IC
CONEXANT FM336
Scanner section specifications
Scanning method
Contact sensor scanning method
Scanning line density

Horizontal:
T-1-43
Standard/Fine/Superfine 203.2 dpi (8 dots/mm)
Ultrafine 406.4 dpi (16 dots/mm) (Interpolated)
Vertical:
1-30
Chapter 1
Standard 97.79 dpi (3.85 lines/mm)
Fine 195.58 dpi (7.7 lines/mm)
Superfine/Ultrafine 391.16 dpi (15.4 lines/mm)
Scanning density adjustment

Light, Standard, Dark: The density level of each mode can be selected
by the user mode menu.
Half tone
64-gradation error diffusion system
Printer section specifications
Printing resolution
600dpi × 600dpi
Reduction for reception

Fixed reduction (75%, 90%, 95%, 97%)
Auto reduction (70 to 100%)
Functions
STAMP
None
FAX/TEL switching
T-1-44
Method CNG detection
Message None
Pseudo CI None
Answering machine connection

Yes (Telephone answering priority type)
CNG detection
DPRD
Yes
Polling
Polling transmission
None
Polling reception
Receives from a fax in automatic transmission mode
One touch locations Max. 12
Confidential reception
None
Confidential transmission
None
Remote reception
T-1-45
Method ID call# (ID input method)
Remote ID (with ID call#) 2 digits (Default : 25)
Memory reception
Yes
T-1-46
Auto dialing
Telephone number digits Average 39 digits
One-touch dial Max. 12
Coded speed dial Max. 100
Group dial Max. 111 (One-touch : 11, Coded speed dial : 100)
Redial Numeric button redial function (max. 120 digits)
Delayed transmission
1-31
Chapter 1
Locations Max. 122 (One-touch : 12, Coded speed dial : 100)
Numeric button: 10)
No. of reseruation Max. 20
Broadcast transmission
Locations Max. 122 (One-touch : 12, Coded speed dial : 100)
Numeric button: 10)
Group button addresses Max. 111 (One-touch : 11, Coded speed dial : 100)
Relay broadcasting originating
None
Relay broadcasting
None
Closed network
None
Direct mail prevention
None
Dual access
File No. of reservation Max. 21 files
Activity management
a) User report
Activity report
(Every 20 transactions)
TX/RX report
1-touch spd dial list
Coded speed dial list
Group dial list
Memory clear list
User data list
Multi activity report
Document memory list
b) Service report
System data list
System dump list
Key history report
Counter report
Print spec report
T-1-47
Transmitting terminal identification
Items Time, telephone No. (max 20 digits), senders ID,

address, number of transmitted pages (ma x 3 digits)
Address Can be registered with one-touch/ coded speed dial keys
(16 characters)
Senders ID 20 characters (1 name)
1-32
Chapter 1
Program key
None
Redial
Interval 2 min. (from 2 to 99 min. can be selected in user data)
Count 2 times (from 1 to 10 times can be selected in user data)
Memory backup
Backup contents dial registration data, user data, service data, time
Backup IC 128 Kbyte SRAM
Backup battery Lithium battery 3.0 V DC / 560 mAh
Battery life Approx. 5 years
Image data backup
Backup contents Memory reception, delayed transmission and broadcast

transmission image data, activity management report
Backup IC 16 Mbyte SDRAM
Backup coding method JBIG
Backup battery Rechargeable vanadium lithium battery 3.0V DC/ 50

mAh
Battery life 40 cycles with 100% discharge
(Temperature 77 deg F (25 deg C))
Time
precision +/-60 sec per month
T-1-48
The foregoing specifications are subject to change for product improvement.
1-33
Chapter 2 Installation
Contents
Contents
2.1 Making Pre-Checks........................................................................................................................................................2-1

2.1.1 Selecting the Site.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Unpacking and Installation ............................................................................................................................................2-1
2.2.1 Before Starting ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2.2 Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2.3 Unpacking .................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2.4 Fitting the Cartridge ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.5 Fitting the Toner bottle ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.2.6 Putting Paper in the Cassette........................................................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2.7 Putting Paper in the Manual Feed Tray ....................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.8 Connecting the Interface Cable.................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.9 Connect the power cord ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.10 Fitting the Delivery Tray ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.11 Setting the Printer Functions...................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3 Connection to Telephone Line .......................................................................................................................................2-4
2.3.1 Connecting the Modular Cable (if equipped with fax functions) ................................................................................................ 2-4
2.3.2 Setting the Date/Time (user mode) .............................................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.3.3 Setting the Dial Type ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.4 Executing Communications Testing ............................................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.4 Checking the Images/Operations ...................................................................................................................................2-5
2.4.1 Checking the Copy Images .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.5 Relocating the Machine .................................................................................................................................................2-5
2.5.1 When Relocating the Machine..................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
Chapter 2
2.1 Making Pre-Checks
2.1.1 Selecting the Site

0006-2646
T-2-1
The site must meet the following requirements; if possible, visit the user's before the machine is delivered:
1. The site must offer a power outlet whose rating is as specified volts (-/+10%) and which may be used
exclusively for the machine.
2. The site temperature must be between 0 deg and 35 deg C (32 deg and 95 deg F) and between 35% and
85% humidity. Avoid an area near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier, and refrigerator.
3. The site must not be near a source of fire, or must not be subject to dust or ammonium gas. Also, avoid
areas exposed to direct rays of the sun; if necessary, provide curtains.
4. The level of ozone generated by the machine while in use will not affect the health of the human body.
However, some individuals may find its odor unpleasant. Be sure to ventilate the room well to provide a
good working environment.
5. The machine will have to be at least 10cm/3.9" from any wall, offering enough space for its use.
10cm / 3.9"
50cm / 19.7" 50cm / 19.7"

50cm / 19.7"
6. The machine will have to be placed in a well-ventilated area of the room. Do not, however, place it near
the inlet of air.
2.2 Unpacking and Installation machine:

1. unpacking
2. fitting the cartridge
2.2.1 Before Starting 3. setting the toner bottle
0006-2663
4. putting paper in the cassette
Go through the following before starting to install the machine: 5. putting paper in the manual feed tray
6. connecting the interface cable
7. connecting the modular cable (if equipped with fax functions)
8. connecting the power cord
If the machine is moved from a cold to a warm place for installation, conden- 9. fitting the delivery tray
sation can develop in its pickup/feeding assembly, causing image faults. To 10. checking the copy images
avoid the condensation, leave the machine unpacked for 1 hr or more so that 11. setting the printer functions
it will be fully used to the room temperature. 12. setting the fax functions (if equipped with fax functions)
(The term condensation refers to the development of drops of water on a
mental surface when it is brought from a cold to warm place. This occurs as 2.2.3 Unpacking
a result of rapid cooling of vapor in the air.) 0006-2670
1) Unpack the machine, and take out the attachments.

Check to see that none of the following is missing:
2.2.2 Installation Procedure - cassette
0006-2668 - delivery tray
Install the machine in the following order; for details, see the appropriate - cartridge (durm unit and developing unit)
sections that follow; after installation, be sure to clean up the area around the - power cord
2-1
Chapter 2
- Quick Start Guide

- Reference Guide
- CD-ROM
- Warranty card (Specific country/region models only.)
- Modular cable (Specific country/region models only.)
- Fax Guide (if equipped with fax functions)
- Others
The toner bottle is not partof the shipment, but mustbe purchased separately.
2) Holding the grips on the left and right of the machine, lift it out of the box.
3) Remove the packing material: plastic sheets, securing members, and
tape.
4) Remove the shipping screw.
F-2-5
3) Close the cartridge cover, and put back the reader unit.
2.2.5 Fitting the Toner bottle

0006-2713
1) Open the toner supply cover.
F-2-1
5) While pulling on the reader unit slide lever, slide out the reader unit to the
left.
F-2-6
2) Rock the new toner bottle five or six times to distribute the toner evenly.
F-2-2
6) Open the cartridge cover.
F-2-7
3) Holding the toner bottle lever, insert the toner bottle slowly into the ma-
chine as far as it will go.
F-2-3
7) Store away the securing member removed in step 4 in the shipping screw
slot.
F-2-8
4) Holding the toner bottle steady with one hand, firmly and slowly pull the
sealing tape tab with the other hand to remove the sealing tape complete-
ly. Throw the tape away.
To avoid breaking the tape, do not pull it at an angle.
F-2-4
2.2.4 Fitting the Cartridge

0006-2703
1) Unpack the cartridge, and take it out without removing its wrappings.
2) Fully insert the cartridge in the direction of the arrow as indicated.
2-2
Chapter 2
F-2-13
F-2-9
2) Put paper in the cassette, under the claw must indicate what [1] and [2] are.
5) Holding the toner bottle lever, turn it counterclockwise so that mark on
the toner bottle aligns with the mark on the machine [1]. Close the toner
cartridge lever [2].
[2]
If you can's turn the toner bottle, please push it into slot unit stop and turn
again.
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-2-14
3) Slide in the cassette until it stops.
2.2.7 Putting Paper in the Manual Feed Tray

0006-2718
1) Open the manual feed tray.
Before Complete
F-2-10
[2]
F-2-15
2) Slid out the auxiliary tray.
F-2-11
6) Close the toner supply cover.
F-2-16
3) Place the paper (with the side to be copied onto facing up).
F-2-12
2.2.6 Putting Paper in the Cassette

0006-2717
1) Lift the paper cassette slightly, and pull it out until it stops.
F-2-17
4) Adjust the slide guide to suit the width of the paper.
2-3
Chapter 2
F-2-21
2.2.11 Setting the Printer Functions

0006-2744
1) Install printer drivers, and perform test printing from the PC to check the
images.
F-2-18
2.2.8 Connecting the Interface Cable

0006-2721
Be sure that the PC environment meets the requirements of the machine be-
1) Connect the cable to the USB port if a USB cable is to be used, or to the fore installing the printer drivers.
parallel port if a parallel interface cable is to be used. Be sure also to con- For details, refer to Quick Start Guide.
nect the cable to the PC.
Use interface cables that comply with specifications of the machine.

2.3 Connection to Telephone Line
USB cable specifications: 5 m or shorter.
Parallel interface cable specifications: 3 m or shorter (Compliant to 2.3.1 Connecting the Modular Cable (if equipped with fax
IEEE1284, for bi-directional communication)
functions)
0006-2740
1) Connect one end of the modular cable to the terminal [L], and the other
end to the socket of the telephone.
If both telephone and fax are to be used, connect the modular cable from
the telephone (or answering machine) to the [telephone] terminal.
F-2-22
F-2-19
2.3.2 Setting the Date/Time (user mode)
2.2.9 Connect the power cord
0006-2748
1) Press the Additional Functions key.

0006-2723
2) Press the Left/Right Arrow key, to select '5.TIMER SETTING'
1) Connect the power cord. 3) Press the OK key.
4) Check to make sure that '1.DATE/TIME SETTING' is indicated and
press the OK key.
5) Enter the current date and time. Press the Left/Right Arrow key to
move the cursor to the character to enter and enter a number using the
keypad.
6) Press the OK key so that the date/time will be stored.
2.3.3 Setting the Dial Type

0006-2776
1) Press the Additional Functions key.

2) Press the Left/Right Arrow key to select '3.FAX SETTING'.
4) Check to see that '1. USER SETTING' is indicated and press the OK
key.
F-2-20
5) Check to see that '1.TEL LINE SETTING' is indicated and press the
OK key.
2.2.10 Fitting the Delivery Tray 6) Press the Left/Right key to select '2.TEL LINE TYPE'.
1) Mount the delivery tray.
0006-2733
8) Press the Left/Right key to select 'TOUCH TONE' or 'ROTARY
PULSE'.
9) Press the OK key so that the selected line type is stored.
2.3.4 Executing Communications Testing

0006-2820
1) Press the Fax key in the control panel so that the machine will be in fax
mode.
2) Try sending and receiving an original and check the operation and the
images.
2-4
Chapter 2
2.4 Checking the Images/Operations
2.4.1 Checking the Copy Images

0006-2743
1) Execute the following in user mode to stir toner: 6.ADJUST/

CLEAN>4.MIX TONER.
2) Place an original on the copyboard glass or in the ADF and select the
cassette or the manual feed tray as the source of paper; then, check the
copied images.
2.5 Relocating the Machine
2.5.1 When Relocating the Machine

0006-2950
If the machine must be moved by truck or other means of transportation, be

sure to go through the following:
1. If the machine is equipped with fax function and the move will take 2
hours or more, the fax image data, if any, will be lost. Advise the user on
this and, if necessary, print out the image data.
2. Be sure no communication is under way with an external device.
3. Check that the contact sensor is in home position and disconnect the
power cord.
4. Disconnect the interface cable and modular cable.
5. Remove the delivery tray.
6. Slide the reader unit to the left, and open the cartridge cover.
7. Take out the shipping screw that have been stored away inside the ma-
chine.
F-2-23
8. Take out the cartridge from inside of the machine and put it in a protective
bag or the like to avoid direct rays of the sun.
9. Close the cartridge cover and put back the reader unit.
10. Fit the shipping screw you removed in step 7 and secure the contact
sensor in place.
F-2-24
11. Open the ADF (copyboard cover) and place A4 (LTR) sheet on the copy-
board glass then, close the ADF (copyboard cover).
12. Tape the machine's covers in place so that it will not open in transit.
13. Pack the machine and start the relocation.
Take full care to avoid severe vibration during the relocation.
2-5
Chapter 3 Basic Operation
Contents
Contents
3.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................3-1

3.1.1 Functional Construction............................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Functional Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3 Image Processor PCB .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.4 DC Controller PCB ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.5 Control Panel PCB ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.6 Power Supply PCB ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.7 Analog Processor PCB................................................................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.1.8 Sensor PCB .................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.1.9 Laser Driver/BD PCB .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.1.10 Main Motor/Scanner Motor Driver............................................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.1.11 Printer Controller PCB............................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.12 NCU PCB (if equipped with fax functions)............................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.13 Modular Jack PCB (if equipped with fax functions) ................................................................................................................. 3-4
3.1.14 Sensor Relay PCB...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.15 Controlling the Main Motor....................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.16 Reproduction Processes ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-4
3.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................3-6
3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ................................................................................................................................ 3-6
Chapter 3
3.1 Construction
3.1.1 Functional Construction

0006-2835
The machine may broadly be divided into the following 7 functional blocks:
<System Used for Communication

with External Devices>
Printer Controller PCB

<Image Reading/Processing System>
Modular Jack
PCB*1 Original
NCU PCB*1
Contact sensor
Control panel Analog processor PCB
Image processor PCB

<Laser Exposure System>
Laser driver/BD PCB Laser scanner

<Control System>
<Image Formation System>

Charg-
DC controller PCB ing
Drum cleaning Drum Development

<Fixing System>
Sepa- Trans-
Fixing ration fer
Delivery tray Feeding Manual feed tray
Cassette <Pickup/Feeding System>
*1 : If equipped with fax functions.
F-3-1
3-1
Chapter 3
3.1.2 Functional Block Diagram

0006-2838
Telephone line
Toner bottle
Transmission
sensor Humidity sensor
Reception
PS11 HS
J6521 J6531
To power supply
Modular Delivery J652 J653
Jack sensor Waste toner
PCB*2 Sensor relay
Memb-
LCD Speaker
*2
PC Fixing assembly Cartridge full sensor
rane *4
J907 /J911 / *3 PS3 PCB
J4030 J4020 J912*3 J1051 PS10 J651
J2521
Parallel I/F
USB I/F
J403 J402 J404 J7*3/J8*3/J10*4 J7 J109 J105/ J206 J205/J207/208/J209 J252 J251
J107/
PS101 PS102 PS103
LGL paper Paper leading Cassette
Control panel Printer Controller NCU PCB*2 Power supply PCB sensor edge sensor paper sensor
PCB PCB 2-Line/4-Line DC controller PCB
Switching
Key detection Communication conversion circuit regulator Fixing heater control block Laser control block
and LCD/LED Control Dial pulse High-voltage control block Horizontal sync signal control
drive generation
USB serial circuit Drive control block Scanner motor control
LCD number notice J4 J102*2 J106/ J202/
Off-hook J108 J203 Sensor detection Cartridge detection mechanism
function function detection
Serial Smoothing circuit Image processor PCB Toner level detection
communication Line voltage interface block mechanism
control conversion circuit
Waste toner full
detection function
J401 J701 J1/J2/J6 J103/104 J204/201
J315 J318 J81*2/J320*2/J321*3 J301/302 J303/304
Drive control block Sensor detection

Image processor PCB
Control panel control block Memory function
Image processing control block ESS control
Communication control block
Speaker control*2
J317 J310 J311*1 J316 J312 J309 J307 J314 J308
J3102
J501 M2 ADF*1 J801 J3120 J3123 J3124 J3081

Analog Reader motor FM1 SL1 SL2 SW2 SW1 PS4
Original
Laser scanner
Laser driver/
processor sensor
BD PCB
Fan
Manual feed pickup

solenoid
Cassette pickup
Reader unit slide

detecting switch
Manual feed tray
paper sensor
motor driver
open / close switch

solenoid
Toner supply cover
Main motor
PCB
PS6
J503 J502 J3112
driver
Registration
sensor
PS7 M4 M1
J504 J601 J3113
Sensor PCB Original
Scanner Main
Contact sensor ADF delivery motor motor
Contact
sensor
sensor
home position (copyboard cover)

sensor open/close
sensor PS8
J3114
PS1 PS2
ADF motor *1 : If equipped with ADF functions.
M3
J3110 *2 : If equipped with fax functions.
*3 : If equipped with fax functions and 230V model.
*4 : If equipped with fax functions and 120V model.
F-3-2
3.1.3 Image Processor PCB

0006-4284
It controls the machine as a whole, and communicates directly with all PCBs except the sensor PCB and modular jack PCB.
Drive Control Block

The drive control mechanism acts on the reader motor and the ADF motor by the work of the ASIC and motor drive IC.
Control Panel Control Block

The control panel control block receives the state of control keys while sending/receiving data in serial communication with the control IC of the control panel PCB.
Also, it sends LED and LCD signals to the control panel PCB.
Image Processing Control Block

The image processing control block has the following functions:
- It subjects the digital image data from the analog processor PCB to enlargement/reduction processing, shading correction, smoothing, and other image processing,
thereby converting it to 600x600-dpi image signals (VD0, VD0*).
- It converts the analog image data from fax communication into 600x600-dpi image signals (VD0, VD0*).
- It uses a horizontal sync signal (BD0*) as a trigger to send image signals (VD0, VD0*) to the laser unit.
- The image data from the contact sensor is re-arranged, and the intensity of the contact sensor LED is controlled.
Sensor Detection
It detects the state of each sensor of the reader unit and the ADF.
ESS Control
It controls the ESS function used to reduce the power consumption while the machine is in standby state.
Memory Function
The 16MB (as mounted) SDRAM used for the storage of image data is capable of storing about 255 pages in fax reception made of Canon Fax Standard Chart No.1.
The image data is backed up by a vanadium lithium secondary battery (BAT2), so that it remains intact for about 2 hr after the machine is deprived of power. The
128-KB SRAM is used to store user data and service data, and is backed up by a lithium battery (BAT1) so that the data may be retained for about 5 yr after the
machine is deprived of power.
Speaker Control (if equipped with fax functions.)

It turns on/off or control the volume of the error sound, key sound, and line monitor sound generated by the speaker.
MEMO:
The volume of the line monitor or the sound of the key sound or the error sound is adjusted in user mode.
Communication Control Block (if equipped with fax functions)

The communication control block detects line signals (CNG, DTMF). The 33.6-kps modem is controlled by the main CPU on the image processor PCB for mod-
3-2
Chapter 3
ulation and demodulation of transmission/reception data. It also is used to send the DTMF signal.
3.1.4 DC Controller PCB

0006-2850
Fixing Heater Control Block

The fixing heater control block monitors the temperature reading of the thermistor to ensure that the temperature of the heater reaches a specific level. If an error
is detected in the temperature of the heater, it stops the power to the heater.
High-Voltage Control Block

The high-voltage control block controls the high voltage for the primary charging roller, developing cylinder, transfer charging roller, and fixing film. Of these,
the application of DC bias is controlled based on the readings of the humidity around the machine (checked by the humidity sensor) of the primary charging roller,
developing cylinder, and transfer roller.
This mechanism of control is used to increase the bias level in a low humidity environment, thereby improving the reproduction of images.
In a medium to high humidity environment, on the other hand, it serves to save on the level of toner consumption.
Drive Control Block

The drive control block controls the main motor, pickup solenoid, and fan.
Sensor Detection
The sensor condition of the printer block and the various pickup block are checked to monitor the drive mechanism and to detect the presence/absence of the car-
tridge, collection of waste toner, presence/absence of the toner bottle, and the relative humidity around the machine.
Image Processor PCB Interface block
The image processor PCB interface block sends the horizontal sync signal (BD0*) to the image processor PCB. It also returns a state signal in response to a com-
mand signal (serial) from the image processor PCB, thereby communicating the state of the printer block to the image processor PCB.
Laser Control Block

The laser control block controls the drive of the laser diode of the laser scanner unit according to the image signals (VD0, VD0*) from the image processor PCB.
Also, it controls the intensity of the laser diode (auto power control) for each line of print data.
Horizontal Sync Signal Control

When the laser beam reaches the horizontal print start position, the laser beam detection signal (BDI*) from the laser scanner unit is detected, and the horizontal
sync signal (BD0*) is sent to the image processor PCB. Also, the horizontal sync signal (BD*) is monitored for frequency of output.
Scanner Motor Control

The scanner motor is controlled so that the horizontal resolution of the print image is 600 dpi. Also, the laser beam detection signal (BDI*) from the laser scanner
unit is detected to monitor the rotation of the scanner motor.
Cartridge Detection Mechanism

In wait state, the CPU on the DC controller PCB measures the voltage level of the cartridge detection signal (CRGSNS) a specific number of times to check the
presence/absence of the cartridge when an AC bias is applied to the primary charging roller.
Toner Level Detection Mechanism

While the machine is in wait state, the toner level detection signal (ADDTNR; based on the comparison of the developing bias output and the antenna output inside
the cartridge) occurring when the developing AC bias is detected during normal rotation to monitor the toner level inside the cartridge.
3.1.5 Control Panel PCB

0006-2855
Key Detection and LCD/LED Drive

The keys are monitored, and the LCD and LEDs are driven.
LCD Function
The LCD consisting of 2 lines of 20 characters is controlled according to the display signals from the image processor PCB.
Serial Communication Control

The state of the control keys is monitored based on serial communications with the image processor PCB. LCD and LED drive data are received.
3.1.6 Power Supply PCB

0006-2857
Switching Regulator
The following is generated using power from the power outlet for loads: +24 DC, +12 VDC, +5 VSDC, +5 VDC, +3.3 VSDC, +3.3 VDC.
3.1.7 Analog Processor PCB

0006-2858
The analog image data read by the contact sensor is converted into digital image data and sent to the ASIC of the image processor PCB.
3.1.8 Sensor PCB

0006-2860
The signals from the ADF (copyboard cover) open/close sensor and the contact sensor home position sensor are sent out to the image processor PCB via the analog
processor PCB.
3.1.9 Laser Driver/BD PCB

0006-2861
The image signals (VD0, VD0*) from the image processor PCB is converted into data used for laser adjustment (to cause the laser diode to emit a laser beam). Also,
the generated laser beam is detected, and the laser beam detection signal (BDI*) is sent to the DC controller PCB.
3.1.10 Main Motor/Scanner Motor Driver

0006-2862
The main motor/scanner motor is driven according to the drive signals from the DC controller PCB.
3.1.11 Printer Controller PCB

0006-2863
The communications with the PC are controlled. The image data from the PC is converted into print data for the machine, and is sent to the image processor PCB.
Communication Control
Communications with the PC are controlled using a bi-directional parallel interface (IEEE std 1284-1994) or USB (Ver. 1.1). The communication protocols used
for bi-directional communications include: Nibble, ECP, Rapid Port.
The communication with the image processor PCB by means of a video interface are also controlled.
USB Serial Number Notice Function

The USB serial number is communicated to the PC.
Smoothing
The 300 x 300-dpi image data from the PC is converted into image data equivalent of 1200 x 600 dpi; or, 600 x 600-dpi image data is converted into data equivalent
3-3
Chapter 3
of 2400 x 600-dpi.
3.1.12 NCU PCB (if equipped with fax functions)

0006-2864
2-Line/4-Line Conversion Circuit

Signals from a 2-line telephone line are converted into 4-line signals (transmission signals and reception signals). Also, the transmission signals from the image
processor PCB are prevented from entering the reception circuit.
Dial Pulse Generation Circuit

The dial pulse generation circuit generates dial pulses by turning on and off the relay inside it according to the control signals from the image processor PCB. It
then sends the dial signals to the telephone line by way of the modular jack PCB.
Off-Hook Detection Circuit

An off-hook state is detected with reference to the direct current flowing into the circuit, occurring when the telephone connected to the telephone terminal of the
modular jack PCB is off the hook.
Line Voltage Conversion Circuit

The primary side of the NCU PCB is controlled using a line voltage of +48 VDC. In light of this, the DC component is cut by the capacitor, and only the audio
signals are converted into voltages suited to the modem level.
3.1.13 Modular Jack PCB (if equipped with fax functions)

0006-2865
The signals from the 2 modular jacks (for telephone line and telephone connection) are communicated to the line voltage conversion circuit of the NCU PCB, and
the signals from the fax are communicated to the telephone line.
3.1.14 Sensor Relay PCB

0006-2866
Relay the connection between the DC controller PCB and the sensors below
- Humidity sensors (HS)

- Toner bottle sensor (PS11)
3.1.15 Controlling the Main Motor

0006-2869
The rotation of the machine's main motor (M1) is controlled by the drive signal (MON) generated by the DC controller PCB.
The machine keeps the following ON at all times using the drive of the main motor, thereby moving paper at the selected printing speed:
- vertical path roller
- registration roller
- primary charging roller
- developing cylinder
- photosensitive drum
- transfer charging roller
- fixing pressure roller
- delivery roller
The machine uses the activation of the cassette pickup solenoid or the manual feed pickup solenoid as a trigger (occurring when the main motor is ON) to drive the
following pickup rollers for a specific period of time:
- cassette pickup roller
- manual feed pickup roller
Primary charging roller

Developing cylinder
Main motor
Photosensitive
drum Manual feed pickup roller
Vertical path roller
Delivery Fixing Transfer Registration roller

roller pressure charging Cassette pickup roller
roller roller
F-3-3
3.1.16 Reproduction Processes

0007-3729
The machine uses an indirect electrostatic method, and is constructed as shown in the following figure:
3-4
Chapter 3
Copyboard glass
Contact sensor
Image processing block

Cartridge
Laser scanner assembly Photosensitive drum
Developing
cylinder
Primary charging roller
Cleaning blade
Paper
Fixing assembly
Static eliminator
Transfer charging roller
Paper Vertical path roller
F-3-4
The machine has a cartridge construction, in which the drum, toner housing, primary charging assembly, developing cylinder, and cleaning blade are designed as
a single entity (items serving as the core of image formation).
It uses SURF as its fixing method, in which a fluorine-coated film is heated by a heater, nd paper is moved between the film and the fixing pressure roller (the image
is fused by the work of heat and pressure.)
The machine's image formation processes are as follow:
Step 1 Primary charging (AC and negative DC)

Step 2 Laser exposure
Step 3 Development (AC and negative DC)
Step 4 Transfer (positive DC)
Step 5 Separation
Step 6 Fixing
Step 7 Drum cleaning
Static image formation block
Cartridge
1.Primary charging 2.Laser exposure
3.Development
7.Drum cleaning
4.Transfer Manual feed tray

Registration
Delivery 6.Fixing 5.Separation
Cassette
flow of paper
rotation of drum
F-3-5
The machine's sequence of operation is controlled by the CPU on the image processor PCB and the CPU on the DC controller PCB. The following figure shows
the sequential flow, and the following table provides descriptions of the periods involved.
Power ON
or
when the power ON and, in
addition, the toner bottle fitted,
the reader unit and the toner
supply cover are put back. End of printing
or
Return from ESS mode
If a print command is received
during last rotation
Wait Standby Initial rotation Print Last rotation
If continuous printing is selected
F-3-6
3-5
Chapter 3
T-3-1
Period Definition Purpose Remarks
WAIT From when the power is The machine's mechanical A check is made on the presence/
(wait) turned on until when the and electrical states are absence of a cartridge and for paper
application of the primary checked. remaining inside the machine. The
charging AC bias is started machine also shifts the WAIT state
and stopped. when the power ON and, in addition,
the toner bottle fitted, the reader unit
and the toner supply cover are put
back, or after returning from ESS
mode.
STBY After the end of WAIT, unit The machine is ready for a If a shift is from last rotation of
(standby) the Start key is pressed. print command. printing on LTR or larger, the fixing
heater is subjected to rest heating
temperature control for 5 sec.
INTR After a press on the Start key, The machine starts up process The fixing heater is subjected to
(initial until the leading edge is conditions and picks up paper temperature control (start-up
rotation) detected by the paper leading for printing. temperature control, paper passage
edge sensor. temperature control); scanner rotation
speed adjustment and ATVC control
are executed.
PRINT From when the paper leading The DC controller PCB

(print) edge sensor detects the generates the BD0* signal,
leading edge of paper to 0.5 and the image processor PCB
sec after it detects the trailing sends VD0* signal and VD0
edge of paper. signal, thereby forming a
latent image on the
photosensitive drum and
turning it into a toner image.
LSTR From when printing ends The drum surface is made After last rotation, the machine shifts
(last until the main motor stops. free of potential and the to standby to wait for a print
rotation) transfer charging roller is command, in response to which it
cleaned. immediately shifts to initial rotation.
3.2 Basic Sequence
3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On

0006-2867
The following is the flow of operation occurring from when the machine is turned on until it enters standby state:
3-6
Chapter 3
Power-On
Initializes the CPU,

Clears the RAM, Sets the Port
• Checks the reader unit (open/close).

• Toner supply cover open/closed detection
• Toner bottle present/absent detection
• Checks paper (cassette, manual tray).
• Detects size of paper (LGL; cassette).
• Checks the thermistor (open/short).
Starts communication
with the image processor PCB.
Checks the machine inside for residual paper.

Fixing Heater On
A jam is identified if the paper leading edge sensor
or the delivery sensor detects paper.
0.2 sec after the fixing heater goes ON, NO
is the fixing temperature 100˚C ? Or, has 0.5 sec
passedafter the fixing heater went ON?
YES When the main motor goes ON, the machine always checks
the level of waste toner.
A check is made for the presence/absence of a cartridge
Fixing Heater OFF when the primary charging AC bias is applied.
Main Motor ON
The primary charging AC/DC bias,

Transfer Cleaning Bias ON
The toner level is checked when the developing bias is applied.
The developing AC/DC bias goes ON.
Auto delivery occurs

if the paper leading edge sensor detects paper.
The primary charging DC bias and
developing AC/DC bias go OFF.
The transfer cleaning bias goes OFF.
The main motor and

primary charging AC bias go OFF.
Standby
F-3-7
3-7
Chapter 4 Original Exposure System
Contents
Contents
4.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................4-1

4.1.1 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Parts Replacement Procedure.........................................................................................................................................4-1
4.2.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover ...............................................................................................................................................................................4-1
4.2.1.2 Removing the Right Cover..............................................................................................................................................................................4-1
4.2.1.3 Removing the ADF .........................................................................................................................................................................................4-1
4.2.1.4 Removing the Printer Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2.1.5 Removing the Image Processor PCB ..............................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2.1.6 Removing the Control Panel ...........................................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2.1.7 Removing the Reader Unit..............................................................................................................................................................................4-3
4.2.2 Copyboard glass........................................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.2.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass......................................................................................................................................................................4-3
4.2.3 Sensor PCB .................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.2.3.3 Removing the ADF .........................................................................................................................................................................................4-3
4.2.3.5 Removing the Sensor PCB..............................................................................................................................................................................4-4
4.2.4 Scanner Motor.............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-5
4.2.4.2 Removing the Reader Motor Drive Unit.........................................................................................................................................................4-5
4.2.5 Contact sensor .............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-5
4.2.5.2 Removing the Contact Sensor.........................................................................................................................................................................4-5
Chapter 4
4.1 Construction
4.1.1 Major Components

0006-2872
The image reading/processing system consists of the following major com-

ponents:
- contact sensor used to read originals
- reader motor, drive pulley, drive belt, carriage, and carriage rail used to
move the contact sensor
- The analog processor PCB is used to convert the analog image data col-
leted by the contact sensor into digital image data.
The image reading mechanism is controlled based on the drive signals from
the image processor PCB, thereby moving the contact sensor to read the orig-
inal placed on the copyboard glass.
When the ADF is used, the contact sensor is moved to stream reading posi- [2] [1]
tion, and the originals are read when they are moved by the ADF.
Stream reading posit

with ADF in use
[1]
F-4-3
Contact sensor 4.2.1.3 Removing the ADF

Drive 0006-3855
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the ADF harness cover [2].
Carriage
og processor PCB
(forward)
Drive belt
(reverse)
ct sensor
on sensor [1] [2]
Carriage rail
F-4-4
Reader motor
Drive belt 2) Remove the harness retainer [1].
Drive pulleys 3) Remove the screws [2] and disconnect the grounding wire from the core.
4) Disconnect the connector [3].
F-4-1
[1]
4.2 Parts Replacement Procedure
4.2.1 Reader Unit
4.2.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover

0006-3235
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the left cover [2].
2) Remove the 13 screws [3], and detach the rear cover [4].
[3]
[2] [3]
F-4-5
[3] 5) Using a flat-blade screwdriver or the like, remove the 2 covers [1]; then,
[1] using long nose pliers or the like, remove the 2 pins [2].
[4]
[3] [2]
F-4-2
4.2.1.2 Removing the Right Cover

0006-3853
1) Slide the reader unit, and open the cartridge cover.

3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover [2].
4-1
Chapter 4
[2] [2] [2]
[1]
[2]
[2] [2]
F-4-9
For installation, fasten the core to the upper position with the part [1] and fix
the cable with the part [2].
[1]
F-4-6
6) Return the reader unit to its initial position.
7) Open the ADF.
8) Using a flat-blade screwdriver, remove the cover [1].
9) Detach the ADF [2] from the host machine.
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-10
4.2.1.6 Removing the Control Panel

0006-3269

2) Remove the screw [1], and slide the control panel [2] to the left.
[1]
F-4-7
Take care so that no part will become trapped by harness of the ADF.
4.2.1.4 Removing the Printer Controller PCB

0006-3236

2) Remove the 5 screws [2], and detach the printer controller PCB [3].
[2]
[2] [1]
F-4-11
3) Close the cartridge cover.
4) Disconnect the connector [2], and detach the control panel [1].
[3]
To prevent damage to the flexible cable, be sure to lift the control panel
slightly as shown when disconnecting the connector [2].
[1] [2]
F-4-8
4.2.1.5 Removing the Image Processor PCB

0006-3237
1) Remove the retainer for the flexible cable used to connect the analog proc-
essor PCB and the image processor PCB.
2) Remove the core, and disconnect all connectors from the image processor [2] [1]
PCB [1]. F-4-12
3) Remove the 6 screws [2], and detach the image processor PCB [1].
MEMO:
4-2
Chapter 4
To mount the control panel, turn it over as shown in below figure, and con- 4.2.2 Copyboard glass
nect the connector [1]; then, turn back over [2] the control panel to facilitate
the work. 4.2.2.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass
0006-2823
[2] 1) Open the ADF (copyboard cover).

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the copyboard glass retainer [2].
3) Remove the copyboard glass [3].
[1] [3]
[1]
F-4-13
[2]
F-4-17
4.2.1.7 Removing the Reader Unit
0006-3267
4.2.3 Sensor PCB
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the harness retainer [2].
[2] 0006-3849
[3]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[4]
F-4-14
2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the 2 reader stoppers [2].
[3] [2]
[2] F-4-18

0006-3850

[1]
F-4-15
3) Slide the reader unit [1] as shown, and detach the reader unit [1] from the
front side.
[2] [1]
[1]
F-4-19
4.2.3.3 Removing the ADF

[1] 0006-3851
F-4-16
4-3
Chapter 4
[2]
[1] [2]
F-4-20 [1]
2) Remove the harness retainer [1]. F-4-23
3) Remove the screws [2] and disconnect the grounding wire from the core.
[1] Take care so that no part will become trapped by harness of the ADF.
4.2.3.4 Removing the Copyboard Glass

0006-3061
1) Open the ADF (copyboard cover).

[1] [3]
[2] [3]
F-4-21
5) Using a flat-blade screwdriver or the like, remove the 2 covers [1]; then,
using long nose pliers or the like, remove the 2 pins [2].
[2]
F-4-24
4.2.3.5 Removing the Sensor PCB

0006-3062
1) Move the contact sensor to the center.

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the left upper cover [2].
[1] [2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-22
7) Open the ADF.
F-4-25
3) Remove the sensor flag [1] and the spring [2].
5) Remove the 2 screws [4], and detach the sensor PCB [5].
4-4
Chapter 4
4) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the 2 grounding plates [2].
[5] 5) Disconnect the connector [3].
6) While paying attention to the rib [4], lift the rear motor drive unit [5] to-
ward the right to detach.
[2]
[1]
[1] [5]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
F-4-26
[1]
4.2.4 Scanner Motor
[4]
0006-3231
1) Open the ADF (copyboard cover). F-4-30

3) Remove the copyboard glass [3]. 4.2.5 Contact sensor
[1] [3] 4.2.5.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass

0006-3221

[1] [3]
[2]
F-4-27
4.2.4.2 Removing the Reader Motor Drive Unit

0006-3232
1) Free the contact sensor [1] from the drive belt [2].
[2]
[1] F-4-31
4.2.5.2 Removing the Contact Sensor

0006-3228
1) Remove the 2 spacer [1].
[1] [1]
[2]
F-4-28
2) Using a flat-blade screwdriver, remove the cover [1], and remove the
screw [2].
[1]
F-4-32
2) Shift up the contact sensor [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
3) Remove the contact sensor [1].
[2]
F-4-29
3) Slide the reader unit to the left.
4-5
Chapter 4
[2] [1]
F-4-33
4-6
Chapter 5 Laser Exposure
Contents
Contents
5.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................5-1

5.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 Laser Scanner Unit....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1.2 Removing the Toner Supply Cover.................................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.2.1.4 Removing the Front Cover..............................................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.2.1.5 Removing the Cartridge Cover .......................................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.2.1.6 Removing the Upper Cover ............................................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.2.1.7 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit ..................................................................................................................................................................5-3
Chapter 5
5.1 Construction
5.1.1 Outline
0006-2874
The laser scanner unit consists of the following major components:

- laser unit, which serves as the source of laser beam.
- laser scanner motor, equipped with a 4-face mirror for laser scanning.
- laser driver/BD PCB used to detect laser beam or to control emission of
laser beam.
The laser beam generated by the laser unit based on the signals from the DC
controller PCB moves through the collimator lens (inside the laser unit) and
the cylindrical lens to reach a 4-face polygon mirror rotating at a constant
speed.
When reflected by the 4-face polygon mirror, the laser beam moves through
the imaging lens, and is bent by the reflecting mirror to reach the photosen- [2] [1]
sitive drum. At this time, the laser beam also is directed to the BD circuit of
the laser driver/BD PCB.
As the 4-face polygon mirror rotates at a constant speed, the laser beam scans
the surface of the photosensitive drum at a constant speed, thereby removing [1]
charges and forming static images. F-5-2
4-face mirror 5.2.1.2 Removing the Toner Supply Cover

0006-3185
Imaging lens 1) Open the toner supply cover [1].

2) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the cover [3].
3) Remove the toner supply cover [1].
river/BD PCB Laser scanner motor
[2]
Cylindrical lens Reflecting mirror
Laser unit
BD block
Las ction
det I*)
er block
(BD
Image signal
(VDO,VDO*)
er b sig
e
eam nal
Photosensitive drum [1] [3] [2]

Image processor PCB F-5-3
motor drive signal
To mount, fit a screw or the like with the gear [1] lifted in place the direction
Laser scanner
Communication
control signal
sync signal
Laser driver
of the arrow as shown to stop; then, attach the toner supply cover, and re-
Horizontal
control
move the screw.
• copy image data

DC controller PCB • print image data
• fax image data (if equipped with fax fun
F-5-1
5.2.1 Laser Scanner Unit [1]

0006-3184

F-5-4

0006-3186

5-1
Chapter 5
[2]
[2] [1]
F-5-5
[1] [3] [2]
F-5-8
slightly as shown when disconnecting the connector [2]. 5.2.1.5 Removing the Cartridge Cover
0006-3188
1) Free the hook [1].

2) Remove the 2 ribs [2], and detach the cartridge cover [3].
[3]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-5-6
MEMO:
To mount the control panel, turn it over as shown in below figure, and con-
the work.
[2]
[2] F-5-9
5.2.1.6 Removing the Upper Cover

0006-3190
1) Detach the part [1] holding the core and the part [2] holding the cable.
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [3] and remove the core [4].
[4]
[1] [1]
F-5-7
[2]
5.2.1.4 Removing the Front Cover

0006-3187
1) Remove the cassette. [3]

2) Remove the screw [1]. F-5-10
3) Free the 5 hooks [2], and detach the front cover [3].
3) Disconnect the connector [1] connecting the leader slide detecting switch
and the toner supply cover detecting switch.
5-2
Chapter 5
[1]
F-5-11 [1]
4) Remove the 11 screws [1], and detach the plate [2] and the upper cover [3]. F-5-14
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].
[1] [1] 3) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the plate [3].
[2]
[1] [2] [3]
[2]
[1]
[3] [1] [1]

F-5-12 F-5-15
4) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the laser scanner unit [2].
For installation, fasten the core to the upper position with the part [1] and fix [2]
[1]
[2]
[1] [1]
F-5-16
F-5-13
5.2.1.7 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

0006-3191
The laser scanner unit can-not be adjusted in the field. Do not disassemble it.
5-3
Chapter 6 Image Formation
Contents
Contents
6.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................6-1

6.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2.1 Developing Cylinder .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2.1.1 Removing the Developing Cylinder................................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.2.1.2 Notes on replacing the Developing Cylinder ..................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.2.2 Developing Blade......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.2.1 Removing the Developing Cylinder................................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2.2.2 Removing the Developing Blade ....................................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2.2.3 Notes on replacing the Developing Developing Blade ...................................................................................................................................6-3
6.2.3 Transfer Charging Roller ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.3.1 Removing the Transfer Charging Roller.........................................................................................................................................................6-3
6.2.4 Toner Bottle Sensor ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.4.5 Removing the Toner Bottle Sensor .................................................................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.5 Waste Toner Full Sensor.............................................................................................................................................................. 6-4
6.2.5.1 Removing the Waste Toner Full Sensor .........................................................................................................................................................6-4
Chapter 6
6.1 Construction
[2]
6.1.1 Outline [1]
0006-2877
Below illustration shows the construction of the image formation system.

The machine is a cartridge type, in which the core of its image formation
components are constructed as a signal entity: photosensitive drum, primary
charging roller, developing cylinder, cleaning blade, and toner housing.
The DC controller PCB has a built-in high-voltage output assembly, and gen-
erates high voltage for charging at such times as necessary.
Cartridge
DC contro
Primary
J205
charging roller
Cleaning blade
J207 [1]
J208 F-6-3
7) Remove the 2 screws [1].
Developing High-vo 8) Detach the hook [2] and remove the cover [3].
Drum cylinder output b
[2]
[1]
Transfer guide
Transfer charging
Static roller J209
eliminator
F-6-1
6.2.1 Developing Cylinder
6.2.1.1 Removing the Developing Cylinder [3] [1]

F-6-4
0006-3344
9) Remove the 3 screws [1] and remove the covers [2].
1. To avoid toner scatter, spread something like newspapers on the floor

before work.
2. Do not touch on the surfaces of the drum and the developing cylinder.
1) Remove the cartridge from the machine. [1]

2) Attach the drum shutter stopper, and remove the drum unit.
As for the following, care should be taken when attaching or detaching the
drum unit.
1. Be sure to use the drum shutter stopper as attaching or detaching work. [2]
2. Use the packaging box of the new drum unit if available.
3. After detaching the drum unit,be sure to keep it in a protective bag to
prevent damage to the drum surface.
3) Detach the drum shutter stopper.

4) Detach the drum shutter cover stay [1] and remove the drum shutter cover
[2]. [1]
F-6-5
[1] 10) Remove the developing cylinder [1].
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-6-6
6.2.1.2 Notes on replacing the Developing Cylinder

0006-3385
1) Before attaching the developing cylinder, use flannel cloth and spread ton-
F-6-2 er thinly on the edge of the developing blade [1] facing to the developing
5) Remove the toner bottle from the machine. cylinder.
6) Remove the 6 screws [1], and remove the cover [2].
6-1
Chapter 6
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-6-9
8) Detach the hook [2] and remove the cover [3].
[3] [2]
[1]
[2]
F-6-7
MEMO:
When you replace the developing cylinder [3], do not need to replace the de-
veloping blade [2] at the same time.
6.2.2 Developing Blade
6.2.2.1 Removing the Developing Cylinder

0006-3345
[3] [1]
F-6-10
1. To avoid toner scatter, spread something like newspapers on the floor 9) Remove the 3 screws [1] and remove the covers [2].
before work.
2. Do not touch on the surfaces of the drum and the developing cylinder.
1) Remove the cartridge from the machine.

2) Attach the drum shutter stopper, and remove the drum unit.
[1]
As for the following, care should be taken when attaching or detaching the
drum unit.
1. Be sure to use the drum shutter stopper as attaching or detaching work.
2. Use the packaging box of the new drum unit if available.
3. After detaching the drum unit,be sure to keep it in a protective bag to [2]
prevent damage to the drum surface.
3) Detach the drum shutter stopper.

4) Detach the drum shutter cover stay [1] and remove the drum shutter cover
[2].
[1] [1]
[2] F-6-11
10) Remove the developing cylinder [1].
[1]
[1]
F-6-12
F-6-8 6.2.2.2 Removing the Developing Blade

0006-3346
5) Remove the toner bottle from the machine. 1) Remove the 2 screws [1] and remove the developing blade [2].
6) Remove the 6 screws [1], and remove the cover [2].
6-2
Chapter 6
[2] [1] [1]
[1]
F-6-13
6.2.2.3 Notes on replacing the Developing Developing

Blade
0006-3389
1) Before attaching the developing cylinder, use flannel cloth and spread ton-
er thinly on the edge of the developing blade [1] facing to the developing
cylinder.
2) When you replace the developing blade [2], replace the developing cylin-
der [3] as well to avoid image blanking. [2]
F-6-15
6.2.4 Toner Bottle Sensor

0006-2883

[1]
[2] [1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-6-16
F-6-14
6.2.4.2 Removing the Toner Supply Cover
MEMO: 0006-2884
When you replace the developing cylinder [3], do not need to replace the de- 1) Open the toner supply cover [1].
veloping blade [2] at the same time. 2) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the cover [3].
6.2.3 Transfer Charging Roller [2]
6.2.3.1 Removing the Transfer Charging Roller

0006-3295

2) Free the 2 hooks [1], and detach the transfer charging roller [2].
[1] [3] [2]

F-6-17
move the screw.
6-3
Chapter 6
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-6-21

0006-2885
1) Remove the cassette.

2) Remove the screw [1].
F-6-18
[2]
0006-3164

[1] [3] [2]

F-6-22
[2] [1]
F-6-19 6.2.4.5 Removing the Toner Bottle Sensor
3) Close the cartridge cover. 0006-2886
4) Disconnect the connector [2], and detach the control panel [1]. 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the toner supply cover open/closed de-
tecting switch [2] from the body.
3) Remove the 2 screws [4], and detach the unit [5].
To prevent damage to the flexible cable, be sure to lift the control panel 4) Disconnect the connector [6], and detach the toner bottle sensor [7].
[1]
[3] [7]
[2]
[4]
[6]
[2] [1]
F-6-20
[5]
MEMO: F-6-23
nect the connector [1]; then, turn back over [2] the control panel to facilitate 6.2.5 Waste Toner Full Sensor
the work.
6.2.5.1 Removing the Waste Toner Full Sensor
0006-2888
1) Open the cartridge cover.

3) Disconnect the connector [2], and detach the waste toner full sensor [3].
For removal, place a sheet of paper to avoid contact with the transfer charg-
ing roller.
6-4
Chapter 6
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
F-6-24
6-5
Chapter 7 Pickup/Feeding System
Contents
Contents
7.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................7-1

7.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Detecting Jams ...............................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.2.1 Jam Detection Outline.................................................................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.2.1.2 Types of Jams..................................................................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.2.2 Delay Jams ................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2.2.1 Pickup Delay Jam............................................................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.2.2.2 Delivery Sensor Leading Edge Delay Jam......................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.2.2.3 Delivery Sensor Trailing Edge Delay Jam......................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.2.3 Stationary Jams ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2.3.1 Paper Leading Edge Sensor Stationary Jam....................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.3.2 Delivery Sensor Stationary Jam ......................................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.4 Other Jams ................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.4.1 Fixing Wrap Jam .............................................................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.4.2 Auto Delivery Jam ..........................................................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.4.3 Door Open Jam ...............................................................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.3 Cassette Pick-Up Unit ....................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.3.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.3.2 Retry Pickup................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.3.3 Detecting the Size of Paper.......................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.4 Manual Feed Pickup Unit ..............................................................................................................................................7-3
7.4.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.4.2 Retry Pickup................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.4.3 Detecting the Size of Paper.......................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.5 Delivery..........................................................................................................................................................................7-4
7.5.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.5.2 Auto Delivery Control ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-5
7.5.3 Reducing the Copying Speed....................................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.6.1 Pickup Roller ............................................................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.6.1.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller.............................................................................................................................................................7-5
7.6.2 Cassette Pickup Solenoid ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-5
7.6.2.4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid.........................................................................................................................................................7-6
7.6.3 Manual Feed (Upper) ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.6.3.2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray (upper) .......................................................................................................................................................7-7
7.6.4 Manual Feed (Lower) .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-7
7.6.4.2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray (lower) .......................................................................................................................................................7-7
7.6.5 Manual Pickup Roller .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-7
7.6.5.2 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller .....................................................................................................................................................7-7
7.6.6 Manual Feed Tray paper sensor ................................................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.6.6.5 Removing the Cartridge Cover .......................................................................................................................................................................7-9
Contents
7.6.6.6 Removing the Upper Cover ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-9

7.6.6.7 Removing the Rear Cover............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-10
7.6.6.8 Removing the Image Processor PCB............................................................................................................................................................ 7-10
7.6.6.9 Removing the NCU PCB (if equipped with fax functions) .......................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.6.6.10 Removing the Modular Jack PCB .............................................................................................................................................................. 7-10
7.6.6.11 Removing the Main Motor Unit ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-10
7.6.6.12 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid............................................................................................................................................. 7-11
7.6.6.13 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Paper Sensor ......................................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.6.7 Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid ................................................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.6.7.1 Removing the Right Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.6.7.2 Removing the Toner Supply Cover .............................................................................................................................................................. 7-12
7.6.7.3 Removing the Control Panel......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.6.7.4 Removing the Front Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.6.7.5 Removing the Cartridge Cover ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.6.7.6 Removing the Upper Cover .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.6.7.9 Removing the NCU PCB (if equipped with fax functions) .......................................................................................................................... 7-14
7.6.7.10 Removing the Modular Jack PCB .............................................................................................................................................................. 7-14
7.6.7.11 Removing the Main Motor Unit ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-14
7.6.7.12 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid............................................................................................................................................. 7-15
7.6.8 Registration Roller Unit............................................................................................................................................................. 7-15
7.6.8.2 Removing the Printer Controller PCB .......................................................................................................................................................... 7-15
7.6.8.4 Removing the Registration Roller Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-16
7.6.9 Vertical Path Roller.................................................................................................................................................................... 7-16
7.6.9.1 Removing the Vertical Path Roller ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-16
7.6.10 Separation Pad ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-17
7.6.10.1 Removing the Right Cover ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-17
7.6.10.2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray (upper)................................................................................................................................................... 7-17
7.6.10.3 Removing the Manual Feed Tray (lower)................................................................................................................................................... 7-17
7.6.10.4 Removing the Separation Pad..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-17
Chapter 7
7.1 Construction
7.1.1 Outline
0006-2880
The machine is not equipped with a paper width detection mechanism. It uses center reference, in which paper moves centered through the pickup/feeding/delivery
path.
The source of paper may be from any of two: cassette and manual feed tray. Once picked from the cassette or the manual feed tray, the paper is corrected so that
any skew is removed by the registration shutter and is sent as far as the registration roller. Thereafter, the paper is controlled so that its leading edge matches the
leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum by means of the paper leading edge sensor (PS102); it then is moved through the transfer, separation, feeding,
and fixing assemblies to reach the delivery tray.
The machine is equipped with 5 sensors to monitor the movement of paper; the names and the functions of these sensors are as follows:
T-7-1
Notation Name Function
PS3 Delivery sensor Detects the state of paper in the delivery assembly.
PS4 Manual feed tray paper sensor Detects the presence/absence of paper in the manual feed
tray.
PS101 LGL paper sensor Detects paper inside the cassette to see if it is of LGL size.
PS102 Paper leading edge sensor Detects the leading edge and trailing edge of paper to
measure its length. Also, it controls the timing of activation
of the laser.
PS103 Cassette paper sensor Detects the presence/absence of paper in the cassette.
PS103 PS4
PS3 PS101
PS102
F-7-1
7.2 Detecting Jams
7.2.1 Jam Detection Outline
7.2.1.1 Outline
0006-2933
The machine is equipped with 6 sensors used to detect jams.

The presence/absence of paper is checked with reference to the state of each sensor at such times as stored in the CPU on the DC controller PCB. When the machine
detects a jam, it will turn off the main motor (M1) and will indicate a jam message on the LCD.
7.2.1.2 Types of Jams

0006-2934
The machine groups jams into 8 types. When a jam occurs, be sure to remove it, and start over the operation.
7.2.2 Delay Jams
7.2.2.1 Pickup Delay Jam

0006-2935
After execution of a pickup retry, the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specific period of time, or no paper exists
at time of a pickup retry.
7.2.2.2 Delivery Sensor Leading Edge Delay Jam

0006-2963
After the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) has detected the leading edge of paper, the delivery sensor (PS3) does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a
specific period of time.
7.2.2.3 Delivery Sensor Trailing Edge Delay Jam

0006-2966
After the delivery sensor (PS3) has detected the leading edge of paper, the delivery sensor (PS3) does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specific period
7-1
Chapter 7
of time.
7.2.3 Stationary Jams
7.2.3.1 Paper Leading Edge Sensor Stationary Jam

0006-2955
After the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) has detected the leading edge of paper, the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) does not detect the trailing edge of paper
within a specific period of time.
7.2.3.2 Delivery Sensor Stationary Jam

0006-2957
- As part of operation after a pickup delay jam, the delivery sensor (PS3) detects the trailing edge of paper; however, the delivery sensor (PS3) once again detects
the trailing edge of paper, the laser is forced OFF, and a specific period of time passes.
- As part of operation after a pickup delay jam, the delivery sensor (PS3) detects paper, the laser is forced OFF, and a specific period of time passes.
- At time of cleaning the fixing pressure roller, the trailing edge of paper does not move past the delivery sensor (PS3; i.e., the sensor does not go OFF) within
a specific period of time.
7.2.4 Other Jams
7.2.4.1 Fixing Wrap Jam

0006-2959
After the delivery sensor (PS3) has detected the leading edge of paper, the delivery sensor (PS3) detects the absence of paper before a specific period of time.
7.2.4.2 Auto Delivery Jam

0006-2967
- When the fixing heater is started, the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) detects the presence of paper.
- The paper group is not known or the paper last subjected to length detection is identified as being LTR or larger; under either of these conditions, the delivery
sensor (PS3) detects paper within 2 sec after the fixing heater starts.
- The size of the paper last subjected to length detection is identified as being LTR or larger, and the delivery sensor (PS3) detects paper within 2 sec after the
main motor starts.
- While auto delivery is under way, the machine identifies the absence of a cartridge.
7.2.4.3 Door Open Jam

0006-2970
- During printing, the reader unit slide detecting switch (SW1) has detected movement (sliding) for the reader unit.
- If the toner supply cover open/closed detecting switch (SW2) identifies the toner bottle cover as being open during printing.
- If the toner bottle sensor (PS11) identifies the toner bottle as being displaced during printing.
Presence/absence of cartridge
SW1 (for jam h) (for jam g; developing bias)
SW2
(for jam h)
PS4 (for jam a)

PS3 (for jam c, d, e, f, or g) PS103 (for jam a)
PS102 (for jam a, b, or g)
F-7-2
7.3 Cassette Pick-Up Unit
7.3.1 Outline
0006-2887
Paper is picked up from the cassette under the control of the CPU on the DC controller PCB and using the drive of the main motor (M1). When the cassette pickup
solenoid (SL2) goes ON, the drive of the main motor (M1) is transmitted to the cassette pickup roller assembly to rotate the cassette pickup roller.
When the cassette pickup roller rotates, a single sheet of paper is separated from the stack by the separation claws of the cassette, and is sent as far as the registration
shutter by way of the vertical path roller.
7-2
Chapter 7
DC controller PCB
Cassette pick solenoid drive signal

Main motor
Gear B
Cassette pickup rollers

Gear A
Paper
Spring
SL2
When SL2 goes ON, the spring will turn

the pickup roller slightly with the result
that the gear A engages with the gear B.
F-7-3
7.3.2 Retry Pickup

0006-2889
If the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) does not detect paper within a specific period of time after the cassette pickup roller has started to rotate, the machine will
start to rotate the cassette pickup roller once again to execute a retry pickup operation.
If the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) still does not detect paper within a specific period of time after the machine executes a retry pickup operation once, the
machine will identify the condition as a jam and will indicate a jam message on the LCD.
7.3.3 Detecting the Size of Paper

0006-2890
The machine detects the size of paper in the cassette in any of two ways: LGL size detection and non-LGL size detection.
LGL detection is performed by means of a LGL paper sensor (PS101). The LGL size detection mechanism is used to prevent picking up a subsequent sheet of paper
before the trailing edge of paper leaves the cassette, otherwise occurring if the pickup was let to occur at the same time using other sizes when picking up LGL paper.
Non-LGL detection is performed using the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) based on the length of paper. In fax mode, if paper of a size different from the size
selected from the control panel is placed, the DC controller will identify a paper size mismatch at the end of printing and indicate a message on the LCD.
7.4 Manual Feed Pickup Unit
7.4.1 Outline
0006-2893
Paper is picked up from the manual feed tray under the control of the CPU on the DC controller PCB and using the drive of the main motor (M1). When the manual
feed pickup solenoid (SL1) goes ON, the drive of the main motor (M1) is transmitted as far as the manual feed pickup roller assembly to rotate the manual feed
pickup roller.
The sheets of paper stacked in the manual feed tray are lifted by the work of a spring and forced against the manual feed pickup roller. Thereafter, a single sheet of
paper is separated by the work of the manual feed pickup roller and the separation pad, and is moved as far as the registration shutter.
7-3
Chapter 7
DC controller PCB
Manual feed tray pickup
solenoid drive signal
SL1
Gear A
Gear B
Main motor
Manual feed tray

pickup roller
Cam
When SL1 goes ON, the spring moves up to push up

the cam, causing the manual feed pickup roller to
rotate slightly; as a result, the gear A and the gear B
become engaged.
F-7-4
7.4.2 Retry Pickup

0006-2894
If the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) does not detect paper within a specific period of time after the manual feed pickup roller starts to rotate, the machine will
rotate the manual feed pickup roller once again to execute a retry pickup operation. If the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) still does not detect the leading edge
of paper after the machine executes a retry pickup operation once, the machine will identify the condition as a jam and will indicate a jam message on the LCD.
7.4.3 Detecting the Size of Paper

0006-2896
The size of paper in the manual feed tray is detected using the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) with reference to the length of paper. In fax mode, if paper of a
size different from the size selected from the control panel is placed, the DC controller will identify a paper size mismatch at the end of printing and indicate a
message on the LCD.
7.5 Delivery
7.5.1 Outline
0006-2908
The machine uses the following to feed/deliver paper:

- registration roller
- photosensitive drum
- transfer charging roller
- fixing pressure roller
- delivery roller
The paper moved as far as the registration shutter by the work of the various pick operations is corrected for skew movement when it is butted against the registration
roller.
When the paper moves past the registration assembly, the paper leading edge sensor (PS102) detects its leading edge, thereby ensuring that the leading edge of the
paper will match the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum. Thereafter, the paper is moved past the photosensitive drum and then is moved over the
transfer charging roller, fixing pressure roller, and delivery roller.
7-4
Chapter 7
[1]
Paper
[2]
Resistration
shutter
F-7-5 [1]
7.5.2 Auto Delivery Control F-7-7
0006-2913
5) Remove the spring [1], and detach the cassette pickup roller unit [2].
The machine drives the main motor (M1) for a specific period of time to
feed/delivery roller when the power is turned on, when the reader unit is re-
turned to its initial position, or when it shifts from ESS mode, in addition to [1] [2]
the following:
a. after starting the main motor (M1), the paper leading edge sensor (PS102)
detects paper.
b. the size of the paper delivered last is B5 or smaller, and the delivery
sensor (PS3) detects paper after the main motor (M1) is started.
7.5.3 Reducing the Copying Speed

0006-2922
The machine is not equipped with a paper width detection mechanism; for
this reason, if paper with a limited width is used in continuous printing, the
ends of the fixing heater would overheat. To prevent overheating, the ma-
chine switches among 3 copying speeds with reference to the readings of the
sub thermistor.
1. Normally, the machine reduces the speed to 4 ppm when the reading of the
sub thermistor reaches 245 deg C/473 deg F or higher.
2. The machine will further reduce the copying speed to 3 ppm if the read- F-7-8
ing of the sub thermistor reaches 255 deg C/491 deg F or higher after it 6) Free the hook [1], and detach the cassette pickup roller [2].
has reduced it to 4 ppm.
3. The machine will further reduce the copying speed to 2 ppm if the read-
ing of the sub thermistor reaches 260 deg C/500 deg F or higher after it
has reduced it to 3 ppm.

[1]
7.6.1 Pickup Roller
7.6.1.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller

0006-3392
1) Remove the copyboard cover. (If the machine has the ADF, the ADF need
not be removed.) [2]
3) Place the machine so that its pickup side is at the bottom. F-7-9
7.6.2 Cassette Pickup Solenoid

0006-3296
[3]
[3]
[1]
F-7-6
4) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the bottom plate [2].
[4]
[3] [2]
F-7-10
7-5
Chapter 7

0006-3297

[2]
[3]
F-7-14
[1] [2] [1]

F-7-11

0006-3300
2) Remove the core, and disconnect all connectors from the image processor [2]
PCB [1].
[2] [2] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-15
5) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the cassette rear cover [2].
[2] [2]
[1]
F-7-12
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2] F-7-16
6) Free the harness [1] from the harness guide [2].
7) Remove the screw [3], and detach the cassette pickup solenoid [4].
F-7-13
7.6.2.4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid

0006-3302
not be removed.)
3) Place the machine so that its pickup side is at the bottom.
7-6
Chapter 7
[2]
[2]
[3]
[2] [1]
[1] [4] [1]

F-7-17 F-7-20
7.6.3 Manual Feed (Upper) 7.6.4.2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray (lower)
0006-3316
7.6.3.1 Removing the Right Cover 1) Remove the 2 ribs [1], and slide the manual feed tray (lower) [2] to detach.
0006-3313

[1] [1]
[2]
F-7-21
[2] [1] 7.6.5 Manual Pickup Roller

0006-3321
[1] 1) Slide the reader unit, and open the cartridge cover.
F-7-18 2) Open the manual feed tray.
7.6.3.2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray (upper)
0006-3314
1) Remove the 4 ribs [1].

2) Remove the 2 springs [2], and slide the manual feed tray (upper) [3] to de-
tach.
[2]
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-22
7.6.5.2 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller

[1] [3] [1] 0006-3322
F-7-19 1) Free the 2 hooks [1], and slide the 2 manual feed pickup roller retainers
[2] to the left and right.
7.6.4 Manual Feed (Lower)

0006-3315

7-7
Chapter 7
[2]
[1] [2] [1]

[1] [3] [2]
F-7-23 F-7-26
2) Free the hook [1], and slide the manual feed pickup roller [2] to the right
to detach.
move the screw.
[2] [1]
F-7-24 [1]
7.6.6 Manual Feed Tray paper sensor

0006-3803

F-7-27

0006-3806

[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-25

0006-3804
1) Open the toner supply cover [1].

[2] [1]
F-7-28
7-8
Chapter 7
[3]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-7-29
MEMO:
the work. [2]
F-7-32
[2]
0006-3810
[4]
[1]
[1]
F-7-30 [2]
7.6.6.4 Removing the Front Cover [3]

0006-3808
1) Remove the cassette. F-7-33

2) Remove the screw [1]. 3) Disconnect the connector [1] connecting the leader slide detecting switch
3) Free the 5 hooks [2], and detach the front cover [3]. and the toner supply cover detecting switch.
[2] [1]
F-7-34
4) Remove the 11 screws [1], and detach the plate [2] and the upper cover [3].
[1] [3] [2]

[1] [1] [2]
F-7-31
7.6.6.5 Removing the Cartridge Cover

0006-3809

[1]
[3] [1]
F-7-35
7-9
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2] F-7-39
7.6.6.9 Removing the NCU PCB (if equipped with fax

F-7-36
functions)
0006-3816
1) Disconnect all connectors form the NCU PCB.

7.6.6.7 Removing the Rear Cover 2) Remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the NCU PCB [1].
0006-3812
2) Remove the 13 screws [3], and detach the rear cover [4]. [2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-7-37 [2]
F-7-40
7.6.6.10 Removing the Modular Jack PCB
0006-3814
essor PCB and the image processor PCB. 1) Disconnect the connector [1].
0006-3817
2) Remove the core, and disconnect all connectors from the image processor 2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the modular jack PCB [3].
PCB [1].
[2] [2] [2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-41
[2] [2] 7.6.6.11 Removing the Main Motor Unit

F-7-38 0006-3820
1) Pick the hook [1] with long nose pliers or the like, and detach the registra-
tion roller gear [2].
Take care not to break the claw when removing the gear.
7-10
Chapter 7
[1] [1] [2] [1]
[1]
[1]
[2] F-7-46
F-7-42
2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and detach the plate [2].
7.6.6.12 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid
0006-3821
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the manual feed pickup solenoid [2].
[2] [1]
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-43 F-7-47
7.6.6.13 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Paper Sensor
0006-3823
[1] 1) Free the 2 hooks [1], and detach the manual feed tray paper sensor [2].
[1]
[2]
F-7-44
4) Free the 3 hooks [1].
5) Disconnect the 3 connectors [2], and detach the harness [3]. [2] [1]
F-7-48
[2]
7.6.7 Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid

0006-3425

[1] [1] 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover [2].
[2]
[3] [1]
F-7-45
6) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the main motor unit [2].
7-11
Chapter 7
[2] [1]
[2] [1]
F-7-52
[1]
F-7-49 4) Disconnect the connector [2], and detach the control panel [1].
0006-3426
1) Open the toner supply cover [1]. To prevent damage to the flexible cable, be sure to lift the control panel
2) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the cover [3]. slightly as shown when disconnecting the connector [2].
[2]
[2] [1]
F-7-53
MEMO:
[1] [3] [2] To mount the control panel, turn it over as shown in below figure, and con-
F-7-50
the work.
[2]
move the screw.
[1]
[1] F-7-54

0006-3429

F-7-51

0006-3427

7-12
Chapter 7
[2] [1]
F-7-58
[1] [3] [2]

[1] [1] [2]
F-7-55

0006-3432

[3]
[1]
[1]
[3] [1]
F-7-59
[2]
F-7-56

0006-3434
[4]
[1]
[2]
F-7-60
[1]
0006-3437
[2] 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the left cover [2].
[3] [3]
F-7-57
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-7-61
7-13
Chapter 7

0006-3444
2) Remove the core, and disconnect all connectors from the image processor
PCB [1].
[2] [2] [2] [3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-65
7.6.7.11 Removing the Main Motor Unit

0006-3452
[2] [2]
F-7-62 Take care not to break the claw when removing the gear.
For installation, fasten the core to the upper position with the part [1] and fix [1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-7-63 F-7-66
7.6.7.9 Removing the NCU PCB (if equipped with fax [2] [1]
functions)
0006-3445

2) Remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the NCU PCB [1].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-7-67
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-64

0006-3448

2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the modular jack PCB [3].
[2]
F-7-68
5) Disconnect the 3 connectors [2], and detach the harness [3].
7-14
Chapter 7
[2] [3]
[1] [1]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2] [3] [2]

F-7-72

0006-3473

[3] [1]
[2]
F-7-69
[1] [2] [1]
[3]
[1]
[1] [2]
F-7-73
[1]
F-7-70 0006-3474
7.6.7.12 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid essor PCB and the image processor PCB.
0006-3456
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the manual feed pickup solenoid [2]. PCB [1].
[1] [2]
[2] [2] [2]
[1]
F-7-71 [2] [2]

F-7-74
7.6.8 Registration Roller Unit

0006-3472
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the left cover [2]. the cable with the part [2].
7-15
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
F-7-75
F-7-78
7.6.8.4 Removing the Registration Roller Unit 3) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the bottom plate [2].
0006-3475
1) Using long nose pliers or the like, pick the hook [1], and detach the regis-
tration roller gear [2]. [1]
When removing the gear, be sure to take care not to break the claw.
[1] [2]
[1]
[2] F-7-79
F-7-76 4) Push off the claw [1] of the bushing (front) in the direction of A, and draw
3) Slide the reader unit, and open the cartridge cover. out the bushing (front) [2] in the direction of B.
4) Remove the 6 screws [1], and detach the registration roller unit [2].
[2] [2]
[1]
A
[1] [1]
F-7-77
7.6.9 Vertical Path Roller
7.6.9.1 Removing the Vertical Path Roller

0006-3463

2) Place the machine so that its pickup side is at the bottom. F-7-80
5) Push off the claw [1] of the bushing (rear) in the direction of A, and draw
out the bushing (rear) [2] in the direction of B till the bushing goes out of
the feeder frame [3].
7-16
Chapter 7
[2]
A
A [1]
[3]
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-84
7.6.10.2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray (upper)

0006-3342
1) Remove the 4 ribs [1].

F-7-81 2) Remove the 2 springs [2], and slide the manual feed tray (upper) [3] to de-
6) Place the machine in normal position. tach.
[2]
[1] [3] [1]

F-7-82 F-7-85
7) Open the right door.
8) Slide the vertical path roller [2] to the front to detach. 7.6.10.3 Removing the Manual Feed Tray (lower)
0006-3343
1) Remove the 2 ribs [1], and slide the manual feed tray (lower) [2] to detach.
To avoid break of the feeder frame [1], remove the bushings before removing
or mounting the vertical path roller.
[1] [1]
[1] [1]
[2]
F-7-86
7.6.10.4 Removing the Separation Pad

0006-3337
1) Open the right door.

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the separation pad [2].
[2]
F-7-83
7.6.10 Separation Pad

0006-3326

[2] [1]
F-7-87
7-17
Chapter 8 Fixing System
Contents
Contents
8.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................8-1

8.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Various Control Mechanisms.........................................................................................................................................8-1
8.2.1 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature ................................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.2.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Temperature................................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.2.2 Controlling the Fixing File Bias Temperature ............................................................................................................................. 8-2
8.2.2.1 Controlling the Fixing Film Bias ....................................................................................................................................................................8-2
8.3 Protective Functions.......................................................................................................................................................8-3
8.3.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.3.2 Detecting a Fault in the Fixing Assembly.................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.4.1 Fixing Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.4.1.1 Removing the Left Cover................................................................................................................................................................................8-3
8.4.1.2 Removing the Delivery Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................8-3
8.4.1.3 Removing the Delivery Upper Cover .............................................................................................................................................................8-3
8.4.1.4 Removing the Delivery Rear Cover ................................................................................................................................................................8-3
8.4.1.5 Disconnect connector ......................................................................................................................................................................................8-4
8.4.1.8 Removing the Fixing Assembly......................................................................................................................................................................8-4
8.4.2 Pressure Roller ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-5
8.4.2.9 Removing the Fixing Film Unit ......................................................................................................................................................................8-7
8.4.2.10 Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller ...........................................................................................................................................................8-7
8.4.3 Fixing Film................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.4.3.9 Removing the Fixing Film Unit ......................................................................................................................................................................8-9
8.4.4 Fixing Delivery Sensor .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-10
8.4.4.1 Removing the Left Cover..............................................................................................................................................................................8-10
8.4.4.2 Removing the Delivery Cover ......................................................................................................................................................................8-10
8.4.4.3 Removing the Delivery Upper Cover ...........................................................................................................................................................8-10
8.4.4.4 Removing the Delivery Rear Cover ..............................................................................................................................................................8-10
8.4.4.5 Disconnect connector ....................................................................................................................................................................................8-10
8.4.4.6 Removing the Control Panel .........................................................................................................................................................................8-10
8.4.4.7 Removing the Copyboard Glass....................................................................................................................................................................8-11
8.4.4.8 Removing the Fixing Assembly....................................................................................................................................................................8-11
8.4.4.9 Removing the Delivery Sensor .....................................................................................................................................................................8-12
Chapter 8
8.1 Construction
8.1.1 Outline
0006-2975
The fixing pressure roller and the delivery roller are driven by the main motor.
The paper separated from the photosensitive drum is moved to the inside of the fixing assembly; the paper is then moved outside it after the toner is fused to the
paper by the work of the fixing film and the fixing pressure roller.
The delivery sensor (PS3) is used to detect paper coming out of the fixing assembly.
Delivery roller Fixing film Fixing heater
Delivery sensor (PS3) Fixing pressure Fixing inlet guide

roller
F-8-1
Fixing heater (H1)
Thermal fuse (FU2)
Fixing film
Sub thermistor (TH2)
Main thermistor (TH1)
Fixing pressure roller

F-8-2
8.2 Various Control Mechanisms
8.2.1 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature
8.2.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Temperature

0006-2977
The fixing film unit has a plate-shaped fixing heater built into it for heating the fixing film.
The fixing heater is equipped with 2 thermistor: a main thermistor in the middle and a sub thermistor at the end. The main thermistor is used to control the temper-
ature of the fixing heater and to detect its overheating, while the sub thermistor is used to detect an error temperature on the end of the fixing heater.
The CPU on the DC controller PCB monitors the main thermistor signal (FSRTH) and the sub thermistor signal (SUBTH) from the thermistors for control of the
fixing heater drive signal (FSRD0) and the relay drive signal (RLYD), thus varying the supply of power to the heater and, ultimately, controlling the temperature
of the fixing heater.
8-1
Chapter 8
Image processor PCB
Fixing assembly DC controller PCB
Fixing heater high tempe-

Sub
rature error detection
thermistor
Fixing SUBTH
heater FSRTH
CPU
Main
thermistor
Power supply PCB +3.3V
FSRDO
RLYD
+24V
F-8-3
The CPU on the DC controller PCB executes the following 4 types of fixing temperature control:
- Start-Up Temperature Control
In response to a print command from the image processor PCB, the temperature of the fixing heater is started up to a level 15 deg C/59 deg F lower than paper
passage control temperature target.
- Paper Passage Temperature Control

While printing is taking place, the fixing heater temperature is controlled so that it is identical with the paper passage control temperature target.
- Sheet-to-Sheet Temperature Control
To prevent overheating of areas not covered by paper (between sheets), the fixing heater temperature is controlled to a level relatively lower than the paper passage
control temperature
target.
- Rest Heating Temperature Control

While the machine is at rest, the fixing pressure roller is heated so that the toner collecting on it is melted and moved to the fixing film, thereby ridding the roller
of toner.
The rest heating control mechanism is used to control the temperature of the fixing heater to a level lower than the paper passage target level when LTR or larger
paper is used for printing.
The control temperature targets are switched in reference to the following 4 conditions:
- paper type (as indicated by a command during printing)
- type of control (cover paper or between sheets)
- change in fixing temperature control (OFF -> start-up -> paper passage, etc.)
- count of prints in continuous mode
8.2.2 Controlling the Fixing File Bias Temperature
8.2.2.1 Controlling the Fixing Film Bias

0006-2979
The machine is equipped with a fixing film bias control mechanism which is controlled by the CPU on the DC controller PCB. The fixing film bias is used to prevent
displacement of toner deposits; i.e., when the primary charging roller DC bias is applied, a bias of the same polarity as the toner is applied to the fixing film so as
to create a magnetic field between the paper and the film.
DC controller PCB
Primary
J205 charging
Primary charging
Superposition roller
roller
AC bias drive circuit
Photosensitive
CPU drum
Primary charging
roller
DC bias drive circuit
J206
Fixing film
F-8-4
8-2
Chapter 8
8.3 Protective Functions
8.3.1 Outline
0006-2980
The fixing heater safety circuit is part of the DC controller PCB, and is used
to monitor the fixing temperature for an error at all times. If the output volt-
age for the main thermistor or the sub thermistor reaches about 0.37 V or
lower (about 310 deg C/590 deg F), the relay will be turned off regardless of [1]
the state of the relay drive signal (RLYD) from the CPU to shut the power to
the fixing heater.
If the temperature of the fixing heater increases abnormally, on the other
hand, to exceed about 230 drg C/446 deg F, the thermal fuse will melt to cut
the power to the fixing heater.
8.3.2 Detecting a Fault in the Fixing Assembly [2]

0006-2981
F-8-5
The CPU on the DC controller PCB will identify a fault in the fixing assem-
bly if any of the following conditions (a through f) occurs; as a result,
- it will cut the power to the fixing heater. 8.4.1.2 Removing the Delivery Cover
- it will cause the relay drive signal (RYLD) to go '1' to turn off the relay
0006-3481
1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the delivery cover [2].
and, at the same time, will communicate the presence of a fault to the im-
age processor PCB.
a.Overheating 1 (all conditions) [2]
The CPU will identify overheating 1 if the main thermistor detects 230 deg
C/446 deg F for 1 sec or more continuously.
b. Start-Up Error 1 (start-up)

The CPU will identify start-up error 1 if a level of temperature lower than
120 deg C/248 deg F is detected for 1 sec or more continuously 10 sec after
the heater is supplied with power.
c. Start-Up Error 2 (startup/paper passage)
The CPU will identify start-up error 2 if a level of temperature 15 deg C/59
deg F lower than the paper passage temperature control target is not detected
at all 75 sec after the heater is supplied with power.
d. Temperature Control Low Temperature Error (paper passage/sheet-

to-sheet/rest heating/temperature control)
The CPU will identify a temperature control low condition error if a level of
temperature lower than 120 deg C/248 deg F is detected for 1 sec or more [1]
continuously in paper passage, sheetto- sheet, rest heating, or temperature F-8-6
control state.
e. Main thermistor Open Circuit (all conditions)

8.4.1.3 Removing the Delivery Upper Cover
0006-3482
The CPU will identify main thermistor open circuit if the A/D conversion 1) Slide the reader unit.
value of the output voltage from the main thermistor is in excess of a specific 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery upper cover [2].
value for 1 sec or more.
f. Overheating 2 (all conditions) [1]
The CPU will identify overheating 2 if the sub thermistor detects 300 deg C/
572 deg F or higher for 0.2 sec over more continuously.
g. Sub Thermistor Error Low Temperature 1 (warm-up)

The CPU will identify sub thermistor error low temperature 1 if the temper-
ature reading is lower than 75 deg C/167 deg F for 1 sec or more 10 sec after
the heater is first supplied with power.
h.Sub Thermistor Error Low Temperature 2 (cool-down)
The CPU will identify sub thermistor error low temperature 2 if all the fol-
lowing conditions exit when the heater is off after printing ends and the trail-
ing edge of the paper moves past the delivery sensor.
- the thermistor reading is lower than 75 deg C/167 deg F when the heater is
off.
- printing has not been cancelled in the middle.
- no error has occurred during printing.
- the thermistor reading is lower than 75 deg C/167 deg F before the trail- [2]
ing edge of the paper moves past the delivery sensor. F-8-7
8.4.1.4 Removing the Delivery Rear Cover

8.4 Parts Replacement Procedure 0006-3483
1) Remove the delivery rear cover [1].

8.4.1 Fixing Unit
8.4.1.1 Removing the Left Cover

0006-3480
[1]
F-8-8
8-3
Chapter 8
8.4.1.5 Disconnect connector

0006-3596
1) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1]. [2]
[1]
[1]
[1] [1]
F-8-12
F-8-9
8.4.1.6 Removing the Control Panel 8.4.1.7 Removing the Copyboard Glass
0006-3597 0006-3598
1) Slide the reader unit, and open the cartridge cover. 1) Open the ADF (copyboard cover).
2) Remove the screw [1], and slide the control panel [2] to the left. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the copyboard glass retainer [2].
[1] [3]
[2] [1]
F-8-10 [2]
3) Close the cartridge cover. F-8-13
8.4.1.8 Removing the Fixing Assembly
0006-3599
1) Remove the cover [1].

[1]
[2] [1]
F-8-11
MEMO: F-8-14
nect the connector [1]; then, turn back over [2] the control panel to facilitate 2) Slide the reader unit so that the hole in the reader unit and the hole in the
the work. top plate match.
8-4
Chapter 8
8.4.2.2 Removing the Delivery Cover

0006-3612
[2]
[1]
F-8-18

F-8-15 0006-3613
1) Slide the reader unit.

3) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the fixing assembly [2]. 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery upper cover [2].
MEMO:
To remove the screw [1] used to secure the fixing assembly in place, try re- [1]
moving the screws from above the reader unit using a long screwdriver (i.e.,
make use of the opening above the screws to facilitate the work).
When mounting the fixing assembly, be sure to engage the gear of the fixing
assembly and the gear on the main motor side.
[2]
[2]
F-8-19

0006-3614
[1] [1]
F-8-16
8.4.2 Pressure Roller [1]

F-8-20
0006-3611
0006-3615
[1]
[2]
F-8-17
8-5
Chapter 8
[1]
0006-3618

[1] [3]
[1] [1]
F-8-21

0006-3617

2) Remove the screw [1], and slide the control panel [2] to the left. [2]
F-8-25

0006-3619
[1]
[2] [1]
F-8-22
To prevent damage to the flexible cable, be sure to lift the control panel F-8-26
2) Slide the reader unit so that the hole in the reader unit and the hole in the
top plate match.
[2] [1]
F-8-23
MEMO:
the work.
[2]
F-8-27
3) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the fixing assembly [2].
MEMO:
To remove the screw [1] used to secure the fixing assembly in place, try re-
[1] When mounting the fixing assembly, be sure to engage the gear of the fixing
F-8-24
8-6
Chapter 8
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1] [2]
F-8-31
8.4.2.10 Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller

0006-3621
1) Remove the fixing pressure roller [1].
[1] [1] [1]

F-8-28
8.4.2.9 Removing the Fixing Film Unit

0006-3620
1) Remove the fixing upper cover [1]

3) Remove the 2 hooks [3], and detach the plate [4].
[1]
[3]
[4] F-8-32
[3] 8.4.3 Fixing Film

0006-3600
[2]
F-8-29
4) Remove the 2 ribs [1], and detach the delivery roll unit [2].
[2] [1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-8-33

0006-3601
F-8-30 [2]
5) Free the harness [1] from the harness guide [2], and detach the fixing film
unit [3].
[1]
F-8-34
8-7
Chapter 8

0006-3602

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery upper cover [2].
[1]
[2] [1]
F-8-38
[2]
F-8-35 To prevent damage to the flexible cable, be sure to lift the control panel
0006-3603
[2] [1]
F-8-39
MEMO:
[1] the work.
F-8-36
[2]
0006-3604
[1]
[1]
F-8-40
[1] [1]
F-8-37 8.4.3.7 Removing the Copyboard Glass
0006-3606
8.4.3.6 Removing the Control Panel 1) Open the ADF (copyboard cover).
0006-3605 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the copyboard glass retainer [2].
1) Slide the reader unit, and open the cartridge cover. 3) Remove the copyboard glass [3].
8-8
Chapter 8
[1] [3]
[2]
[2]
F-8-41

0006-3607
[1]
[1] [1]
F-8-44
8.4.3.9 Removing the Fixing Film Unit

0006-3608
1) Remove the fixing upper cover [1]

3) Remove the 2 hooks [3], and detach the plate [4].
[1]
[3]
[4]
F-8-42 [3]
2) Slide the reader unit so that the hole in the reader unit and the hole in the
top plate match.
[2]
F-8-45
4) Remove the 2 ribs [1], and detach the delivery roll unit [2].
[2] [1]
[1]
F-8-46
F-8-43 5) Free the harness [1] from the harness guide [2], and detach the fixing film
3) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the fixing assembly [2]. unit [3].
MEMO:
To remove the screw [1] used to secure the fixing assembly in place, try re-
8-9
Chapter 8
[3] [1]
[2]
[1] [2]
F-8-47
[2]
F-8-50
8.4.4 Fixing Delivery Sensor
0006-3625

0006-3622
[1]
[2]
F-8-48 [1]
F-8-51
0006-3623
1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the delivery cover [2]. 0006-3626

[2]
[1]
[1] [1]
[1]
F-8-52
F-8-49
8.4.4.3 Removing the Delivery Upper Cover 0006-3627
0006-3624
1) Slide the reader unit. 2) Remove the screw [1], and slide the control panel [2] to the left.
2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery upper cover [2].
[2] [1]
F-8-53
8-10
Chapter 8
[1]
[2] [1] F-8-57

F-8-54 2) Slide the reader unit so that the hole in the reader unit and the hole in the
top plate match.
MEMO:
the work.
[2]
[1]
F-8-55
F-8-58
8.4.4.7 Removing the Copyboard Glass 3) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the fixing assembly [2].
0006-3628
1) Open the ADF (copyboard cover). MEMO:

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the copyboard glass retainer [2]. To remove the screw [1] used to secure the fixing assembly in place, try re-
3) Remove the copyboard glass [3]. moving the screws from above the reader unit using a long screwdriver (i.e.,
[1] [3]
[2]
[2]
F-8-56

0006-3629
[1] [1]
F-8-59
8-11
Chapter 8
8.4.4.9 Removing the Delivery Sensor

0006-3630

2) Free the 2 hooks [2], and detach the delivery sensor [3].
[1] [3]
[2]
F-8-60
8-12
Chapter 9 External and Controls
Contents
Contents
9.1 Fans ................................................................................................................................................................................9-1

9.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Power Supply System ....................................................................................................................................................9-1
9.2.1 Power Supply ............................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2.1.1 Route of Low Voltage Power Supply ............................................................................................................................................................9-1
9.2.1.2 Hegh-Voltage Power Supply Circuit ..............................................................................................................................................................9-2
9.2.2 Protection Function ...................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2.2.1 Protective Functions........................................................................................................................................................................................9-2
9.2.3 Backup Battery............................................................................................................................................................................. 9-2
9.2.3.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................9-2
9.2.3.2 Lithium Battery (BAT1) .................................................................................................................................................................................9-2
9.2.3.3 Vanadium Lithium Secondary Battery (BAT2) ..............................................................................................................................................9-3
9.2.3.4 Types of Data ..................................................................................................................................................................................................9-3
9.2.3.5 Printing the Backup Data List .........................................................................................................................................................................9-5
9.2.4 Energy-Saving Function .............................................................................................................................................................. 9-5
9.2.4.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................9-5
9.2.4.2 Operation.........................................................................................................................................................................................................9-5
9.3.1 Control Panel ............................................................................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.3.2 Analog Processor PCB................................................................................................................................................................. 9-6
9.3.2.2 Removing the Analog Processor PCB ............................................................................................................................................................9-6
9.3.3 DC Controller PCB ...................................................................................................................................................................... 9-6
9.3.3.7 Removing the DC Controller PCB..................................................................................................................................................................9-8
9.3.4 Image Processor PCB .................................................................................................................................................................. 9-9
9.3.5 Printer Controller PCB............................................................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.5.1 Removing the Rear Cover .............................................................................................................................................................................9-10
9.3.5.2 Removing the Printer Controller PCB ..........................................................................................................................................................9-10
9.3.6 NCU PCB................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.6.2 Removing the NCU PCB (if equipped with fax functions) ..........................................................................................................................9-10
9.3.7 Modular Jack PCB ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.7.2 Removing the Modular Jack PCB.................................................................................................................................................................9-11
9.3.8 Printer Power Supply PCB......................................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.3.8.2 Removing the Right Cover............................................................................................................................................................................9-11
9.3.8.3 Removing the Toner Supply Cover...............................................................................................................................................................9-11
9.3.8.4 Removing the Control Panel .........................................................................................................................................................................9-11
9.3.8.5 Removing the Front Cover............................................................................................................................................................................9-12
9.3.8.6 Removing the Delivery Cover ......................................................................................................................................................................9-12
9.3.8.7 Removing the DC Controller PCB................................................................................................................................................................9-12
9.3.8.8 Removing the Power Supply PCB ................................................................................................................................................................9-14
9.3.9 Relay PCB.................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-14
Contents
9.3.9.1 Removing the Right Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................... 9-14

9.3.9.2 Removing the Toner Supply Cover .............................................................................................................................................................. 9-14
9.3.9.3 Removing the Control Panel......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-14
9.3.9.4 Removing the Front Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................... 9-15
9.3.9.5 Removing the Sensor Relay PCB ................................................................................................................................................................. 9-15
9.3.10 Humidity Sensor ...................................................................................................................................................................... 9-15
9.3.10.2 Removing the Toner Supply Cover ............................................................................................................................................................ 9-15
9.3.10.3 Removing the Control Panel....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.3.10.4 Removing the Front Cover ......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.3.10.5 Removing the Humidity Sensor.................................................................................................................................................................. 9-16
9.3.11 Reader Unit Slide Detecting Switch ........................................................................................................................................ 9-17
9.3.11.5 Removing the Cartridge Cover ................................................................................................................................................................... 9-18
9.3.11.6 Removing the Upper Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................ 9-18
9.3.11.7 Removing the Reader Unit Slide Detecting Switch.................................................................................................................................... 9-19
9.3.12 Toner Supply Cover Switch..................................................................................................................................................... 9-19
9.3.12.5 Removing the Toner Supply Cover Switch ................................................................................................................................................ 9-20
9.3.13 Fans .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-20
9.3.13.7 Removing the Rear Cover........................................................................................................................................................................... 9-22
9.3.13.8 Removing the Printer Controller PCB ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-22
9.3.13.9 Removing the NCU PCB (if equipped with fax functions) ........................................................................................................................ 9-22
9.3.13.10 Removing the Modular Jack PCB ............................................................................................................................................................ 9-22
9.3.13.11 Remove the Fan ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 9-22
9.3.14 Motor of Main Drive Assembly............................................................................................................................................... 9-23
9.3.14.7 Removing the Rear Cover........................................................................................................................................................................... 9-25
9.3.14.8 Removing the Image Processor PCB.......................................................................................................................................................... 9-25
9.3.14.9 Removing the NCU PCB (if equipped with fax functions) ........................................................................................................................ 9-25
9.3.14.10 Removing the Modular Jack PCB ............................................................................................................................................................ 9-25
9.3.14.11 Removing the Main Motor Unit ............................................................................................................................................................... 9-26
9.3.15 Right Door ............................................................................................................................................................................... 9-26
9.3.15.2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray (lower)................................................................................................................................................... 9-26
9.3.15.3 Removing the Right Door........................................................................................................................................................................... 9-27
Chapter 9
9.1 Fans
9.1.1 Outline
0006-3002
The machine is equipped with a single fan at the rear of the delivery assembly to cool the laser scanner unit, to discharge heat from around the fixing assembly, to
cool the elements of the PCBs, and to discharge ozone.
The fan is controlled by the CPU on the DC controller PCB for the following:
- full-speed rotation while the main motor is in operation.
- full-speed rotation for 30 sec and half-speed rotation for 60 sec after the main motor stops.
- full-speed rotation for 30 sec and half-speed rotation for 60 sec during WAIT.
The CPU on the DC controller PCB generates the fan drive signal (FANON) based on the state of the fan stop signal (FANSTOP; 0: reset, 1: rotate) and the full-
speed/half-speed switch signal (FANHALF; 0: half-speed, 1: full-speed) to control the fan rotation to any of three: rest, half-speed, full-speed.
Main motor
• Power supply PCB
• DC controller PCB
Laser scanner unit
Fixing assembly
Cartridge
F-9-1
9.2 Power Supply System
9.2.1 Power Supply
9.2.1.1 Route of Low Voltage Power Supply

0006-2989
The machine's DC power supply is generated by the power supply PCB.

The AC power arriving at the power supply PCB is converted into the following for supply to loads: +3.3 VDC, +3.3 VSDC, +5 VDC, +5 VSDC, +12 VDC, +24
VDC.
See the following for an outline of the DC power supply:
T-9-1
Output voltage Output voltage value
+3.3V +3.4V +/- 3%
+3.3VS*1 +3.4V +/- 3%
+5.1V +5.1V +/- 4%
+5.1VS*1 +5.1V +/- 4%
+12V +12V +/- 5%
+24V +24V +/- 5%
*1: Also supplied during ESS mode.
9-1
Chapter 9
Power supply PCB

+3.3V Analog +5V
F1 F2 Sensor PCB
processor
NF +8V +8V
PCB Contact sensor
P1 +3.3V
+5V Laser
+24V scanner unit
Low-voltage power +24V
Solenoids
supply circuit
+3.3V +24V
+3.3 V circuit +3.3VS Main motor
+5V +3.3V
Sensors
+ 5 V circuit +5VS
Image processor PCB

+5V Control
+12 V circuit +12V +5VS panel PCB
F101 +24V +3.3V
+24 V circuit +3.3VS Modular jack
NCU PCB*2
+12V PCB*2
+24V
Reader motor
+24V
+5V DC controller PCB
ADF unit*1
+3.3V • Cassette paper sensor +24V
• Paper leading edge ADF motor
sensor
• LGL paper sensor +5V
ADF sensors
+24V +3.3VS
Fan Printer controller
+5VS PCB
Manual feed tray +3.3V
paper sensor +24V Reader unit +24V Toner supply cover
slide detecting open/close
+3.3V Waste toner switch switch
full sensor
+3.3V Sensor relay +3.3V • Humidity sensor

PCB • Toner bottle sensor
+3.3V
Delivery Sensor
*1 : Only if equipped with ADF functions.

*2 : Only if equipped with fax functions.
F-9-2
9.2.1.2 Hegh-Voltage Power Supply Circuit

0006-2994
The high voltage output circuit is built into the DC controller PCB.
The CPU on the DC controller PCB sends instructions for the generation of the following high voltages at specific timing:
- primary charging roller bias (AC voltage + DC negative voltage)
- developing bias (AC voltage + DC negative voltage)
- transfer charging roller bias (DC positive voltage or DC negative voltage)
9.2.2 Protection Function
9.2.2.1 Protective Functions

0006-2992
The power supply PCB is equipped with an over-current/over-voltage protection mechanism to prevent damage to the power circuit in the event of an over-current
or over-voltage, as caused by a short circuit or the like on the load side. If the over-current/over-voltage protective mechanism has gone ON, disconnect the power
cord, and correct the fault; then, connect the power cord once again to reset the machine. If short circuiting and resetting are repeated, the internal fuse (F1, F2,
F101) can melt.
9.2.3 Backup Battery
9.2.3.1 Outline
0006-3004
The machine's image processor PCB is equipped with a lithium battery (BAT1) and a vanadium lithium secondary battery (BAT2) for back-up of the data in the
SRAM and the SDARM in consideration of a power outage or when the power is turned off.
The batteries must be replaced correctly to avoid explosion.

Do not replace any battery with one not indicated for the machine, i.e., use one of the same type or equivalent.
Be sure to dispose of used batteries according to local laws and regulations.
9.2.3.2 Lithium Battery (BAT1)

0006-3007
The data backed up in the SRAM by the lithium battery (BAT1) contains user data for fax functions, communications control data, and service mode settings.
Battery life: about 5 yr
9-2
Chapter 9
The LCD will indicate 'DATA ERROR' when the power is tuned on after the lithium battery (BAT1) has reached the end of its life. If such a condition has occurred,
be sure to replace the image processor PCB according to the instructions.
If you disconnect the jumper plug (JP1) of the image processor PCB and turn off the power, all control data will be reset to default settings. Do not disconnect the
jumper plug (JP1) to prevent the loss of data.
MEMO:
The pin of the jumper plug (JP1) is displaced on the image processor PCB available as a service part so as to prevent exhaustion of the lithium battery (BAT1).
Vanadium lithium
secondary battery
(BAT2)
Lithium battery Jumper plug

(BAT1) (JP1)
F-9-3
9.2.3.3 Vanadium Lithium Secondary Battery (BAT2)

0006-3012
The data backed up by the vanadium lithium secondary battery (BAT2) is image data used for fax transmission/reception, and it does not include the image data
for memory copying.
T-9-2
Back-up time: about 2 hr (assuming that the machine is kept ON for 5 day or more under normal
temperature/pressure conditions)
Battery life: about 5 yr or after repeating charging and discharging 40 times at 100%
If the backup data cannot be stored longer than half the indicated period (even after the machine has been powered for 5 day or longer under normal temperature
and atmospheric conditions), suspect that the battery has reached the end of its life.
If the foregoing back-up time is exceeded, the image data stored in SDRAM will be lost. To prevent loss of image data for service work or relocation, be sure to
print out the image data stored in SDRAM before starting the work.
MEMO:
Memory Clear List
If the memory clear list is automatically printed when the machine is turned on, the image data indicated on the list is the data that was lost without back-up. After
the list is printed, the image data storage and the control information will automatically be deleted. The following is a sample of the memory clear list:
07/30/2001 17:52 FAX 001
*** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * MEMORY CLEAR REPORT * * *
*** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
MEMORY FILES DELETED
TX/RX NO MODE DESTINATION TEL/ID PGS. SET TIME ST. TIME

0002 DELAYED TX 1 07/30 13:51 13:59
0002 DELAYED TX 1 07/30 13:51 13:51
0002 MEMORY RX 1 07/30 13:53 -----
0002 MEMORY RX 1 07/30 13:54 -----
F-9-4
9.2.3.4 Types of Data

0006-3018
The types of data backed up by the data back-up lithium batteries (BAT1, BAT2) on the image processor PCB are as follows: a, b, and c are stored in the SRAM
(backed up by BAT1), while d is the data stored in the SDRAM (backed up by BAT2).
a.User Data
9-3
Chapter 9
T-9-3
Item Description
register/set 1. data register (various settings of reception/transmission mode)
2. telephone number register (one-touch dial, etc)
b. Service Mode Data

T-9-4
Item Description
#1. SSSW error control, echo remedy, etc.
#2. MENU NL equalizer, transmission level, etc.
#3. NUMERIC Param FAX/TEL switch parameter, etc.
#4A. SPECIAL not used normally
#4B. NCU not used normally
#4C. ISDN not used normally
#5. TYPE not used normally
#6. SCANNER image position adjustment, etc.
#7. PRINTER reduction, etc.
#8. PDL malfunction
#9. COUNTER reading counter, print counter, etc.
#10. REPORT system dump list, key history report output, etc.
#11. DOWN LOAD malfunction
#12. CLEAR various data initialization, etc.
#13. ROM version No., checksum, etc.
#14. CS SET malfunction
c. Control Data
T-9-5
Item Description
communication control record most recent 20 communications (reception/transmission)
system dump record past communications state, error communication history, etc.
d.Data Backed Up by BAT2

T-9-6
Item Description
Transmission image transmission (memory transmission, broadcast)

timer transmission
timer broadcast
9-4
Chapter 9
Item Description
reception image memory reception If you are replacing the image processor PCB, be sure to print out the list in
advance. For the method of printing, see 2.2 or 3.21 of Chapter 2.
a. User Data
T-9-7
9.2.3.5 Printing the Backup Data List
0006-6556
The data baked up in control memory may be printed in the form of a list.
Item List
register mode user data list
dial register mode 1-touch spd dial list
1-touch spd dail list (detail)
coded speed dial list
coded speed dial list (detail)
group dial list
b. Service Mode Data T-9-8
Item List
service mode data system data list
c. Control Data T-9-9
Item List
communication control record activity report
system dump record system dump list
9.2.4 Energy-Saving Function
9.2.4.1 Outline
0006-2996
The machine is equipped with an ESS mechanism to limit the consumption

of power in standby as much as possible. The ESS function is controlled by
the image processor PCB, and the machine shifts to ESS mode when the En-
ergy Saver key in the control panel is pressed or the machine remains in
standby state for a specific period of time.
The standby period after which the ESS mode is started is set in user mode:
3 to 30 min (factory default: 5 min).
9.2.4.2 Operation
0006-2998
While the machine remains in ESS mode, all in the control panel except the
LED indicator of the Energy Saver key will remain OFF. The machine will
not shift to ESS mode under any of the following conditions: [2] [1]
- The shift to ESS mode is not enabled in user mode.
- A jam or a service error occurred, and the Alarm lamp is ON. (In the case F-9-5
of the absence of toner or paper, full of the waste toner, and the machine 3) Close the cartridge cover.
shifts to ESS mode in the absence of paper.) 4) Disconnect the connector [2], and detach the control panel [1].
- The image memory contains image data.*1
While the machine is in ESS mode, it will shift out of the state in response to
a press on the Energy Saver key; in addition, it will automatically shift out
of the state under any of the following conditions: To prevent damage to the flexible cable, be sure to lift the control panel
- Print data arrives from the PC. slightly as shown when disconnecting the connector [2].
- A fax arrives.*1
- Off-hook state is detected.*1
- A report output time occurs.*1
- A timer call time occurs.*1
9.3.1 Control Panel

0006-2444
1) Slide the reader unit, and open the cartridge cover. [2] [1]
2) Remove the screw [1], and slide the control panel [2] to the left. F-9-6
MEMO:
the work.
9-5
Chapter 9
[2] [2] [1]
[3]
F-9-10
[1] 8) Remove the grounding plate [1], and detach the analog processor PCB
F-9-7 unit [2].
9.3.2 Analog Processor PCB

0006-2895

[1] [3]
[1] [2]
F-9-11
9) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2].
[1]
[2]
F-9-8
9.3.2.2 Removing the Analog Processor PCB

0006-2899
1) Move the contact sensor to the center.

2) Free the hook [1], and detach the cover [2].
4) Remove the 2 screws [4], and detach the grounding plate [5].
[3] [2]
[2]
F-9-12
10) Remove the cover [1], and detach the analog processor PCB [2].
[1]
[5]
[4]
F-9-9
[2] [1]
F-9-13
6) Remove the screw [1] from under the reader unit.
7) Remove the 2 screws [2] from under the reader unit, and detach the cover
[3]. 9.3.3 DC Controller PCB

0006-3085
9-6
Chapter 9
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
F-9-14

0006-3086

F-9-17

0006-3157

[2] [1]
[1]
F-9-15

0006-3087

[2] [1]
[2] F-9-18
[1] [3] [2]

F-9-16
To mount, fit a screw or the like with the gear [1] lifted in place the direction [2] [1]
F-9-19
move the screw.
MEMO:
the work.
9-7
Chapter 9
[2] [1]
[3] [4] [5] [4] [2]

[1]
F-9-23
F-9-20

0006-3088

[2]
[1] [1]
F-9-24
For installation, fix the flexible cable tightly using a double-sided tape.
[1] [3] [2]
F-9-21

0006-3091
[2]
[1]
F-9-25
not be removed.)
[1]
F-9-22
9.3.3.7 Removing the DC Controller PCB

0006-3093
1) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] used to connect the image processor PCB
and the power supply unit.
2) Disconnect the connector [2] used to connect the NCU PCB and the power
supply unit.
3) Disconnect the connector [3], and free the harness [4] from the harness
guide [5].
F-9-26
9-8
Chapter 9

15) Remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the DC controller PCB [3].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[3]
F-9-30
9.3.4 Image Processor PCB

[1] 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the left cover [2].
0006-2891
F-9-27 2) Remove the 13 screws [3], and detach the rear cover [4].
[3]
[1]
[3]
[2] [1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-9-31

[1] 0006-3169

F-9-28 2) Remove the 5 screws [2], and detach the printer controller PCB [3].
12) Remove the 7 screws [3]. [2]
13) Remove the power supply unit [4] by moving, with your finger, the hook
of the guide used to route the flexible cable between the sensor relay PCB
and the DC controller PCB.
[3]
[3]
[1] [2]
[3] [2] [4] F-9-32
[2]
0006-2892
[1] 1) Remove the retainer for the flexible cable used to connect the analog proc-
[2] 2) Remove the core, and disconnect all connectors from the image processor
PCB [1].
[3] 3) Remove the 6 screws [2], and detach the image processor PCB [1].
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-9-29
9-9
Chapter 9
[2] [2] [2] [2]
[1] [3]
[2] [2]
F-9-33
[1] [2]
F-9-36
9.3.6 NCU PCB

the cable with the part [2]. 9.3.6.1 Removing the Rear Cover
0006-3153
[3]
[1]
[2] [3]
[1]
F-9-34
[4]
9.3.5 Printer Controller PCB [3] [2]

F-9-37
0006-3148

2) Remove the 13 screws [3], and detach the rear cover [4]. functions)
0006-3154

[3] 2) Remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the NCU PCB [1].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-9-35

0006-3149

2) Remove the 5 screws [2], and detach the printer controller PCB [3]. [2]
F-9-38
9.3.7 Modular Jack PCB

0006-3170
9-10
Chapter 9
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2] [1]
[3] [2]
F-9-39 [1]
F-9-42
0006-3172
1) Disconnect the connector [1]. 9.3.8.3 Removing the Toner Supply Cover
2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the modular jack PCB [3]. 0006-3142

[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-9-40
9.3.8 Printer Power Supply PCB [1] [3] [2]

9.3.8.1 Removing the Rear Cover F-9-43
0006-3141
[3] of the arrow as shown to stop; then, attach the toner supply cover, and re-
move the screw.
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2] [1]

F-9-41

0006-3140

F-9-44

0006-3158

9-11
Chapter 9
[2]
[2] [1]
F-9-45
[1] [3] [2]
F-9-48
slightly as shown when disconnecting the connector [2]. 9.3.8.6 Removing the Delivery Cover
0006-3146
[2]
[2] [1]
F-9-46
MEMO:
the work. [1]
F-9-49
[2]
9.3.8.7 Removing the DC Controller PCB
0006-3198
1) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] used to connect the image processor PCB
and the power supply unit.
2) Disconnect the connector [2] used to connect the NCU PCB and the power
supply unit.
3) Disconnect the connector [3], and free the harness [4] from the harness
guide [5].
[1]
[1]
F-9-47

0006-3143

[3] [4] [5] [4] [2]
F-9-50
9-12
Chapter 9
[1] [1]
[2]
[1] [1]
F-9-51
For installation, fix the flexible cable tightly using a double-sided tape.
[1]
F-9-54
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-9-52
not be removed.)
[1]
F-9-55
13) Remove the power supply unit [4] by moving, with your finger, the hook
of the guide used to route the flexible cable between the sensor relay PCB
and the DC controller PCB.
F-9-53
[3]
[3] [2] [4]

[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-9-56
9-13
Chapter 9

15) Remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the DC controller PCB [3].
[1]
[2] [2] [1]
[2]
[1]
[3] F-9-60
F-9-57
0006-3213
9.3.8.8 Removing the Power Supply PCB 1) Open the toner supply cover [1].
0006-3201
1) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the power supply PCB [2]. 3) Remove the toner supply cover [1].
[2] [1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-9-58 [1] [3] [2]

F-9-61
When mounting the power supply unit, be sure not to leave out the sensor
flag [1] of the LGL paper sensor from the rear of the sensor plate [2].
move the screw.
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-9-59 F-9-62
9.3.9 Relay PCB 9.3.9.3 Removing the Control Panel

0006-3216
9.3.9.1 Removing the Right Cover 1) Slide the reader unit, and open the cartridge cover.
0006-3210
9-14
Chapter 9
[2]
[2] [1]
F-9-63
[1] [3] [2]
F-9-66
slightly as shown when disconnecting the connector [2]. 9.3.9.5 Removing the Sensor Relay PCB
0006-3219
1) Remove the 3 connectors [1]. Remove the sensor relay PCB [2].
[1]
[2] [1]
F-9-64
MEMO:
the work.
[2]
[2] F-9-67
9.3.10 Humidity Sensor

0006-2875

[1]
F-9-65

0006-3217
1) Remove the cassette. [2] [1]

[1]
F-9-68

0006-2878

9-15
Chapter 9
[2]
[2] [1]
F-9-72
MEMO:
[1] [3] [2] nect the connector [1]; then, turn back over [2] the control panel to facilitate
F-9-69 the work.
[2]
move the screw.
[1]
[1] F-9-73

0006-2881

[2]
F-9-70

0006-3159

[1] [3] [2]

F-9-74
9.3.10.5 Removing the Humidity Sensor

0006-2882
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the
humidity sensor [3].
[2] [1]
F-9-71
9-16
Chapter 9
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
F-9-75
9.3.11 Reader Unit Slide Detecting Switch

0006-2841

2) Open the manual feed tray. F-9-78

0006-3160

[2] [1]
[1]
F-9-76
[2] [1]
0006-2842 F-9-79
1) Open the toner supply cover [1]. 3) Close the cartridge cover.
2) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the cover [3]. 4) Disconnect the connector [2], and detach the control panel [1].
[2]
[1] [3] [2] [2] [1]

F-9-77 F-9-80
MEMO:
To mount, fit a screw or the like with the gear [1] lifted in place the direction To mount the control panel, turn it over as shown in below figure, and con-
of the arrow as shown to stop; then, attach the toner supply cover, and re- nect the connector [1]; then, turn back over [2] the control panel to facilitate
move the screw. the work.
9-17
Chapter 9
[2] [4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] F-9-84
F-9-81 3) Disconnect the connector [1] connecting the leader slide detecting switch
0006-2843

[2]
F-9-85
[1] [1] [2]
[1] [3] [2]

F-9-82

0006-2845

[3] [1]
[1]
[3] [1]
F-9-86
[2]
F-9-83

0006-2847
1) Detach the part [1] holding the core and the part [2] holding the cable. [1]
[2]
F-9-87
9-18
Chapter 9
9.3.11.7 Removing the Reader Unit Slide Detecting of the arrow as shown to stop; then, attach the toner supply cover, and re-
Switch move the screw.
0006-2849
1) Free the 2 hooks [1], and detach the reader unit slide detecting switch [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-9-91
F-9-88
9.3.12 Toner Supply Cover Switch 1) Slide the reader unit, and open the cartridge cover.
0006-3161
0006-2851

[2] [1]
F-9-92
[2] [1] 3) Close the cartridge cover.
[1]
F-9-89
0006-2852

[2]
[2] [1]
F-9-93
MEMO:
the work.
[1] [3] [2]

F-9-90
9-19
Chapter 9
[2]
[2] [1]
[1] [1]
F-9-94 F-9-97

0006-2829

0006-2853
2) Remove the screw [1]. 3) Remove the toner supply cover [1].
[2]
[2]
[1] [3] [2]

F-9-98
[1] [3] [2] To mount, fit a screw or the like with the gear [1] lifted in place the direction
F-9-95
move the screw.
9.3.12.5 Removing the Toner Supply Cover Switch
0006-2854
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, remove the
toner supply cover open/closed detecting switch [3].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
F-9-96
9.3.13 Fans

0006-2826
F-9-99
3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover [2]. 9.3.13.3 Removing the Control Panel
0006-3162

9-20
Chapter 9
[2]
[2] [1]
F-9-100
[1] [3] [2]
F-9-103
0006-2846

[3]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-9-101
MEMO:
the work.
[2]
[2] F-9-104

0006-2848
[4]
[1] [1]
F-9-102
[2]

0006-2830

9-21
Chapter 9

[1] 1) Disconnect the connector [1].
0006-3167
[2]
[3]
F-9-106
[1] [1] [2] [1] [2]

F-9-110

functions)
0006-3168

[2]
[1]
[3] [1]
F-9-107
[1]
[2]
F-9-111

0006-3174

[1] 2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the modular jack PCB [3].
[2]
F-9-108
9.3.13.7 Removing the Rear Cover [3]

0006-3166
2) Remove the 13 screws [3], and detach the rear cover [4]. [1]
[3]
[2]
F-9-112
9.3.13.11 Remove the Fan

0006-2832

[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-9-109
9-22
Chapter 9

[2] [1] 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover [2].
[1]
[1] [2] [1]

F-9-113
[1]
[1] F-9-117
[1] 9.3.14.2 Removing the Toner Supply Cover

0006-3071

[2]
[2]
F-9-114
4) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the fan unit [3].
5) Remove the 2 screws [4], and detach the fan [5].
[1] [2] [4]
[1] [3] [2]

[5]
F-9-118
[3] To mount, fit a screw or the like with the gear [1] lifted in place the direction
move the screw.
[2] [4]
F-9-115
When mounting the fan, pay attention to the direction of its current.
[1]
F-9-119
F-9-116
0006-3163
9.3.14 Motor of Main Drive Assembly 1) Slide the reader unit, and open the cartridge cover.
0006-3068
9-23
Chapter 9
[2]
[2] [1]
F-9-120
[1] [3] [2]
F-9-123
0006-3073

[3]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-9-121
MEMO:
the work.
[2]
[2] F-9-124

0006-3074
[4]
[1] [1]
F-9-122
[2]

0006-3072

9-24
Chapter 9

[1] 1) Remove the retainer for the flexible cable used to connect the analog proc-
0006-3077

PCB [1].
[2] [2] [2]
[1]
F-9-126
[1] [1] [2]

[2] [2]
F-9-130
[1]
[3] [1]
F-9-127
[1]
[2]
F-9-131

functions)
0006-3165

[1] [2]
[2]
F-9-128
9.3.14.7 Removing the Rear Cover [1]

0006-3075
[3]
[2]
F-9-132
[3] 9.3.14.10 Removing the Modular Jack PCB

[1] 0006-3175

2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the modular jack PCB [3].
[4]
[3] [2]
F-9-129
9-25
Chapter 9
[2]
[3]
[1] [1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-9-133
9.3.14.11 Removing the Main Motor Unit

0006-3079
[3] [1]
Take care not to break the claw when removing the gear. F-9-137
[1] [1] [2] [1]
[1]
[1]
[2] F-9-138
F-9-134
2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and detach the plate [2]. 9.3.15 Right Door
[2] [1] 9.3.15.1 Removing the Right Cover

0006-3324

[1]
[1]
F-9-135
[2] [1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-9-139
9.3.15.2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray (lower)

0006-3325
1) Remove the 2 ribs [1], and slide the manual feed tray (lower) [2] to detach.
[2]
F-9-136
5) Disconnect the 3 connectors [2], and detach the harness [3].
9-26
Chapter 9
[1] [1]
[2]
F-9-140
9.3.15.3 Removing the Right Door

0006-2442
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the right door [2].
[1]
[2]
F-9-141
9-27
Chapter 10 Original Feeding System
Contents
Contents
10.1 Basic Construcion ......................................................................................................................................................10-1

10.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Basic Operation..........................................................................................................................................................10-1
10.2.1 Picking Up and Moving Originals ........................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2.2 Moving Down the Original Pickup Roller and Moving Up the Original Stopper................................................................... 10-1
10.3 Detection Jams ...........................................................................................................................................................10-2
10.3.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.3.2 Types of Jams .......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.4 Parts Replacement Procedure.....................................................................................................................................10-2
10.4.1 ADF.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.4.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover ...........................................................................................................................................................................10-2
10.4.1.2 Removing the Right Cover..........................................................................................................................................................................10-3
10.4.1.3 Removing the ADF .....................................................................................................................................................................................10-3
10.4.2 ADF Drive Unit ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.4.2.3 Removing the ADF .....................................................................................................................................................................................10-5
10.4.2.4 Removing the ADF Drive Unit ...................................................................................................................................................................10-6
10.4.3 ADF Motor Unit ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10-7
10.4.3.3 Removing the ADF .....................................................................................................................................................................................10-8
10.4.3.4 Removing the ADF Drive Unit ...................................................................................................................................................................10-9
10.4.3.5 Removing the White Roller ........................................................................................................................................................................10-9
10.4.3.6 Removing the ADF Motor Unit ................................................................................................................................................................10-10
10.4.4 Feeding Outside Guide .......................................................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.4.4.1 Removing the Rear Cover .........................................................................................................................................................................10-10
10.4.4.2 Removing the Right Cover........................................................................................................................................................................10-10
10.4.4.3 Removing the ADF ...................................................................................................................................................................................10-11
10.4.4.4 Removing the ADF Drive Unit .................................................................................................................................................................10-12
10.4.4.5 Removing the Feeding Outside Guide ......................................................................................................................................................10-13
10.4.5 Separation Roller Unit ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-13
10.4.5.3 Removing the ADF ...................................................................................................................................................................................10-14
10.4.5.5 Removing the White Roller ......................................................................................................................................................................10-16
10.4.5.7 Removing the Separation Roller Unit .......................................................................................................................................................10-17
10.4.6 Separation Roller ................................................................................................................................................................... 10-18
10.4.6.3 Removing the ADF ...................................................................................................................................................................................10-18
10.4.6.5 Removing the White Roller ......................................................................................................................................................................10-20
10.4.6.7 Removing the Separation Roller Unit .......................................................................................................................................................10-21
10.4.6.8 Removing the Original Pickup Roller.......................................................................................................................................................10-22
10.4.6.9 Removing the Original Separation Roller.................................................................................................................................................10-23
10.4.7 Pickup Roller ......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.4.7.3 Removing the ADF ...................................................................................................................................................................................10-23
Contents
10.4.7.5 Removing the White Roller ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10-25

10.4.7.6 Removing the ADF Motor Unit................................................................................................................................................................ 10-26
10.4.7.7 Removing the Separation Roller Unit....................................................................................................................................................... 10-26
10.4.7.8 Removing the Original Pickup Roller ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-27
10.4.8 Original Separation Pad ......................................................................................................................................................... 10-28
10.4.8.1 Removing the Original Separation Pad .................................................................................................................................................... 10-28
10.4.9 Registration Roller ................................................................................................................................................................. 10-28
10.4.9.1 Removing the Rear Cover......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-28
10.4.9.2 Removing the Right Cover ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-28
10.4.9.3 Removing the ADF ................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-29
10.4.9.4 Removing the ADF Drive Unit................................................................................................................................................................. 10-30
10.4.9.5 Removing the ADF Registration Roller ................................................................................................................................................... 10-31
10.4.10 White Roller......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-31
10.4.10.1 Removing the Rear Cover....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-31
10.4.10.2 Removing the Right Cover ..................................................................................................................................................................... 10-32
10.4.10.3 Removing the ADF ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-32
10.4.10.4 Removing the ADF Drive Unit............................................................................................................................................................... 10-33
10.4.10.5 Removing the White Roller .................................................................................................................................................................... 10-34
10.4.11 Feed Roller........................................................................................................................................................................... 10-34
10.4.11.3 Removing the ADF ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-35
10.4.11.5 Removing the Feeding Outside Guide.................................................................................................................................................... 10-37
10.4.11.6 Removing the Feed Roll ......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-38
10.4.12 Original Feed Roller ............................................................................................................................................................ 10-38
10.4.12.3 Removing the ADF ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-39
10.4.12.6 Removing the Delivery Stacking Tray ................................................................................................................................................... 10-41
10.4.12.7 Removing the Original Feed Roller........................................................................................................................................................ 10-42
10.4.13 Original Delivery Roller ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-42
10.4.13.3 Removing the ADF ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-43
10.4.13.6 Removing the Delivery Stacking Tray ................................................................................................................................................... 10-46
10.4.13.7 Removing the Original Delivery Roller.................................................................................................................................................. 10-46
10.4.14 Original Sensor .................................................................................................................................................................... 10-46
10.4.14.3 Removing the ADF ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-47
10.4.14.6 Removing the ADF Motor Unit.............................................................................................................................................................. 10-49
10.4.14.7 Removing the Original Sensor................................................................................................................................................................ 10-50
10.4.15 Registration Sensor .............................................................................................................................................................. 10-50
10.4.15.3 Removing the ADF ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-51
10.4.15.6 Removing the ADF Motor Unit.............................................................................................................................................................. 10-53
10.4.15.7 Removing the Original Sensor................................................................................................................................................................ 10-54
10.4.15.8 Removing the Registration Sensor ......................................................................................................................................................... 10-54
10.4.16 Original Delivery Sensor ..................................................................................................................................................... 10-54
Contents
10.4.16.3 Removing the ADF .................................................................................................................................................................................10-55

10.4.16.4 Removing the ADF Drive Unit ...............................................................................................................................................................10-56
10.4.16.5 Removing the Original Delivery Sensor .................................................................................................................................................10-57
10.4.17 Slide Guide........................................................................................................................................................................... 10-57
10.4.17.1 Removing the Slide Guide (front, rear)...................................................................................................................................................10-57
10.4.17.2 Mounting the Slide Guide (front, rear) ...................................................................................................................................................10-58
10.4.18 Delivery Stacking Tray ........................................................................................................................................................ 10-58
10.4.18.1 Removing the Rear Cover .......................................................................................................................................................................10-58
10.4.18.2 Removing the Right Cover......................................................................................................................................................................10-59
10.4.18.3 Removing the ADF .................................................................................................................................................................................10-59
10.4.18.4 Removing the ADF Drive Unit ...............................................................................................................................................................10-60
10.4.18.5 Removing the Feeding Outside Guide ....................................................................................................................................................10-61
10.4.18.6 Removing the Delivery Stacking Tray....................................................................................................................................................10-62
Chapter 10
10.1 Basic Construcion
10.1.1 Outline
0006-3574
The ADF is a feeding device used exclusively for stream reading, and its series of operations (original pickup, feeding, delivery) is performed using the drive of
the ADF motor (M3).
An original picked from the original placement assembly is controlled so that its movement will match the read start timing of the host machine's contact sensor.
Then, the original is moved as far as stream reading position, read by the contact sensor (for collection of analog image data), and sent to the delivery assembly.
The ADF has 3 sensors to monitor the state of the original. The names and the functions of the sensors are as follows:
T-10-1
Symbol Sensor Function
PS6 Original sensor Detects the presence/absence of an original in the original placement
assembly.
PS7 Registration sensor Detects the timing at which the leading edge of an original is made to arch
at the ADF registration roller.
PS8 Original delivery Monitors the movement of the original in the original delivery assembly.
sensor
PS8
PS6 PS7
F-10-1
10.2 Basic Operation
10.2.1 Picking Up and Moving Originals

0006-3651
The ADF picks up and moves originals under the control of the CPU on the host machine's image processor PCB and using the drive of the ADF motor (M3).
When the host machine's Start key is pressed, with an original placed in the original tray, the ADF motor starts to rotate counterclockwise and the pickup roller
moves down to move up the original stopper. At the same time, the original pickup roller and the original separation roller start to rotate.
When the original pickup roller and the original separation roller rotate, a single original is separated by the work of the original separation roller and the original
separation pad, and its leading edge is detected by the registration sensor. The original is then sent as far as the ADF registration roller; a specific period of time
after the registration sensor detects the leading edge, the ADF motor starts to rotate clockwise to move up the original pickup roller and move down the original
stopper.
The ADF motor rotates clockwise to rotate the ADF registration roller, white roller, original feed roller, and original delivery roller to move and deliver the original.
ON when ADF motor rotates CCW

ON when ADF motor rotates CW
Original Original delivery roller

Original stopper
ADF motor pickup roller Original separation roller
ADF registration roller White roller Original feed roller

F-10-2
10.2.2 Moving Down the Original Pickup Roller and Moving Up the Original Stopper
0006-3746
The original pickup roller is kept in up position during standby, thereby ensuring a gap used to accommodate a stack of originals. The original stopper is kept in
down position during standby to prevent the original from sliding too far inside the machine when it is placed.
When the ADF motor (M3) rotates counterclockwise to start original pickup operation, the drive of the timing belt moves down the original pickup roller and, at
the same time, the original stopper starts to move up, causing an original to be picked up and sent inside the machine.
10-1
Chapter 10
Original stopper
Original separation roller
Original stopper
Timing belt
(feed direction) Original pickup roller
F-10-3
10.3 Detection Jams
10.3.1 Outline
0006-4279
The ADF is equipped with 2 sensors to detect original jams. The CPU on the host machine's image processor PCB checks the presence of paper over the sensor at
such times as stored in advance; if it identifies a jam, it turns off the ADF motor (M3) and indicates a jam message on the LCD.
10.3.2 Types of Jams

0006-3754
The machine identifies a jam as one of 6 types. When a jam has occurred, be sure to remove it, open and then close the ADF, place the original once again, and start
over.
a.Registration Sensor Delay Jam

After separation is started, the registration sensor (PS7) does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specific period of time.
b. Registration Sensor Stationary Jam

After the registration sensor (PS7) detects the leading edge of paper, it detects the trailing edge of paper before a specific period of time.
c. Original size error

After the registration sensor (PS7) detects a original leading edge of paper, it detects the trailing edge of paper before a specific period of time.
d.Original Delivery Sensor Delay Jam

After the registration sensor (PS7) detects the leading edge of paper, the original delivery sensor (PS8) does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specific
period of time.
e. Delivery Sensor Stationary Jam

After the registration sensor (PS7) detects the trailing edge of paper, the original delivery sensor (PS8) does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specific
period of time.
f. ADF Open Jam

While an original is being moved, the ADF (copyboard cover) open/close sensor (PS2) detects a condition indicating that the ADF is open.
PS8 (for jam d or e)
PS7 (for jam a, b, or c)
PS2 (for jam f)

F-10-4
10.4.1 ADF

0006-3830
10-2
Chapter 10
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-10-5

0006-3832

[2] [1]
[1]
F-10-6

0006-3835
[1] [2]
F-10-7
2) Remove the harness retainer [1].
10-3
Chapter 10
[1]
[2] [3]
F-10-8
5) Using a flat-blade screwdriver or the like, remove the 2 covers [1]; then, using long nose pliers or the like, remove the 2 pins [2].
[2]
[1]
F-10-9
7) Open the ADF.
[2]
[1]
F-10-10
10.4.2 ADF Drive Unit

0006-3888
10-4
Chapter 10
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-10-11

0006-3890

[2] [1]
[1]
F-10-12

0006-3891
[1] [2]
F-10-13
10-5
Chapter 10
[1]
[2] [3]
F-10-14
[2]
[1]
F-10-15
7) Open the ADF.
[2]
[1]
F-10-16
10.4.2.4 Removing the ADF Drive Unit

0006-3892
1) Holding the tab [1], detach the white plate [2].
10-6
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-17
2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the ADF drive unit [2].
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-18
10.4.3 ADF Motor Unit

0006-3963
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-10-19

0006-3964

[2] [1]
[1]
F-10-20
10-7
Chapter 10

0006-3965
[1] [2]
F-10-21
[1]
[2] [3]
F-10-22
[2]
[1]
F-10-23
7) Open the ADF.
10-8
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-24

0006-3967
[2]
[1]
F-10-25
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-26
10.4.3.5 Removing the White Roller

0006-3968
1) Remove the spring [1] and the hook [2].
[2]
[1]
F-10-27
10-9
Chapter 10
2) Remove the spring [1] and the hook [2], and detach the white roller [3].
[2] [1]
[3]
F-10-28
10.4.3.6 Removing the ADF Motor Unit

0006-3897

2) Remove the E-ring [2] and the bushing [3].
3) Remove the 3 screws [4], and detach the ADF motor unit [5].
The ADF motor is positioned using a special tool and, therefore, cannot be adjusted in the field. Do not remove the ADF motor from the motor base.
[1] [4] [3] [5]
[4]
[2] [1]
F-10-29
10.4.4 Feeding Outside Guide

0006-4004
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-10-30

0006-4005

10-10
Chapter 10
[2] [1]
[1]
F-10-31

0006-4006
[1] [2]
F-10-32
[1]
[2] [3]
F-10-33
10-11
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-34
7) Open the ADF.
[2]
[1]
F-10-35

0006-4007
[2]
[1]
F-10-36
10-12
Chapter 10
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-37
10.4.4.5 Removing the Feeding Outside Guide

0006-4010
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the grounding plate [2].
2) Remove the static eliminator [3] as much as shown.
[2] [1] [3]
[3]
F-10-38
3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the feeding outside guide [2].
[2]
[1]
F-10-39
10.4.5 Separation Roller Unit

0006-3990
10-13
Chapter 10
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-10-40

0006-3993

[2] [1]
[1]
F-10-41

0006-3995
[1] [2]
F-10-42
10-14
Chapter 10
[1]
[2] [3]
F-10-43
[2]
[1]
F-10-44
7) Open the ADF.
[2]
[1]
F-10-45

0006-3999
10-15
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-46
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-47

0006-4001
[2]
[1]
F-10-48
[2] [1]
[3]
F-10-49

0006-3916

10-16
Chapter 10
[1] [4] [3] [5]
[4]
[2] [1]
F-10-50
10.4.5.7 Removing the Separation Roller Unit

0006-3917
1) Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2], bushing[3], and pin [4].
[3]
[4]
[1] [2]
F-10-51
2) Remove the spring [1], screw [2], and plate [3].
3) Remove the E-ring [4], gear [5], belt [6], and bushing [7].
[4] [5] [7] [3] [2]
[6]
[1]
F-10-52
4) Remove the 2 springs [1], and slide the shaft [2] to detach the open/close cover unit [3].
[3] [2]
[1]
F-10-53
5) Free the 3 hooks [1], and detach the separation roller unit [2].
10-17
Chapter 10
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-10-54
10.4.6 Separation Roller

0006-4058
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-10-55

0006-4059

[2] [1]
[1]
F-10-56

0006-4060
10-18
Chapter 10
[1] [2]
F-10-57
[1]
[2] [3]
F-10-58
[2]
[1]
F-10-59
7) Open the ADF.
10-19
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-60

0006-4062
[2]
[1]
F-10-61
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-62

0006-4064
[2]
[1]
F-10-63
10-20
Chapter 10
[2] [1]
[3]
F-10-64

0006-3925

[1] [4] [3] [5]
[4]
[2] [1]
F-10-65

0006-3926
[3]
[4]
[1] [2]
F-10-66
10-21
Chapter 10
[4] [5] [7] [3] [2]
[6]
[1]
F-10-67
[3] [2]
[1]
F-10-68
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-10-69
10.4.6.8 Removing the Original Pickup Roller

0006-4054
1) Free the 2 hooks [1], and detach the original pickup roller [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-10-70
10-22
Chapter 10
10.4.6.9 Removing the Original Separation Roller

0006-3928
1) Free the 2 hooks [1], and detach the original separation roller [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-10-71
10.4.7 Pickup Roller

0006-4042
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-10-72

0006-4043

[2] [1]
[1]
F-10-73

0006-4044
10-23
Chapter 10
[1] [2]
F-10-74
[1]
[2] [3]
F-10-75
[2]
[1]
F-10-76
7) Open the ADF.
10-24
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-77

0006-4045
[2]
[1]
F-10-78
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-79

0006-4046
[2]
[1]
F-10-80
10-25
Chapter 10
[2] [1]
[3]
F-10-81

0006-4047

[1] [4] [3] [5]
[4]
[2] [1]
F-10-82

0006-4051
[3]
[4]
[1] [2]
F-10-83
10-26
Chapter 10
[4] [5] [7] [3] [2]
[6]
[1]
F-10-84
[3] [2]
[1]
F-10-85
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-10-86
10.4.7.8 Removing the Original Pickup Roller

0006-4052
1) Free the 2 hooks [1], and detach the original pickup roller [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-10-87
10-27
Chapter 10
10.4.8 Original Separation Pad
10.4.8.1 Removing the Original Separation Pad

0006-3942
1) Open the ADF.

2) Hold the tab [1], and detach the white plate [2].
[2]
[1]
F-10-88
3) Remove the spring [1], and detach the original separation pad [2].
[2]
[1]
F-10-89
10.4.9 Registration Roller

0006-3947
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-10-90

0006-3948

10-28
Chapter 10
[2] [1]
[1]
F-10-91

0006-3949
[1] [2]
F-10-92
[1]
[2] [3]
F-10-93
10-29
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-94
7) Open the ADF.
[2]
[1]
F-10-95

0006-3950
[2]
[1]
F-10-96
10-30
Chapter 10
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-97
10.4.9.5 Removing the ADF Registration Roller

0006-3951
1) Remove the E-ring [1], and bushing [2].
[2]
[1]
F-10-98
2) Remove the spring [1] and the screw [2], and detach the plate [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-10-99
3) Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2], bushing [3], pin [4], and 2 belts [5].
4) Remove the ADF registration roller [6].
[6]
[5] [4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-10-100
10.4.10 White Roller

0006-3956
10-31
Chapter 10
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-10-101

0006-3957

[2] [1]
[1]
F-10-102

0006-3958
[1] [2]
F-10-103
10-32
Chapter 10
[1]
[2] [3]
F-10-104
[2]
[1]
F-10-105
7) Open the ADF.
[2]
[1]
F-10-106

0006-3959
10-33
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-107
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-108

0006-3960
[2]
[1]
F-10-109
[2] [1]
[3]
F-10-110
10.4.11 Feed Roller

0006-4016
10-34
Chapter 10
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-10-111

0006-4017

[2] [1]
[1]
F-10-112

0006-4019
[1] [2]
F-10-113
10-35
Chapter 10
[1]
[2] [3]
F-10-114
[2]
[1]
F-10-115
7) Open the ADF.
[2]
[1]
F-10-116

0006-4020
10-36
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-117
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-118

0006-4021
[2] [1] [3]
[3]
F-10-119
10-37
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-120
10.4.11.6 Removing the Feed Roll

0006-4025
1) Free the 2 hooks [1], and detach the feed roll [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-10-121
10.4.12 Original Feed Roller

0006-4139
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-10-122

0006-4140

10-38
Chapter 10
[2] [1]
[1]
F-10-123

0006-4141
[1] [2]
F-10-124
[1]
[2] [3]
F-10-125
10-39
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-126
7) Open the ADF.
[2]
[1]
F-10-127

0006-4142
[2]
[1]
F-10-128
10-40
Chapter 10
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-129

0006-4143
[2] [1] [3]
[3]
F-10-130
[2]
[1]
F-10-131
10.4.12.6 Removing the Delivery Stacking Tray

0006-4145
1) Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2], pin [3], and bushing [4].
10-41
Chapter 10
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-10-132
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and free the 2 hooks [2].
3) Remove the delivery stacking tray [3].
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-10-133
10.4.12.7 Removing the Original Feed Roller

0006-4069
1) Remove the 2 E-rings [1].
[1]
[1]
F-10-134
2) Slide the original feed roller [1] to the left, and remove the pin [2], gear [3], and bushing [4]; then, detach the original feed roller [1].
[1]
[2] [3] [4]

F-10-135
10.4.13 Original Delivery Roller

0006-4124
10-42
Chapter 10
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-10-136

0006-4125

[2] [1]
[1]
F-10-137

0006-4126
[1] [2]
F-10-138
10-43
Chapter 10
[1]
[2] [3]
F-10-139
[2]
[1]
F-10-140
7) Open the ADF.
[2]
[1]
F-10-141

0006-4127
10-44
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-142
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-143

0006-4133
[2] [1] [3]
[3]
F-10-144
10-45
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-145

0006-4134
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-10-146
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-10-147
10.4.13.7 Removing the Original Delivery Roller

0006-4135
1) Detach the original delivery roller [1].
[1]
F-10-148
10.4.14 Original Sensor

0006-3971
10-46
Chapter 10
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-10-149

0006-3973

[2] [1]
[1]
F-10-150

0006-3976
[1] [2]
F-10-151
10-47
Chapter 10
[1]
[2] [3]
F-10-152
[2]
[1]
F-10-153
7) Open the ADF.
[2]
[1]
F-10-154

0006-3977
10-48
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-155
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-156

0006-3979
[2]
[1]
F-10-157
[2] [1]
[3]
F-10-158

0006-3936

10-49
Chapter 10
[1] [4] [3] [5]
[4]
[2] [1]
F-10-159
10.4.14.7 Removing the Original Sensor

0006-3938
1) Free the 2 hooks [1], and detach the original sensor [2].
[1]
[2]
F-10-160
10.4.15 Registration Sensor

0006-3980
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-10-161

0006-3981

10-50
Chapter 10
[2] [1]
[1]
F-10-162

0006-3982
[1] [2]
F-10-163
[1]
[2] [3]
F-10-164
10-51
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-165
7) Open the ADF.
[2]
[1]
F-10-166

0006-3983
[2]
[1]
F-10-167
10-52
Chapter 10
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-168

0006-3985
[2]
[1]
F-10-169
[2] [1]
[3]
F-10-170

0006-3939

10-53
Chapter 10
[1] [4] [3] [5]
[4]
[2] [1]
F-10-171
10.4.15.7 Removing the Original Sensor

0006-3940
1) Free the 2 hooks [1], and detach the original sensor [2].
[1]
[2]
F-10-172
10.4.15.8 Removing the Registration Sensor

0006-3941
1) Free the 2 hooks [1], and detach the registration sensor [2].
[1]
[2]
F-10-173
10.4.16 Original Delivery Sensor

0006-4158
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-10-174
10-54
Chapter 10

0006-4159

[2] [1]
[1]
F-10-175

0006-4161
[1] [2]
F-10-176
[1]
[2] [3]
F-10-177
10-55
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-178
7) Open the ADF.
[2]
[1]
F-10-179

0006-4162
[2]
[1]
F-10-180
10-56
Chapter 10
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-181
10.4.16.5 Removing the Original Delivery Sensor

0006-4164

2) Free the 2 hooks [2], and detach the original delivery sensor [3].
[2]
[3] [1]
F-10-182
10.4.17 Slide Guide
10.4.17.1 Removing the Slide Guide (front, rear)

0006-3903
1) Open the ADF.

2) Pick the tab [1], and detach the white plate [2].
[2]
[1]
F-10-183
3) Remove the screw [1], slide plate [2], and gear [3]; then, detach the slide guide (front, rear) [4].
10-57
Chapter 10
[4]
[1] [2] [3]
F-10-184
10.4.17.2 Mounting the Slide Guide (front, rear)

0006-3910
1) Mount the gear [3] while trying to match the 2 cut-offs [1] and the marking [2] on the slide guide (front, rear).
[1]
[2] [2]
[3]
F-10-185
2) While holding down the gear to keep it in place, mount the slide plate [1] and tighten the screw [2] to secure the plate in place.
[2] [1]
F-10-186
3) Adjust the left/right registration.
10.4.18 Delivery Stacking Tray

0006-4077
10-58
Chapter 10
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-10-187

0006-4079

[2] [1]
[1]
F-10-188

0006-4080
[1] [2]
F-10-189
10-59
Chapter 10
[1]
[2] [3]
F-10-190
[2]
[1]
F-10-191
7) Open the ADF.
[2]
[1]
F-10-192

0006-4081
10-60
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-193
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-194

0006-4085
[2] [1] [3]
[3]
F-10-195
10-61
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-196

0006-4086
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-10-197
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-10-198
10-62
Chapter 11 Maintenance and Inspection
Contents
Contents
11.1 Periodically Replaced Parts .......................................................................................................................................11-1

11.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ..................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Durables and Consumables ........................................................................................................................................11-1
11.2.1 Durables ................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure........................................................................................................................11-1
11.3.1 Scheduled Servicing Chart....................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.4 Cleaning .....................................................................................................................................................................11-1
11.4.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.4.2 Selfoc Lens Array of the Contact Sensor................................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.4.3 Cassette Pickup Roller ............................................................................................................................................................. 11-2
11.4.4 Manual Feed Pickup Roller ..................................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.4.5 Separation Pad ......................................................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.4.6 Registration Roller ................................................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.4.7 Transfer Guide ......................................................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.4.8 Transfer Charging Roller ......................................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.4.9 Separation Static Eliminator .................................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.4.10 Paper Path .............................................................................................................................................................................. 11-2
11.4.11 Fixing Inlet Guide .................................................................................................................................................................. 11-2
11.4.12 Fixing Pressure Roller............................................................................................................................................................ 11-2
11.4.13 Delivery Roller....................................................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.4.14 Back of Copyboard Glass (Back of Shading Plate) ............................................................................................................... 11-2
11.4.15 Original Pickup Roller (ADF) ............................................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.4.16 Original Separation Roller (ADF) ......................................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.4.17 Original Separation Pad (ADF) ............................................................................................................................................. 11-3
11.4.18 ADF Registration Roller (ADF) ............................................................................................................................................ 11-3
11.4.19 Original Feed Roller (ADF)................................................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.4.20 Original Delivery Roller (ADF)............................................................................................................................................. 11-3
11.4.21 Copyboard Glass (Original Reading Area) (ADF) ................................................................................................................ 11-3
Chapter 11
11.1 Periodically Replaced Parts
11.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts

0006-3064
The machine does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
11.2 Durables and Consumables
11.2.1 Durables
0006-3067
The machine does not have durables that require replacement once or more during the life of the product because of wear or damage.
11.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure
11.3.1 Scheduled Servicing Chart

0006-3069
The machine does not have items (parts or durables) that require scheduled servicing. To help prolong the life of the product and its parts, it is recommended that
the following be performed at time of a service visit.
T-11-1
As of August 2002
Work Procedure
1. Question key person in charge, and obtain a general idea of the issue.
2. Make repairs of any faults.
3. Make test copies, and check the output for the following:
(1) image density against standards, (2) soiling of the background, (3) clarity of characters, (4) margin,
(5) fixing, faulty registration, soiling of the back of the page.
Standards for Margin (single-sided)
Leading edge: 3.0 -/+ 2.0 mm (0.12" -/+ 0.08")
Left/right edge: 2.5 -/+ 2.0 mm (0.10" -/+ 0.08")
4. Clean the parts: As needed, remove the cartridge before starting the work.
5. Make test copies.
6. Clean up the area around the machine.
11.4 Cleaning
11.4.1 Outline
0006-3096
At time of a service visit, clean the items described in 4.1 "Cleaning by the User (machine)" ; then, perform the following as needed:
Do not clean the photosensitive drum.
11.4.2 Selfoc Lens Array of the Contact Sensor

0006-3097
1. If the face of the light guide assembly becomes soiled or scratched, its optical characteristics will be affected. Do not touch the light guide assembly.
2. The contact sensor is vulnerable to static charges. Be sure to provide measures against static damage before touching it.
3. Be sure to fit back the spacer after the cleaning work; otherwise, the contact sensor may not work properly.
Lightly remove any dirt with a dry, soft cloth.
11-1
Chapter 11
Light guide
assembly
(translucent)
Spacer
Selfoc lens array

(black)
Spacer
F-11-1
11.4.3 Cassette Pickup Roller

0006-3098
Clean it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well). If the dirt is excessive, use alcohol with lint-free paper thereafter, be sure to dry wipe it with a cloth
or lint-free paper.
11.4.4 Manual Feed Pickup Roller

0006-3100
Dry wipe it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well). If the dirt is excessive, use alcohol with lint-free paper thereafter, be sure to dry wipe it with a cloth
or lint-free paper.
11.4.5 Separation Pad

0006-3101
Dry wipe it with lint-free paper.
11.4.6 Registration Roller

0006-3103
Clean it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well). If the dirt is excessive, use alcohol with lint-free paper thereafter, use a cloth or lint-free paper.
11.4.7 Transfer Guide

0006-3104
Clean it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well) thereafter, dry wipe it with a cloth or lint-free paper.
11.4.8 Transfer Charging Roller

0006-3105
As a rule, do not touch or clean it. However, if cleaning proves necessary as when the cause of an image fault is the transfer roller, clean it while taking care not to
handle the roller or not to subject it to solvent or oils.
Use lint-free paper and dry wipe it. Do not use water or solvent. During cleaning, take care not to impose force on the rubber area of the transfer charging roller.
11.4.9 Separation Static Eliminator

0006-3106
Clean it with a blower brush.
11.4.10 Paper Path

0006-3107
Dry wipe it with lint-free paper.
11.4.11 Fixing Inlet Guide

0006-3108
Use alcohol with a soft cloth.
11.4.12 Fixing Pressure Roller

0006-3109
If dirt cannot be removed by executing fixing pressure roller cleaning from the Additional Functions menu, use alcohol and a soft cloth.
11.4.13 Delivery Roller

0006-3110
Clean it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well). If the dirt is excessive, use alcohol and lint-free paper thereafter, dry wipe it with a cloth or lint-free
paper.
11.4.14 Back of Copyboard Glass (Back of Shading Plate)

0006-3111
Wipe it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well); then, dry wipe it with a cloth or lint-free paper.
11-2
Chapter 11
Back of copyboard glass White pate

(back of shading plate)
Copyboard glass
Copyboard glass
retainer
Copyboard glass retainer
Vertical
size plate Manual feed
Contact sensor pickup roller
Delivery roller
Separation pad
Fixing
pressure roller
Fixing inlet guide Separation Transfer Vertical path roller

Paper path static Transfer guide
eliminator Registration roller
charging Cassette
roller pickup roller
F-11-2
11.4.15 Original Pickup Roller (ADF)

0006-3112
Clean it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well). If dirt is excessive, use alcohol with lint-free paper thereafter, dry wipe it with a cloth or lint-free paper.
11.4.16 Original Separation Roller (ADF)

0006-3113
Clean it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well). if the dirt is excessive, use alcohol with lint-free paper thereafter, dry wipe it with a cloth or lint-free
paper.
11.4.17 Original Separation Pad (ADF)

0006-3115
paper.
11.4.18 ADF Registration Roller (ADF)

0006-3116
paper.
11.4.19 Original Feed Roller (ADF)

0006-3117
paper.
11.4.20 Original Delivery Roller (ADF)

0006-3118
paper.
11.4.21 Copyboard Glass (Original Reading Area) (ADF)

0006-3119
Wipe it with a cloth moistened with water (and wrung well); then, dry wipe it with a cloth or lint-free paper.
Original pickup roller

Original separation roller Original
delivery roller
Original
feed roller
Original
White pate separation pad White roller Copyboard glass
(original reading area)
ADF registration roller
F-11-3
11-3
Chapter 12 Standards and Adjustments
Contents
Contents
12.1 Image Adjustments ....................................................................................................................................................12-1

12.1.1 Leading Edge Read Start Position Adjustment........................................................................................................................ 12-1
12.1.2 Left/Right Edge Read Start Position Adjustment .................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 Scanning System ........................................................................................................................................................12-1
12.2.1 Preparing a Test Sheet for Adjustment .................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2.2 Contact Sensor LED Intensity Auto Adjustment..................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.3 Fixing System ............................................................................................................................................................12-1
12.3.1 Nip Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................................................ 12-1
12.4 Electrical Components ...............................................................................................................................................12-2
12.4.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.4.2 When Replacing the Image Processor PCB............................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.5 ADF............................................................................................................................................................................12-2
12.5.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.5.1.1 Items of Adjustment and Sequence of Work ..............................................................................................................................................12-2
12.5.1.2 Preparing a Test Sheet for Adjustment .......................................................................................................................................................12-2
12.5.2 Adjusting the Mechanical System ........................................................................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.2.1 Removing the Skew ....................................................................................................................................................................................12-3
12.5.2.2 Left/Right Registration Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................................12-3
12.5.3 Adjusting the Ellectrical System.............................................................................................................................................. 12-3
12.5.3.1 Registration Arch Auto Adjustment............................................................................................................................................................12-3
12.5.3.2 Original Read Position Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................................12-3
12.5.3.3 Original Speed Adjustment .........................................................................................................................................................................12-3
12.5.3.4 Leading Edge Read Start Position Adjustment...........................................................................................................................................12-4
12.5.3.5 Trailing Edge Read End Position Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................12-4
Chapter 12
12.1 Image Adjustments make sure that the length of L on the copy is as indicated.
14) End the work if the length of L is as indicated; otherwise, start over
with step 2).
12.1.1 Leading Edge Read Start Position Adjustment
0006-3194
Adjust the leading edge read start position for book mode as follows: 12.2 Scanning System
1) Make a copy of the test sheet in book mode on paper of the same size in
Direct.
2) Measure the length of L on the copy (i.e., the length obtained by sub- 12.2.1 Preparing a Test Sheet for Adjustment
tracting the leading edge margin from the line found 10 mm from the 0006-3145
leading edge; it must be 7 -/+ 0.5 mm). You will need to prepare a test sheet as follows for adjustments (except con-
tact sensor LED intensity auto adjustment); refer to fllowing illustrations for
the specifics:
Leading edge margin Preparing a Test Sheet: On a sheet of A4 or LTR paper, draw straight lines
L as indicated:
<Using A4 Paper>
297m
10mm 10mm
10mm
feeding direction)
210mm
(feeding direction)
10mm
10mm
Copy of the test sheet Draw straight lines.
F-12-3
F-12-1 <Using LTR Paper>

3) Press the Additional Functions key and the # key to start service mode. 279m
4) Press the left/Right Arrow key so that '#6 SCANNER' is indicated. 10mm 10mm
10mm
6) Press the Left/Right Arrow key so that '7: CCD' is indicated.
216mm
(feeding direction)
8) Press the Left/Right Arrow key so that the 2nd row of the LCD indi-
cates '023:'.
9) Enter an appropriate correction value using the Left/Right Arrow key 10mm
so that the length of L measured in step 2 is 7 mm. (An increase by '1' will
10mm
decrease the length of L by about 0.1 mm.) Draw straight lines.
11) Press the Stop key (to end SCANNER). F-12-4
12) Make a copy of the test sheet in book mode on paper of the same size
in Direct; then, check to make sure that the length of L is as indicated. 12.2.2 Contact Sensor LED Intensity Auto Adjustment
13) End the work if the length of L is as indicated; otherwise, start over 0006-3152
with step 2).
12.1.2 Left/Right Edge Read Start Position Adjustment Before starting adjustment, verify that there is nothing on the copyboard
0006-3195
Adjust the left/right edge read start position for book mode as follows: glass. Also verify that the ADF (copyboard cover) is securely closed.
1) If LTR paper is available, prepare a test sheet using LTR paper. If no LTR
paper is available, cut a larger sheet of paper so that its width is 216 mm;
then, prepare a test sheet as instructed in 1.2.2, making sure that the width Execute auto adjustment of the contact sensor LED intensity as follows:
is 216 mm; as for its length, make sure that it fits the copyboard glass. 1) Press the Additional Functions key and the # key to start service mode.
2) Make a copy of the sheet in book mode on paper of the same size to a 2) Press the Left/Right Arrow key so that 'TEST MODE' is indicated.
reduction ratio of 80%. 3) Press the OK key.
3) Measure the length of b-a of the copy, and check to make sure that it is 4) Press '2' on the keypad so that 'TEST MODE' is indicated.
as indicated. (It must be 0 +/- 0.4 mm.) 5) Press '7' on the keypad to clear the CCD parameter.
6) Press the Stop key to return to 'TEST MODE'.
7) Press '2' on the keypad so that '2: CCD TEST' is indicated.
8) Press '8' on the keypad so that the machine starts contact sensor LED
intensity auto adjustment.
a 9) End the work when the LCD indicates 'OK'; if it indicates 'NG', on the
other hand, start over.
eding direction) 10) Press the Stop key and the Additional Functions key (to end TEST
MODE).
12.3 Fixing System

Copy of the test sheet 12.3.1 Nip Adjustment
b 0006-3121
A fixing fault can occur if the nip of the fixing assembly is not correct. The
machine is not equipped with a mechanism to adjust the nip; if a fixing fault
occurs, be sure to check the nip as follows, and replace the fixing assembly
F-12-2
if it is not as indicated:
4) Press the Additional Functions key and the # key to start service mode. 1) Execute 'PRINT test' under 'test mode' in service mode to make a solid
5) Press the Left/Right Arrow key so that '#6 SCANNER' is indicated. black copy on A4 or LTR paper.
6) Press the OK key. 2) With the black side facing down, place the solid black copy in the man-
7) Press the Left/Right Arrow key so that '7: CCD' is indicated. ual feed tray and make a copy using manual feed tray.
8) Press the OK key. 3) Turn off the power as soon as the leading edge of the paper appears in
9) Press the Left/Right Arrow key so that the 2nd row of the LCD indi- the delivery tray, and leave the machine alone for about 10 sec.
cates '021:'. 4) Take out the cartridge, and remove the paper from the pickup side as if
10) Enter an appropriate correction value on the keypad so that the length it was a jam.
of b-a measured 5) Measure the width of the area of glossy toner on the paper, and see that
in step 2) is as indicated. (An increase by '1' will decrease the length of b it is as indicated in fllowing illustrations.
by about 0.03
mm while increasing the length of a by about 0.03 mm.)
12) Press the Stop key (to end SCANNER).
13) Make a copy of the test sheet in book mode on paper of the same size;
then, check to
12-1
Chapter 12
<Using A4 Paper>
297 mm
10 mm
a
95 mm
Feeding
210mm
Vanadium lithium
dlirection b secondary battery
(BAT2)
95mm
c
10 mm
Solid black area Glossy area
F-12-5 Lithium battery Jumper plug
(BAT1) (JP1)
F-12-7
<Using LTR Paper>
279 mm
10 mm
a
When the jumper plug (JP1) is removed, all data in control memory will be
98 mm
216 mm lost. Therefore, do not disconnect the jumper plug (JP1). The data stored in
Feeding
directon b the SRAM is as follows:
- user data (data indicating user mode settings)
98 mm
- service mode deta (data indicating service mode settings)

- control data (communications control record of most recent 20 commu-
10 mm
c
nications, system dump record)
Solid black area Glossy After Finishing the Work

F-12-6 1) Connect the jumper plug (JP1) of the image processor PCB (service part;
one side of the pin is disconnected; try connecting both its feet).
T-12-1 2) Turn on the power; then, when 'DATA ERROR' is indicated, press the
Dimension
OK key.
3) Enter the user data and the service mode data.
a 5.5 +/- 0.5 mm 4) Make various adjustments for the electrical system of the machine.
5) If the machine is equipped with ADF functions, make various adjust-
ments for the ADF.
|c-a| 0.5 mm or less
|b-a| 0.5 mm or less 12.5 ADF

|b-c| 0.5 mm or less 12.5.1 Outline
12.5.1.1 Items of Adjustment and Sequence of Work

0006-3197
The ADF must be adjusted for the following items and in the following se-
12.4 Electrical Components quence of work:
12.4.1 Outline
You need to make the following adjustments whenever you have replaced
0006-3125
1. If you have replaced major parts of the ADF, you must always execute
the machine's major parts. the following: registration arch auto adjustment, original read position ad-
justment. Then, check to make sure that the settings of other items of ad-
justment are as indicated; if not, make adjustments starting with the
preceding item of adjustment.
Be sure to make the appropriate adjustments if you have replaced a specific 2. Each item of adjustment affects the subsequent items of adjustment. If
major part. you have made adjustments, therefore, be sure to check that the setting of
the item of adjustment that follows is also as indicated; if not, be sure to
start over with the preceding item.
T-12-2
Part replaced Item of adjustment T-12-3
Sequence Item of adjustment

Image processor PCB all adjustments, including
ADF adjustment
1 registration arch auto adjustment
Contact sensor contact sensor LED intensity
auto adjustment
2 skew removal
3 original read position adjustment
4 original feed speed adjustment

To replace the image processor PCB, be sure to work according to the in-
structions given for the replacement of the image processor PCB. 5 leading edge read start position
adjustment
6 trailing edge read end position
12.4.2 When Replacing the Image Processor PCB adjustment
7 left/right registration adjustment
0006-3239
Perform the following if you have replaced the image processor PCB:
1) If the machine is equipped with fax functions, print out the following and
all received images: system data list, 1-touch/speed/group dial list, user
data list, activity report, system dump list.
2) Turn off the power.
12.5.1.2 Preparing a Test Sheet for Adjustment
0006-3200
When making adjustments (except registration arch auto adjustment and

original read position adjustment) for the ADF, you will need a test sheet like
the one used for the copier.
12-2
Chapter 12
12.5.2 Adjusting the Mechanical System
12.5.2.1 Removing the Skew

0006-3202
Make a copy of the test sheet using the ADF in Direct, and make sure that [3]
the skew is as indicated following illustrations.
a
(feeding direction)
b Copy of the test sheet
F-12-8
b-a: 0 -/+1.3 mm (A4/LTR)
1) Open the ADF.
2) Loosen the 3 screws [1], and move the left hinge up and down so that
the skew will be as indicated by referring to the index graduated at 1-mm
intervals.
[1]
F-12-12
MEMO:
A shift of the slide guide up by 1 mm will increase the registration on the
right (top of paper) by 1 mm.
F-12-9
MEMO: Do not remove the screw [3]; otherwise, you must work as instructed for
A shift of the ADF upward by 1 mm will increase the registration along the mounting of the slide guide.
left bottom of the paper by about 0.5 mm.
3) Place A4 (LTR) paper in the cassette or the manual feed tray. 12.5.3 Adjusting the Ellectrical System
4) Open the ADF, and place an A5 (STMTR) original on the copyboard
glass. 12.5.3.1 Registration Arch Auto Adjustment
5) Close the ADF, and make a copy in Direct. 0006-3207
6) Check the copy image, and check to make sure that the area outside the Adjust the registration arch for the ADF registration roller as follows:
image is free of fogging. 1) Press the Additional Functions key and the # key to start service mode.
7) If fogging is found, the position of the white sheet may be wrong; 2) Press the Left/Right Arrow key so that 'TEST MODE' is indicated.
check its positioning. If no fault is found, try skew removal once again. 3) Press '6' on the keypad so that 'FACULTY TEST' is indicated.
4) Press '4' on the keypad so that '6-4 ADF' is indicated.
12.5.2.2 Left/Right Registration Adjustment 5) Place 10 sheets of A4 paper in the ADF.
0006-3205
6) Press '8' on the keypad so that the machine will start registration arch
Using the ADF, make a copy of the sheet in Direct, and check to make sure auto adjustment.
the left/right registration is 10 +/- 1 mm. 7) End the work when the LCD indicates 'OK'; if it indicates 'NG', on the
other hand, start over the adjustment.
8) Press the Stop key and then the Additional Functions key (to end TEST
10±1mm
MODE).
(feeding direction)
12.5.3.2 Original Read Position Adjustment
0006-3208
Adjust the contact sensor original read position for ADF mode as follows:
Copy of the test sheet
F-12-10 Check to make sure that the ADF is fully closed before starting the work.
1) Pick the tab [1], and detach the white plate [2]. Moreover, check to be sure of the absence of any object on the copyboard
glass.
[2]
1) Press the Additional Functions key and the # key to start service mode.
2) Press the Left/Right Arrow key so that 'TEST MODE' is indicated.
4) Press '2' on the keypad so that '2: CCD TEST' is indicated.
5) Press '3' so that the machine starts original read position adjustment.
6) End the work when the LCD indicates 'OK'; if it indicates 'NG', on the
other hand, start over the adjustment.
7) Press the Stop key and the Additional Functions key (to end TEST
MODE).
[1]
12.5.3.3 Original Speed Adjustment
0006-3211
Adjust the speed at which originals are moved for ADF mode as follows:
1) Make a copy of the test sheet in ADF mode on paper of the same size in
Direct.
2) Measure the length "L" in the middle of the copy output. (It must be
F-12-11
277 -/+ 1 mm for A4, 259 -/+ 1 mm for LTR.)
2) Loosen the screw [3], and move the slide guide to the front/rear with ref-
erence to the index graduated at 1-mm intervals until the registration is as
indicated.
12-3
Chapter 12
8) Press the Left/Right arrow keys so that the 2nd row of the LCD indi-
cates '025:'.
9) Enter a correction value using the Left /Right key so that the length of
(feeding direction) "L" measured in step 2) is 8 mm (trailing edge margin of 2 mm; an in-
L crease by '1' will decrease the length of "L" by about 0.1 mm).
11) Press the Stop key (to leave 'SCANNER').
Copy of the test sheet 12) Make a copy of the Test Sheet in Direct on LGL paper and in ADF
mode. Then, check to make use that the length of "L" on the copy is as
indicated.
F-12-13 13) If it is as indicated, end the work. Otherwise, start over with step 2).
4) Press the Left/Right Arrow key so that '#6 SCANNER' is indicated.
cates '034:'.
9) Enter a appropriate correction value using the Left/Right Arrow key so
that the length of L measured in step 2) is as indicated. (An increase by '1'
will increase the length of L by about 0.5 mm.)
12) Make a copy of the test sheet in ADF mode on paper of the same size
in Direct; then, check to make sure that the length of L of the copy is as
indicated.
with step 2).
12.5.3.4 Leading Edge Read Start Position Adjustment

0006-3222
Adjust the leading edge start position for ADF mode as follows:
1) Make a copy of the test sheet in ADF mode on paper of the same size in
Direct.
2) Measure the length of L on the copy (i.e., obtained by subtracting the
leading edge margin from the position of the line found 10 mm from the
leading edge; it must be 7 -/+ 0.5 mm).
Leading edge margin

L
(feeding direction)
F-12-14
4) Press the Left/Right Arrow key so that '#6 SCANNER' is indicated.
cates '024'.
9) Enter an appropriate correction value using the Left/Right Arrow key
so that the length of L measured in step 2) is 7 mm. (An increase of '1' will
increase the length of L by about 0.1 mm.)
12) Make a copy of the test sheet in ADF mode on paper of the same size
in Direct; then, check to make sure that the length of L on the copy is as
indicated.
with step 2).
12.5.3.5 Trailing Edge Read End Position Adjustment

0006-3229
To adjust the trailing edge margin for ADF mode, go through the following:
1) Make a copy of the test sheet on LGL paper in Direct.

2) Measure the length "L" on the copy output. (standard: 8 -/+ 0.5 mm)
Trailing edge margin

L
(feeding direction)
F-12-15
4) Press the Left/Right arrow key so that '#6 SCANNER' is indicated.
6) Press the Left/Right arrow key so that '7: CCD' is indicated.
12-4
Chapter 13 Correcting Faulty Images
Contents
Contents
13.1 Making lnitial Checks ................................................................................................................................................13-1

13.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.2 Making Initial Checks.............................................................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.1.3 Site Environment ..................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.4 Checking the Drum Unit .......................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.5 Checking the Paper .................................................................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.1.6 Others ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.7 Troubleshooting Flow Chart .................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.8 Making Checks in Response to an Image Fault....................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.1.9 Checking the Photointerrupters................................................................................................................................................ 13-2
13.2 Outline of Electrical Components..............................................................................................................................13-4
13.2.1 Clutch/Solenoid........................................................................................................................................................................ 13-4
13.2.1.1 Body ............................................................................................................................................................................................................13-4
13.2.1.2 ADF.............................................................................................................................................................................................................13-4
13.2.2 Sensor....................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-5
13.2.2.1 Body ............................................................................................................................................................................................................13-5
13.2.2.2 ADF.............................................................................................................................................................................................................13-5
13.2.3 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ..................................................................................................................................................... 13-6
13.2.3.1 Others ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................13-6
13.2.4 PCBs ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 13-7
13.2.4.1 PCBs............................................................................................................................................................................................................13-7
13.2.5 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB................................................................. 13-9
13.2.5.1 Variable Resistors, Light Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB .............................................................................................13-9
Chapter 13
13.1 Making lnitial Checks
13.1.1 Outline
0006-3243
A fault that can occur in the machine may be one of the following three: an image fault, a malfunction, a feeding fault.
If a fault occurs, make initial checks first; then, isolate the problem according to the troubleshooting flow chart, and take appropriate action with the following in
mind:
13.1.2 Making Initial Checks

0006-3244
1. If you are using a specific terminal of a connector to measure voltage, be sure to check that the connector is not suffering from poor contact.
2. If you are handling a PCB or the contact sensor, be sure to touch a metal portion of the machine before starting the work to avoid static damage.
3. The machine's laser scanner unit cannot be adjusted in the field. Do not disassemble it.
13.1.3 Site Environment

0006-3247
a. The power source must provide the rated voltage -/+ 10%.
b. The site must be free of high temperature/humidity (not near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier), and must not be in a cold place, near a source of fire,
or subject to dust.
c. The site must be free of ammonium gas.
d. The site must be free of direct rays of the sun; otherwise, it must be provided with curtains.
e. The site must be well ventilated.
f. The machine must be level.
g. If the machine is equipped with fax functions, it must remain powered day and night.
13.1.4 Checking the Drum Unit

0006-3248
If the surface of the photosensitive drum has scratches, replace the drum unit.
13.1.5 Checking the Paper

0006-3250
a. Is the paper of a recommended type?

b. Is the paper moist? Try fresh paper out of package.
13.1.6 Others
0006-3251
When a machine is brought from a cold to warm place, its inside can start to develop condensation, leading to various problems; for example,
a. condensation in the charging roller system tends to cause electrical leakage.
b. condensation on the pickup/feed path tends to cause a feeding fault.
If condensation occurs, dry wipe the parts or leave the machine ON for 60 min.
13.1.7 Troubleshooting Flow Chart

0006-3264
After going through the initial checks, try to isolate the problem using the following flow chart, and take appropriate action:
13-1
Chapter 13
Initial Checks
No See the troubleshooting

Is power supplied? tables for malfunctions
(other than for service errors).
Yes
No Is a user or No See the troubleshooting

Does the machine
service error tables for malfunctions
enter standby state?
indicated? (other than for service errors).
Yes
See the Reference
Guide/Fax Guide or
the troubleshooting tables
for malfunctions
Yes (service errors).
No See the troubleshooting tables

Can a test print
for malfunctions
be made? (*1)
(other than for service errors).
Yes
Execute test printing.
Yes
See the troubleshooting
Does a jam occur?
tables for feeding faults.
No
Is the delivered No See the troubleshooting

paper normal? tables for feeding faults.
Yes
Is there an Yes See the troubleshooting

image fault? tables for faulty images.
No
See the Reference

Is a user or service Yes
Guide/Fax Guide or
error initiated? the troubleshooting tables
for malfunctions
No (service errors).
End.
(*2)
F-13-1
*1: When executing test printing, be sure to select the source of paper used by the user when the fault occurred.
*2: For malfunctions related to the ADF, see the descriptions of faults unique to machines equipped with ADF functions. Likewise, if a malfunction occurs while
printing from a PC or a fax communication, see its respective section (those unique to printer functions or those unique to fax functions).
13.1.8 Making Checks in Response to an Image Fault

0006-3265
When you have indicated an image fault using the troubleshooting flow chart, go through
the following before starting troubleshooting work that follows:
Checking the Originals Against the Symptom

Determine whether the fault is caused by the machine or the original:
a. The copy density is best set to index 5 -/+ 2.
b. Originals with a bluish background tend to cause poor contrast; e.g., blue sheet, receipts.
c. The density of the original affects its copies: e.g., a diazo copy original or an original with a high transparency can produce output that can be mistaken for
"foggy copies," while originals prepared in light pencil can produce output that can be mistaken for "light" copies.
Copyboard Glass and White Sheet
If the copyboard glass or the white sheet is soiled, wipe it with a moist cloth and then dry wipe it. If the dirt is excessive, use alcohol and lint-free paper. If there
are scratches, replace it.
13.1.9 Checking the Photointerrupters

0007-3728
Use 'SENSOR' under 'TEST MODE' in service mode to check photointerrupters as follows:
2) Press the Left/Right Arrow key so that 'TEST MODE' is indicated.
3) Press '6' on the keypad so that '6: FACULTY TEST' is indicated.
4) Press '3' on the keypad to start sensor check mode, in which the following screen appears:
13-2
Chapter 13
6-3:SENSOR
[1] - - - [4]
F-13-2
5) When the screen shown in the foregoing figure is displayed, press '1', '2', '3', or '4' to bring up the State screen of a specific sensor. For instance, when '1' is pressed,
the following will be true:
Sensor name
Present state
of the sensor
DS of DES of DDS of
CRG on DCVS on
Present state
of the sensor
Sensor name
‘DS of’ indicates that the original sensor (DS) of the ADF is OFF.
F-13-3
6) Move the flag of the sensor to see that the indication alternates between 'of' and 'on'to indicate that the sensor is going OFF and ON.
On the next page, the screens that appear when '1' through '4' are pressed are shown together with the sensor names and the sensor states when the machine is
in standby state.
6-3:SENOR
[1] - - - [4]
Press '1' on the keypad.
DS of DES of DDS of
CRG on DCVS on
DS: original sensor*1 (PS6); 'on' if present, 'of' if absent.

DES: registration sensor*1 (PS7); 'on' if present, 'of' if absent.
DDS: original delivery sensor*1(PS8);'on' if present, 'of' if absent.
CRG: not used
DCVS: Reader unit slide detecting switch (SW1) and toner supply cover open/closed detecting switch (SW2):
'on' reader unit in position and toner supply cover closed
'of' reader unit not in position or toner supply cover open
*1: indicates the state of a specific sensor of the ADF.

HPS on BCVS of
TBS on WTS of
HPS: contact sensor home position sensor (PS1):

'on' contact sensor in home position,
'of' contact sensor not in home position.
BCVS: ADF (copyboard cover) open/close sensor (PS2); 'on' cover open, 'of' cover closed.
TBS: toner bottle sensor (PS11):
'on' toner bottle fitted,
'of' toner bottle not fitted (cartridge not fitted).
WTS: waste toner full sensor (PS12):
'on' if present, 'of' if absent.

CT1 on A4
CT1: cassette paper sensor (P103); 'on' paper present, 'of' paper absent.

MLT on A4 TN on
JAM of
MLT:manual feed tray paper sensor (PS4); 'on' paper present, 'of' paper absent.
TN: not used.
JAM: not used.
F-13-4
The paper leading edge sensor (PS102), LGL paper sensor (PS101), and delivery sensor (PS3) cannot be checked by running a sensor test.
13-3
Chapter 13
13.2 Outline of Electrical Components
13.2.1 Clutch/Solenoid
13.2.1.1 Body
0006-3490
FM1
M1
M2
M4
SL1
SL2
F-13-5
13.2.1.2 ADF
0006-3492
M3
F-13-6
T-13-1
Solenoids, Motors, and Fans
Symbol Name Notation Description
Solenoid SL1 manual feed pickup roller drive

SL
SL2 cassette pickup roller drive
13-4
Chapter 13
Solenoids, Motors, and Fans
Motor M1 main motor

M
M2 reader motor
M3 ADF motor (if equipped with ADF functions)
M4 laser scanner motor
Fan FM1 fan
13.2.2 Sensor
13.2.2.1 Body
0006-3496
PS2
PS1
PS10
PS3
PS101 PS4
PS103
PS11
PS102
F-13-7
13.2.2.2 ADF
0006-3497
PS7 PS8
PS6
F-13-8
13-5
Chapter 13
T-13-2
Sensors
Photointerrupters PS1 constant sensor home position detection
PS2 ADF (copyboard cover) open/close

detection
PS3 delivery detection
PS4 manual feed tray paper detection
PS6 original detection (if equipped with ADF

functions)
PS7 ADF registration paper detection

(if equipped with ADF functions)
PS8 original delivery detection (if
equipped with ADF functions)
PS10 waste toner casing full detection
PS11 toner bottle set detection
PS101 LGL paper detection
PS102 paper leading edge detection
PS103 cassette paper detection
13.2.3 Lamps, Heaters, and Others
13.2.3.1 Others
0006-3499
SW1
TH2
SP1 TH1
FU2
H1
SW2
HS
F-13-9
13-6
Chapter 13
T-13-3
Others
Switch SW1 reader unit slide detecting
SW2 toner supply cover open/close detecting
Humidity HS humidity check
sensor
Heater H1 fixing heater
Thermistor TH1 fixing main thermistor (fixing assembly center

temperature detection)
TH2 fixing sub thermistor (fixing assembly end temperature

detection)
Thermal fuse FU2 Fixing heater error temperature detection
Speaker SP1 speaker*1
13.2.4 PCBs
13.2.4.1 PCBs
0006-3507
[4]
[5]
[3]
[6]
[2]
[7]
[9]
[8]
[1]
F-13-10
13-7
Chapter 13
[12]
[10]
[11]
[13]
F-13-11
T-13-4
PCBs
Ref. Name Description
1 Image processor PCB image processing control
2 DC controller PCB DC load control
3 Analog processor PCB contact sensor drive, analog image processing
4 Control panel PCB control panel control
5 Sensor PCB ADF (copyboard cover) open/close detection, contact

sensor home position detection
6 Power supply PCB low-voltage power supply control
7 Printer controller PCB computer combination control
8 NCU PCB*1 fax communication control
9 Modular jack PCB*1 telephone line connection
10 Laser scanner motor driver laser scanner motor drive
11 Laser driver BD PCB laser drive, laser beam detection
12 Main motor driver main motor drive
13-8
Chapter 13
PCBs
Ref. Name Description
13 Sensor relay PCB Relay between the humidity sensor/the toner bottle sensor
and the DC controller PCB
*1: If equipped with ADF functions.
13.2.5 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB
13.2.5.1 Variable Resistors, Light Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB
0006-3509
Of the VRs, LEDs, and check pins used in the machine, those needed when servicing in the field are discussed:
1. Some LEDs emit dim light even when OFF; this is a normal condition, and must be kept in mind.
2. VRs that may be used in the field:
VRs that must not be used in the field:
Do not touch the VRs and check pins not found in the lists herein; they are exclusively for the factory, and require special tools and high accuracy.
13-9
Chapter 14 Self Diagnosis
Contents
Contents
14.1 Error Code Table........................................................................................................................................................14-1

14.1.1 Troubleshooting Malfunctions (service error) ......................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.2 FAX Error Codes .......................................................................................................................................................14-5
14.2.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-5
14.2.1.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................14-5
14.2.1.2 Error Codes .................................................................................................................................................................................................14-5
14.2.1.3 How to Record the Protocol ........................................................................................................................................................................14-6
14.2.2 User Error Code ....................................................................................................................................................................... 14-7
14.2.2.1 Causes and Remedies for User Error Codes ...............................................................................................................................................14-7
14.2.3 Service Error Code................................................................................................................................................................. 14-12
14.2.3.1 Causes and Remedies for Service Error Codes.........................................................................................................................................14-12
14.2.3.2 Common Faults .........................................................................................................................................................................................14-37
Chapter 14
14.1 Error Code Table
14.1.1 Troubleshooting Malfunctions (service error)

0006-3271
T-14-1
E000
The error history indicates any of the following error codes 4 times: E001, E002, E003.
Action 1) Clear the error.
Execute '#4 PRINTER RESET" under '#7 PRINTER' in service mode to clear the error.; then, turn
back on the power.
T-14-2
E001
000 The main thermistor detects 230 deg C/446 deg F or higher for 1 sec or more.
001 The sub thermistor detects 300 deg C/572 deg F or higher for 0.2 sec or more.
Main cause The fixing film unit is faulty (thermistor short circuit). The power supply PCB is faulty. The
DC controller PCB is faulty.
Action 1. Malfunction
Turn off the power; wait for 10 min, and turn it on. Is the problem cor-rected?
YES: End.
2. Fixing film unit
Check the connector (4-pin) of the thermistor for electrical continuity: 1-2 and 3-4. Is it 0
ohm?
YES: Replace the fixing film unit.
3. Power supply PCB, DC controller PCB
Try replacing the power supply PCB. Is the problem corrected?
NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
14-1
Chapter 14
T-14-3
E002
000 During printing, the main thermistor detects 0 deg C/32 deg F or lower for 1 sec
or more continuously.
About 10 sec or later after power-on/start of printing, the main thermistor detects
less than 120 deg C/248 deg F for 1 sec or more con-tinuously.
After power-on/start of printing, the reading of the main thermistor does not reach
the target value -15 deg C/11 deg F or higher within 75 sec.
001 About 10 sec or later after the heater is supplied with power, the sub thermistor
detects less than 75 deg C/167°F for 2 sec or more con-tinuously.
Main cause The fixing film unit is faulty (main thermistor fault, sub thermistor fault, thermal fuse blow,
fixing heater fault). The power supply PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Action See the descriptions for E003.
T-14-4
E003
During printing, the main thermistor detects less than 120 deg C/248 deg F for 1 sec or more
continuously.
Main cause The fixing film unit is faulty (main thermistor fault, thermal fuse blow, fixing
heater fault). The power supply PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB
is faulty.
14-2
Chapter 14
Action 1. Malfunction
Turn off the power; wait for 10 min, and turn on the power. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
2. Wiring
Is the wiring from the DC controller PCB to the fixing film unit normal?
NO: Correct the wiring.
3. Fixing film unit
Try replacing the fixing film unit. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4. Power supply PCB, DC controller PCB
Try replacing the power supply PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
T-14-5
E100
About 1.5 sec after the scanner drive signal output, the BDI* signal is not detected 3 times
or more for 1.0 sec.
While the laser is ON, the BD signal cycle is not as indicated for 0.5 or more continuously.
Main cause The laser driver/BD PCB is faulty (laser activation failure, BD detection fault). The DC
controller PCB is faulty. The image processor PCB is faulty.
Action 1. Wiring
Is the wiring from the DC controller PCB to the laser scanner unit normal?
NO: Correct the wiring
2. Laser scanner unit
Try replacing the laser scanner unit. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
3. DC controller PCB, Image processor PCB Try replacing the DC controller PCB. Is the
problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Replace the image processor PCB.
14-3
Chapter 14
T-14-6
E110
The scanner fails to reach the target speed of rotation 10 sec after the laser scanner motor
reaches constant speed state.
Main cause The laser scanner motor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Action 1. Laser scanner unit, DC controller PCB

Try replacing the laser scanner unit. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
T-14-7
E805
While the fan is rotating, fan lock state is detected for 10 sec or more con-tinuously.
Main cause The fan is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The image processor PCB is faulty.
Action 1. Foreign matter

Is there any foreign matter that hinders the rotation of the heat discharge fan?
YES: Remove the foreign matter.
2. Wiring, Connection
Are the wiring and connection (connectors) of the fan normal?
NO: Correct them.
3. Fan
Try replacing the fan. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4. DC controller PCB/Image processors PCB
Try replacing the DC controller PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Replace the image processor PCB.
T-14-8
E810
14-4
Chapter 14
The case that the toner bottle is detected, but not the cartridge.
Main cause The DC controller PCB is faulty. The cartridge is faulty.
Action 1. High-voltage contact (between machine and the developing unit) Is the high-voltage
spring used to supply high voltage to the developing unit soild?
YES: Clean it.
2. High-voltage contact (between high-voltage spring and DC controller PCB; J207) Is the
connection between the high-voltage spring and the DC controller PCB(J207) normal?
NO: Correct the connection.. If the problem cannot be corrected, re-place the faulty part.
3. Developing unit, DC controller PCB
Replace the developing unit. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
14.2 FAX Error Codes
14.2.1 Outline
14.2.1.1 Outline
0006-3503
If '1' is set to service data #1 SSSW SW01 bit 0, an appropriate service error code will be indicated on the following reports if a communication ends in error:
communication control report, reception result report, error transmission report.
When an error occurs, you can generate a system dump list in service mode to check the code.
14.2.1.2 Error Codes

0006-3504
The error codes used in the machine are defined as follows:

1Transmission Level (ATT): No.07 of Service Soft Switch #2 MENU
- Increase the transmission level:
Increase the setting so that it is closer to 0 dBm. (At 0 dBm, the LCD indicates '0'.)
- Decrease the transmission level:
Decrease the setting so that it is closer to -15 dBm. (At -15 dBm, the LCD indicates '15'.)
NL Equalizer: No.05 of Service Soft Switch #2 MENU
- Adjust the NL equalizer:
Select 'ON'.
Transmission Page Timer: SW12 of Service Soft Switch #1 SSSW
- Increase the page timer setting:
To set both transmission and reception to the same time-out length, set SW12 as fol-lows:
8 min: bit 7, bit 1, bit 0 = 0, 0, 0
16 min: bit 7, bit 1, bit 0 = 0, 0, 1
32 min: bit 7, bit 1, bit 0 = 0, 1, 0
64 min: bit 7, bit 1, bit 0 = 0, 1, 1
If you want to set transmission and reception to different time-out lengths, or use differ-ent time-out lengths according to different image modes, you will have
to set all bits (from 7 through 0) accordingly.
Timer: No.10 of Service Soft Switch #3 NUMERIC param.
- Increase the T0 timer setting:
Increase the setting of No.10.
The T0 timer is used to set the period of time in which a line connection is recognized for transmission, i.e., in which the machine waits for a significant signal
from the other party after dialing. The line will be disconnected if no significant signal is received during the period.
Timer: No.11 of Service Soft Switch #3 NUMERIC param.
- Increase the T1 timer setting:
Increase the setting of No.11.
The T1 timer is used to set the period of time in which a line connection is recognized for reception, i.e., in which the machine waits for a significant signal from
the other party after transmission of DIS. The line will be disconnected if no significant signal is received during the period.
RTN Signal Transmission Condition: No. 02, 03, and 04 of Service Soft Switch #3 NUMERIC param.
- Loosen the RTN signal transmission condition:
14-5
Chapter 14
Increase the settings of No.02, 03, and 04.

No.02 is used to set the ratio of the number of error lines to the total number of lines per page (1% to 99%).
No.03 is used to set the burst error (number of successive error lines identified as an er-rors) ; (2 to 99 lines).
No.04 is used to set the number of errors falling short of a burst error (1 to 99 times).
Echo Remedy
- An echo remedy may be provided on the reception side as follows:
Echo Remedy 1 (by the receiving machine; adds a 1080-Hz tonal signal before transmission of CED):
Set SW03 bit 7 of service soft switch #1 SSSW to '1' so that a 1080-Hz tonal signal is transmitted before transmission of CED.
Echo Remedy 2 (by the receiving machine; changes the period in which the low speed signal is ignored after transmission of CFR):
Set SW04 bit 4 of service soft switch #1 SSSW to '1' so that the period in which the low speed signal is ignored after transmission of CFR is changed from 700
to 1500 msec.
Echo Protect Tone: SW03 bit 1 of Service Soft Switch #1 SSSW
- Add an echo protect tone to the V.29 modem signal for transmission:
When SW03 bit 1 is set to '1', an echo protect tone will be added to high-speed trans-mission V.29 (at 9600 or 7200 bps) for transmission.
9Number of Final Flag Sequences: SW04 bit 2 of Service Soft Switch #1 SSSW
- Increase the number of final flag sequences:
When SW04 bit 2 is set to '1', the number of final flag sequences will be increased from 1 to 2 for a procedure signal (transmitted at 300 bps).
Subaddress
A subaddress is used to indicate the location of a memory box in the other party (e.g., confidential mailbox, polling box), and it consists of 20 or fewer characters
(numerals, *, #, space). As log as the other party complies with the International Standards of ITU-T, the machine can communicate with it by means of subaddress-
es.
At times, an ID number (referred to as a "password") is used to restrict access to a loca-tion indicated by a subaddress.
With some models, polling based on subaddresses is called "selective polling", and a subaddress used at time of polling is called a "selective polling address".
Password
A password used by a Canon facsimile machine may be any of the following: Password for Subaddress Communications: This is an ID number used for a subaddress
communication and, as in the case of a subaddress, it consists of 20 or fewer characters (numerals, *, #, space).
Communication Password:
This is an ID number used for a password communication. Some models use 4 decimal characters (0000 through 9999), while some use 3 decimal characters (000
through 255).
MEMO:
Password Used When Making Settings:
A password may also be used for memory lock Rx, call restriction, and Memo other functions. Such a password consists of 4 decimal characters (0000 through
9999), and it is important to remember that these passwords are used inside the machine and are not intended for communication proce-dures.
Signals
Tonal Signal:
A tonal signal consists of sinusoidal waves of a specific frequency, and may be thought of as a sound carrying a meaning. CNG, CED, and ANSam are tonal signals.
Binary Signal:
A binary signal is used to indicate the meaning of a procedure. It is either '1' or '0', modulated according to frequency, and is used as G3 procedure signals.
Procedure Signal:
It is a generic term for a tonal signal and a binary signal.
Preamble:
It is a signal attached to the beginning of a binary signal, and is used to synchronize mo-dem signals for a procedure signal.
Image Signal:
Of procedure signals, it is used for actual transmission of image data.
Significant Signal:
It is a signal whose significance can be understood by a facsimile machine that receives it, and it is free of a transmission error.
Timer
T0 Timer:
It indicates the period of time in which a line connection is recognized during transmis-sion; specifically, the machine waits for a significant signal from the other
party after dial-ing.
T1 Timer:
It indicates the period of time in which a line connection is recognized during reception; specifically, the machine waits for a significant signal from the together
party after trans-mission of DIS.
T5 Timer:
It is the period of time in which RR/RNR is transmitted during an ECM communication.
14.2.1.3 How to Record the Protocol

0006-3530
If you are instructed to "record the communication procedure sound on a DAT or MD, and ask the Technical Center for analysis", refer to the following diagram
for a generally used method of connection:
14-6
Chapter 14
FAX
Telephone line
FAX TELLINE
G3 Recording Adaptor
LINE
DAT recorder
or
MD recorder LINE IN
Use Standard (SP) mode for recording.

Set the recording level so that the sound of communication
can clearly be heard with as little noise as possible when replayed.
F-14-1
14.2.2 User Error Code
14.2.2.1 Causes and Remedies for User Error Codes

0006-3508
T-14-9
#001 [TX] Document has jammed
Cause: The original is trapped in the feeder
Remedy: Remove the document, and try again.
Cause: The original is not of a standard size or thickness.
Remedy: 1. Make a copy on A4/LTR paper in book mode, and transmit the output.
2. If the original is too thin or too small, transmit it in book mode.
Cause: Internal Fault

Remedy: 1. Check the connection of the DS sensor (original sensor), DES sensor (registration
sensor), and image processor PCB.
2. Check the following to see if they operate normally: DS sensor (original sensor), DES
senor (registration sensor).
3. Replace the DS sensor (original sensor) and the DES sensor (registration sensor).
4. Check the connection between the ADF motor and the image processor PCB.
5. Make copies to find out if the ADF motor is operating normally.
6. Replace the image processor PCB.
T-14-10
#003 [TX/RX] Document is too long, or page time-over
Cause: The length of a single page is too long.
Remedy: Make copies in book mode, and transmit the original in several divisions.
Cause: The data of a single page is too large, exceeding the time allowed for transmission.
14-7
Chapter 14
#003 [TX/RX] Document is too long, or page time-over
Remedy: 1. Decrease the reading resolution when transmitting.
2. If the original is too long and, thus, results in a large amount of data, make copies in
book mode, and transmit the original in several divisions.
3. If halftone transmission is used, the original is of a default size, and the data is too
large, increase the setting of the page timer.
Cause: The data of a single page is too large, exceeding the time allowed for reception.
Remedy: 1. Ask the operator of the other party to decrease the reading resolution and transmit.
2. Ask the operator of the other party to divide the original and transmit.
3. Increase the setting of the page timer.
4. Ask the operator of the other party to find out the cause.
Cause: An internal mechanism is faulty.
Remedy: 1. Check the connection of the DES sensor (registration sensor) and image processor
PCB.
2. Check the following to see if they operate normally: DES senor (registration sensor).
3. Replace the DES sensor (registration sensor).
4. Check the connection between the ADF motor and the image processor PCB.
5. Make copies to find out if the ADF motor is operating normally.
T-14-11
#005 [TX/RX] Initial identification (T0/T1) time-over
Cause: The tone/pulse setting is wrong.
Remedy: Make the correct tone/pulse setting.

Cause: The time it takes to connect to the other party's line is too long.
Remedy: 1. When registering an auto-dial number, put a relatively long pause after the telephone
number to delay the T0 timer start mechanism.
2. In service mode, increase the T0 timer length using '10' of #3 Numeric param.
so that a time-cover condition will not occur. (for transmission)
3. In service mode, increase the T1 timer length using '11' of #3 Numeric param.
so that a time-over condition will not occur. (for reception)
Cause: The other party does not respond.
Remedy: Contact the operator of the other party, and find out the cause.
Cause: The other party's communication mode (G2, G3, etc.) does not match.
Remedy: The communication mode depends on each specific model, and no remedy can be
offered.
Cause: During transmission, the other party malfunctioned because of an echo.
Remedy: 1. Using a manual call, press the Start button after hearing the 1st DIS from the other
party.
14-8
Chapter 14
#005 [TX/RX] Initial identification (T0/T1) time-over
2. To prevent response to the 1st DIS from the other party, put a relatively long pause to
the telephone number when registering an auto-dial number.
3. Ask the operator of the other party to provide echo remedy 1.
4. Ask the operator of the other party to decrease the transmission level.
Cause: During reception, the machine malfunctioned because of an echo.
Remedy: Provide echo remedy 1.
T-14-12
#009 [RX] Paper has jammed or the paper has run out
Cause: The paper has run out.
Remedy: Set new paper.
Cause: A paper jam has occurred.
Remedy: Remove the paper jam.
T-14-13
#011 [RX] Polling reception error
Cause: There is no original in the other party.
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other party to set the original correctly.
Cause: Transmission was attempted, and polling reception was started because the document was not
set correctly.
Remedy: Set the original correctly to transmit.
T-14-14
#012 [TX] The other party has run out of paper
Cause: The other party has run out of paper.
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other party to set paper.
T-14-15
#018 [TX] Auto dialing transmission error
Cause: The tone/pulse setting is wrong.
Remedy: Make the correct tone/pulse setting.
Cause: The connection time for the line is too long.
Remedy: 1. When registering an auto-dial number, put a relatively long pause at the end of the telephone
number to delay the start of the T0 timer.
2. Increase the T0 timer setting to prevent a time-over condition.
Cause: The line of the other party was engaged.
Remedy: Start a call once again.
Cause: The other party is not connected to the line, or is not turned on so that the transmission did not
arrive.
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other party to find out the cause.
Cause: The other party is not a facsimile machine.
14-9
Chapter 14
#018 [TX] Auto dialing transmission error
Remedy: Check the number of the other party, and start a call once again.
Cause: The other party ran out of paper so that the line was disconnected during the preprocedure.
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other machine to set paper.

Cause: The machine was disconnected from the line using an unidentified reason code.
Remedy: 1. Wait for a while, and start a call once again.
2. Check to make sure that the other party is tuned on.
Cause: 1. The other party did not respond.
2. The other party is out of order.
3. The other party is out of use for some reason.
4. The exchange is congested.
5. There is no line/channel that is available at present.
6. The requested line/channel cannot be used on the side of the other party.
7. Calls crashed.
8. Communication is not possible at present by reason of terminal management.
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other party to find out the cause.
T-14-16
#021 [RX] The other party has rejected the machine during polling reception
Cause: When starting a call, a subaddress, or a subaddress and a password, was not specified.
Remedy: Specify a subaddress, or a subaddress and a password, when starting a call.
T-14-17
#022 [TX] Call fails
Cause: The data for an auto-dial number used when selecting a party was deleted.
Remedy: Register the telephone number of the other party as an auto-dial number, and transmit once
again.
T-14-18
#025 [TX/RX] Auto-dial setting is wrong
Cause: The settings require registration of a subaddress for auto-dialing; however, a call was
attempted without registering a subaddress.
Remedy: If auto-dialing is of a type requiring registration of a subaddress, register a subaddress.
14-10
Chapter 14
T-14-19
#037 [RX] Memory has overflowed when receiving images
Cause: The image memory overflowed during reception.
Remedy: Delete image data that is no longer needed, and ask the operator of the other party to transmit
once again.
T-14-20
#059 [TX] Dialed number and the connected number (CSI) do not match
Cause: The user telephone number is not registered correctly on the receiving side.
Remedy: 1. Ask the operator of the receiving side to register the user telephone number correctly.
2. Use manual transmission; then, after making sure that a connection has been made, transmit
once again.
Cause: The exchange malfunctioned, and the machine is not connected to the dialed party.
Remedy: Have the exchange checked.
T-14-21
#080 [TX] The other party is not equipped with an ITU-T-compliant subaddress reception function
Cause: Bit 49 of DIS received from the other party is '0'.
Remedy: 1. Transmit to a fax machine equipped with a subaddress function.
2. Use normal G3 transmission.
T-14-22
#081 [TX] The other party is not equipped with an ITU-T-compliant password reception function
Remedy: 1. Transmit to a fax machine equipped with a password function.
2. Use subaddress transmission that does not use a password.
3. Use normal G3 transmission.
T-14-23
#082 [RX] The other party is not equipped with an ITU-T-compliant selective polling transmission
function
Remedy: Ask the operator to set normal polling transmission, and use polling reception.
14-11
Chapter 14
T-14-24
#083 [RX] Selective polling address or the password does not match during ITU-T-compliant
selective polling reception
Cause: The selective polling address or the password of the machine does not match that of the other
machine.
Remedy: Match the selective polling address and the password of the machine with that of the other party.
T-14-25
#084 [RX] The other party is not equipped with a password function for ITU-Tcompliant selective
polling reception
Cause: Bit 50 of DIS received from the other party is '0'. Cause:
Remedy: Use selective polling that does not use a password.
T-14-26
#995 [TX/RX] Memory transmission reservation clear/memory reception image clear
Cause: In the case of transmission, the user canceled the memory transmission reservation.
Remedy: Transmit once again.
Cause: In the case of reception, the user deleted the image that had been received in memory
reception.
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other party to transmit once again.
14.2.3 Service Error Code
14.2.3.1 Causes and Remedies for Service Error Codes

0006-3533
The causes and remedies for service error codes are as follows:
T-14-27
##100 [TX] The number allowed for retransmission of the procedure signal was exceeded
during transmission
Cause: The transmission level is too low, and the other party cannot receive NSS, TSI, DCS,
TCF, or the training signal correctly.
Remedy: Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive the signal correctly.
Cause: After transmission of TCF immediately before the image signal, the other party
malfunctioned because of an echo.
Remedy: 1. Ask the operator of the other party to provide echo remedy 2
2. Using a manual call, press the Start button after hearing the 1st DIS from the other
party.
3. To prevent response to the 1st DIS from the other party, put a relatively long pause
to the telephone number when registering an auto dialing number.
14-12
Chapter 14
##100 [TX] The number allowed for retransmission of the procedure signal was exceeded
during transmission
Cause: After transmission of the Q signal following the image signal, the line condition became
poor so that the other party cannot receive the image signal or the Q signal correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may service the image signal
or the Q signal correctly.
2. Decrease the transmission start speed.
3. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive the image signal or the
Q signal correctly.
4. Add an echo protect tone to the V.29 modem signal for transmission.
5. Increase the number of final flag sequences for the procedure signal so that the other
party may receive the procedure signal correctly.
T-14-28
##101 [TX/RX] The modem speed of the machine does not match that of the other party
Cause: The modem speed of the machine does not match that of the other machine.
Remedy: The modem speed is part of machine specifications, and there is no remedy.
Cause: In the case of transmission, the speed for fallback does not match that of the other party.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive TCF correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive TCF correctly.
3. Provide echo remedy 1.
4. Using a manual call, press the Start button after hearing the 1st DIS from the other
party.
to the telephone number when registering an auto-dialing number.
6. Ask the operator of the other party to decrease the transmission level so that the other
party will not receive an echo.
T-14-29
##102 [TX] Fallback is not possible
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive TCF correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive TCF correctly.
Cause: An echo has caused a malfunction.
party.
14-13
Chapter 14
T-14-30
##103 [RX] EOL cannot be detected for 5 sec (15 sec if CBT)
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the image signal cannot be received correctly.
Remedy: 1. Ask the operator of the other party to increase the transmission level so that the image
signal may be received correctly.
2. Ask the operator of the other party to decrease the transmission start speed.
3. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the image signal may be received correctly.
Cause: The machine malfunctioned because of an echo of CFR.
Remedy: 1. Provide echo remedy 2.

2. Decrease the transmission level so that an echo of transmitted CFR will not be
received.
T-14-31
##104 [TX] RTN or PIN has been received
Cause: The line condition is poor so that the other party cannot receive the image
signalÅ@correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive the
imageÅ@signal correctly.

3. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive the image
signalÅ@correctly.
5. Ask the operator of the other party to loosen the RTN transmission conditions so that
the other party will not transmit RTN.
Cause: The machine malfunctioned because of an echo.
Remedy: 1. Using a manual call, press the Start button after hearing the 1st DIS from theÅ@other
party.
2. To prevent response to the 1st DIS from the other party, put a relatively longÅ@pause
4. Ask the operator of the other party to decrease the transmission level so that
theÅ@other party will not receive an echo.
T-14-32
##106 [RX] The procedure signal cannot be received for 6 sec while in wait
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the procedure signal from the other party cannot be
received correctly.
14-14
Chapter 14
##106 [RX] The procedure signal cannot be received for 6 sec while in wait
Remedy: 1. Ask the operator of the other party to increase the transmission level so that the
procedure signal may be received correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the procedure signal may be received correctly.
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive the signal.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive the signal
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive the signal correctly.

2. Decrease the transmission level so that an echo of transmitted signal will not be
received.
T-14-33
##107 [RX] The transmitting machine cannot use fall-back
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the signal from the other party cannot be received
correctly even at 2400 bps.
Remedy: 1. Ask the operator of the other party to increase the transmission level so that the signal
may be received correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the signal may be received correctly.
3. Loosen the RTN transmission conditions so that RTN will not be transmitted.

2. Decrease the transmission level so that an echo of the transmitted signal will not be
received.
T-14-34
##109 [TX] After transmitting DCS, a signal other than DIS, DTC, FTT, CFR, and CRP was
received, exceeding the permitted number of transmissions of the procedure signal
Cause: The procedure signal is faulty.
Remedy: Record the protocol on a DAT or MD, and have it analyzed by the local Canon office
and/or Technical Center.
T-14-35
##111 [TX/RX] Memory error
Cause: While printing data stored in the image memory, the effects of noise caused a data error.
Remedy: Print out all image data and system data, and execute all-clear; then, store the system
data once again.
Cause: Noise started wrong dialing.
14-15
Chapter 14
##111 [TX/RX] Memory error
Remedy: Replace the image processor PCB.
T-14-36
##114 [RX] RTN was transmitted
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the image signal from the other party cannot be received
correctly.
Cause: The machine malfunctioned because of an echo of CFR.

received.
T-14-37
##200 [RX] During image reception, a carrier is not detected for 5 sec
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the image signal cannot be received.
Cause: The training signal cannot be received because of an echo of CFR, causing a timeover
condition.

received.
T-14-38
##201[TX/RX] DCN was received through a non-normal procedure
Cause: The other party is not ready for reception (e.g., out of paper).
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other party to set the machine for reception (as by
settingÅ@paper).
Cause: The user telephone number has not been registered (if the receiving machine is
aÅ@RICOH 3000L).
Remedy: Register the user telephone number.
Cause: In polling transmission, document is not placed.
Remedy: Place a document, and ask the operator of the other party to make a call onceÅ@again.
14-16
Chapter 14
##201[TX/RX] DCN was received through a non-normal procedure
Cause: The other party transmitted, but there is no paper.
Remedy: Set paper.
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive the procedure
signalÅ@correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive the
procedureÅ@signal correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive the procedure signal
correctly.
Remedy: 1. Provide echo remedies 1 or 2.
2. Decrease the transmission level so that an echo will not be received.
Cause: The image signal or the Q signal cannot be received, and the other party sufferedÅ@an
excess number of re-transmissions of the procedure signal.
Remedy: 1. Ask the operator of the other party to increase the transmission level so that
theÅ@signal may be received correctly.
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party (transmitting machine) cannot
useÅ@fall-back.
Remedy: 1. Ask the operator of the other party to increase the transmission level so that
theÅ@signal may be received correctly.
T-14-39
##220 [TX/RX] System error (e.g., main program may have gone away)
Cause: Noise caused the CPU to malfunction.
Remedy: Turn off and then on the power.
14-17
Chapter 14
T-14-40
##223 [TX] The line was disconnected during communication
Cause: The Stop button was pressed during image transmission.
T-14-41
##224 [TX/RX] Fault occurred in the communication procedure signal
Cause: The original on the transmitting party is not correctly fed, forcing polling mode to start
(i.e., DCN was received in response to DIS).
Remedy: 1. Check to make user that the original is placed correctly.

2. If the feeding roller is worn, replace it.
Cause: In a memory full condition, a call arrived when a original was set (i.e., DCN was
received in response to DIS).
Remedy: If any image received in memory reception remains in the memory, print out the image
and empty the memory. Also, avoid leaving a original in the copyboad glass unless the
machine is in transmission mode.
T-14-42
##229 [RX] The recording system became locked for 1 min
Cause: Not identified.
Remedy: Correct the locking, and press the Start button to print out the image.
T-14-43
##232 [TX] The unit used to control the encoder is faulty
Cause: The operation of the IC used to control the encoder did not end normally.
T-14-44
##237 [RX] The IC used to control the decoder malfunctioned
Cause: The operation of the IC used to control the decoder did not end normally.
14-18
Chapter 14
##237 [RX] The IC used to control the decoder malfunctioned
T-14-45
##238 [RX] The unit used to control recording malfunctioned
Cause: The operation of the IC used to control recording did not end normally.
Remedy: Replace the DC controller PCB.
T-14-46
##261 [TX/RX] System error occurred between the modem and system control board
Cause: An internal unit is faulty (when RS is set to '1', CS fails to go '1').
Remedy: Replace the image processor PCB. (faulty modem)
T-14-47
##280 [TX] The number of re-transmissions of the procedure signal has been exceeded
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the appropriate signal from the other party cannot be
received correctly after transmission of TCF.
2. Ask the other party to increase the transmission level so that the appropriate signal
Cause: The other party malfunctioned because of an echo.
party.
Cause: The telephone line has a faulty connection.
Remedy: Check to see that the telephone line is connected correctly.
Cause: During a communication, the telephone line was disconnected.
14-19
Chapter 14
Remedy: Avoid disconnecting the telephone line while a communication is under way.
T-14-48
received correctly after transmission of EOP.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOP correctly.
3. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOP correctly.
5. Ask the operator of the other party to increase the transmission level so that the
appropriate signal may be received correctly.
T-14-49
received correctly after transmission of EOM.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOM correctly.
3. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOM correctly.
T-14-50
received correctly after transmission of MPS.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive MPS correctly.
3. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive MPS correctly.
14-20
Chapter 14
T-14-51
##284 [TX] DCN has been received after transmission of TCF
Cause: The other party is not ready for reception (e.g., out of paper).
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other party to set the machine for reception (as by setting paper).
Cause: The user telephone number has not been registered (if the receiving machine is a
RICOH 3000L).
Remedy: Register the user telephone number.
Cause: The other party cannot receive TCF correctly.
Remedy: Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive TCF correctly.
party.
T-14-52
##285 [TX] DCN has been received after transmitting EOP
Cause: The Stop button was pressed during a communication.
T-14-53
##286 [TX] DCN has been received after transmitting EOM
T-14-54
##287 [TX] DCN has been received after transmitting MPS
14-21
Chapter 14
T-14-55
##288 [TX] After transmitting EOP, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN was
received
Cause: The procedure signal has a fault.
T-14-56
##289 [TX] After transmitting EOM, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN was
received
T-14-57
After transmitting MPS, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN was
##290 [TX]
received
T-14-58
##670 [TX] In V.8 late start, the V.8 ability was detected in DIS from the other party and, in
response, CI was transmitted; however, the procedure failed to advance, causing
a T1 time-over condition
Cause: CI was transmitted, but the other party failed to receive it correctly and disconnect the
line.
Remedy: (1) Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive CI correctly.
(2) Prohibit the V.8/V.34 procedure.
Cause: ANSam or DIS from the other party cannot be received correctly.
Remedy: (1) Ask the operator of the other party to increase the transmission level so that the
14-22
Chapter 14
T-14-59
##671 [RX] In V.8 call arrives, the procedure fails to advance to phase 2 after CM detection,
causing a T1 time-over condition
Cause: In phase 1, the other party cannot receive the signal correctly and disconnect the line.
Remedy: (1) Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive the signal
correctly.
Cause: In phase 1, the signal from the other party cannot be received correctly.
T-14-60
##672 [TX] In V.34 transmission, the procedure fails to move from phase 2 to phase 3 and
later, causing a T1 time-over condition
Cause: In phase 2, the other party cannot receive the signal correctly, and disconnect the line.
correctly.
(2) Prohibit the V8./V.34 procedure.
T-14-61
##673 [RX] In V.34 reception, the procedure fails to move from phase 2 to
phase 3 and later, causing a T1 time-over condition
Cause: In phase 2, the other party cannot receive the signal correctly, and disconnect the line.
correctly.
14-23
Chapter 14
T-14-62
##674 [TX] In V.34 transmission, the procedure fails to move from phase 3 or phase 4 to a
control channel or later, causing a T1 time-over condition
Cause: In phase 3 or phase 4, the other party cannot receive the signal correctly, and disconnect
the line.
correctly.
Cause: In phase 3 or phase 4, the signal from the other party cannot be received correctly.
T-14-63
##675 [RX] In V.34 reception, the procedure fails to move from phase 3 or phase 4 to a control
channel or later, causing a T1 time-over condition
Cause: In phase 3 or phase 4, the other party cannot receive the signal correctly, and disconnect
the line.
correctly.
Cause: In phase 3 or phase 4, the signal from the other party cannot be received correctly.
T-14-64
##750 [TX] In ECM transmission, no significant signal can be received after transmission of
PPS-NULL, and the allowed number of procedure signal re-transmissions was
exceeded
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive PPS-NULL correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive PPS-NULL
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive PPS-NULL correctly.
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the significant signal cannot be received correctly.
14-24
Chapter 14
PPS-NULL, and the allowed number of procedure signal re-transmissions was
exceeded
Remedy: Ask the operator of the other party to increase the transmission level so that the signal
T-14-65
##752 [TX] In ECM transmission, DCN was received after transmission of PPS-NULL
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive PPS-NULL correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive PPS-NULL
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive PPS-NULL correctly.
Cause: The Stop key was pressed during a communication.
T-14-66
##753 [TX] In ECM transmission, the allowed number of procedure signal retransmissions
was exceeded or a T5 time-over (60 sec) condition occurred after transmission of
PPS-NULL
Cause: The page buffer of the other party is full or is engaged; as such, although RNR was
received after transmission of PPS-NULL and then RR was transmitted, no significant
signal was received correctly thereafter.
Remedy: 1. Start G3 mode, and transmit once again (Prohibit the ECM mode).
3. Record the protocol on a DAT or MD, and have it analyzed by the local Canon office
T-14-67
was exceeded after transmission of PPS-NULL
Cause: The line condition is poor; as such, although PPR was received 4 times after
transmission of PPS-NULL and then CTC was transmitted, the other party could not
receive it correctly.
Remedy: Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive CTC correctly.
14-25
Chapter 14
was exceeded after transmission of PPS-NULL
transmission of PPS-NULL and then CTC was transmitted, no significant signal was
received correctly thereafter.
T-14-68
PPS-MPS, and the allowed number of procedure signal re-transmissions was
exceeded
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive PPS-MPS correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive PPS-MPS
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive PPS-MPS correctly.
T-14-69
##757 [TX] In ECM transmission, DCN was received after transmission of PPS-MPS
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive PPS-MPS correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive PPS-MPS
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive PPS-MPS correctly.
14-26
Chapter 14
T-14-70
##758 [TX] In ECM transmission, the allowed number of procedure signal re-transmissions
PPS-MPS
received after transmission of PPS-MPS and then RR was transmitted, no significant
T-14-71
was exceeded after transmission of PPS-MPS
transmission of PPS-MPS and then CTC was transmitted, the other party could not
transmission of PPS-MPS and then CTC was transmitted, no significant signal was
T-14-72
PPS-EOM, and the allowed number of procedure signal re-transmissions was
exceeded
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive PPS-EOM correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive PPS-EOM
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive PPS-EOM correctly.
14-27
Chapter 14
T-14-73
##762 [TX] In ECM transmission, DCN was received after transmission of PPS-EOM
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive PPS-EOM correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive PPS-EOM
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive PPS-EOM correctly.
T-14-74
PPS-EOM
received after transmission of PPS-EOM and then RR was transmitted, no significant
T-14-75
was exceeded after transmission of PPS-EOM
transmission of PPS-EOM and then CTC was transmitted, the other party could not
transmission of PPS-EOM and then CTC was transmitted, no significant signal was
14-28
Chapter 14
T-14-76
PPS-EOP, and the allowed number of procedure signal re-transmissions was
exceeded
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive PPS-EOP correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive PPS-EOP
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive PPS-EOP correctly.
T-14-77
##767 [TX] In ECM transmission, DCN was received after transmission of PPS-EOP
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive PPS-EOP correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive PPS-EOP
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive PPS-EOP correctly.
T-14-78
PPS-EOP
received after transmission of PPS-EOP and then RR was transmitted, no significant
14-29
Chapter 14
T-14-79
was exceeded after transmission of PPS-EOP
transmission of PPS-EOP and then CTC was transmitted, the other party could not
transmission of PPS-EOP and then CTC was transmitted, no significant signal was
T-14-80
EOR-NULL, and the allowed number of procedure signal re-transmissions was
exceeded
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive EOR-NULL correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOR-NULL
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOR-NULL correctly.
T-14-81
##772 [TX] In ECM transmission, DCN was received after transmission of EOR-NULL
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive EOR-NULL correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOR-NULL
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOR-NULL correctly.
14-30
Chapter 14
T-14-82
EOR-NULL
received after transmission of EOR-NULL and then RR was transmitted, no significant
T-14-83
##774 [TX] In ECM transmission, ERR was received after transmission of EOR-NULL
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot often receive the image signal
correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive the image signal
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive the image signal
correctly.
party.
to the telephone number when registering an auto dialing number.
T-14-84
EOR-MPS, and the allowed number of procedure signal re-transmissions was
exceeded
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive EOR-MPS correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOR-MPS
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOR-MPS correctly.
14-31
Chapter 14
EOR-MPS, and the allowed number of procedure signal re-transmissions was
exceeded
T-14-85
##777 [TX] In ECM transmission, DCN was received after transmission of EOR-MPS
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive EOR-MPS correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOR-MPS
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOR-MPS correctly.
T-14-86
EOR-MPS
received after transmission of EOR-MPS and then RR was transmitted, no significant
T-14-87
##779 [TX] In ECM transmission, ERR was received after transmission of EOR-MPS
correctly.
correctly.
correctly.
14-32
Chapter 14
##779 [TX] In ECM transmission, ERR was received after transmission of EOR-MPS
party.
T-14-88
EOR-EOM, and the allowed number of procedure signal re-transmissions was
exceeded
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive EOR-EOM correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOR-EOM
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOR-EOM correctly.
T-14-89
##782 [TX] In ECM transmission, DCN was received after transmission of EOR-EOM
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive EOR-EOM correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOR-EOM
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOR-EOM correctly.
14-33
Chapter 14
T-14-90
EOR-EOM
received after transmission of EOR-EOM and then RR was transmitted, no significant
T-14-91
##784 [TX] In ECM transmission, ERR was received after transmission of EOR-EOM
correctly.
correctly.
correctly.
party.
T-14-92
EOR-EOP, and the allowed number of procedure signal re-transmissions was
exceeded
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive EOR-EOP correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOR-EOP
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOR-EOP correctly.
14-34
Chapter 14
T-14-93
##787 [TX] In ECM transmission, DCN was received after transmission of EOR-EOP
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive EOR-EOP correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive EOR-EOP
correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive EOR-EOP correctly.
T-14-94
EOR-EOP
received after transmission of EOR-EOP and then RR was transmitted, no significant
T-14-95
##789 [TX] In ECM transmission, ERR was received after transmission of EOR-EOP
correctly.
correctly.
correctly.
party.
14-35
Chapter 14
T-14-96
##790 [TX] In ECM reception, ERR was transmitted after reception of EOR-Q
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the image signal cannot often be received correctly.

2. Decrease the transmission level so that an echo is not received.
T-14-97
##791 [TX/RX] During an ECM mode procedure, a signal other than a significant signal was
received
T-14-98
##792 [RX] In ECM reception, PPS-NULL between partial pages cannot be detected
Cause: The line condition is poor, and PPS-NULL cannot be received.
Remedy: 1. Ask the operator of the other party to increase the transmission level so that PPS-
NULL may be received correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that PPS-NULL may be received correctly.
T-14-99
##793 [RX] In ECM reception, no effective frame was detected while signals were received at
high speed, and a time-over condition occurred
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the other party cannot receive CFR correctly.
Remedy: 1. Increase the transmission level so that the other party may receive CFR correctly.
2. Adjust the NL equalizer so that the other party may receive CFR correctly.
Cause: The line condition is poor, and the image signal cannot be received correctly.
14-36
Chapter 14
##793 [RX] In ECM reception, no effective frame was detected while signals were received at
high speed, and a time-over condition occurred
Cause: An echo of CFR prevents reception of the training signal.

2. Decrease the transmission level so that an echo of the transmitted CFR will not be
received.
T-14-100
##795 [TX/RX] A fault occurred in decoding process during a communication
Cause: The communication CODEC is busy.
Remedy: 1. Disconnecting and connecting the power cord.

14.2.3.2 Common Faults

0006-3714
No communication occurs.
T-14-101
Cause The modular cable is not connected to the modular jack used for line connection.
Remedy Connect the modular cable to the modular jack used for line connection.
A call cannot be made.
T-14-102
Cause The selected type of line (tone or dial) is different from the type of the connected line.
Remedy Select the type of line identical to the type of the connected line.
14-37
Chapter 15 Service Mode
Contents
Contents
15.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................15-1
15.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1.2 Using Service Mode................................................................................................................................................................. 15-2
15.1.3 List of Menus ........................................................................................................................................................................... 15-3
15.2 Service Mode Table ...................................................................................................................................................15-9
15.2.1 Bit Switch Settings................................................................................................................................................................... 15-9
15.2.2 Menu Switch Settings ............................................................................................................................................................ 15-18
15.2.3 Numeric Parameter Setting .................................................................................................................................................... 15-19
15.2.4 SPECIAL Setting ................................................................................................................................................................... 15-21
15.2.5 NCU Setting........................................................................................................................................................................... 15-21
15.2.6 ISDN Setting .......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-21
15.2.7 Country/Region of Installation .............................................................................................................................................. 15-21
15.2.8 Setting the Original Reading Functions ................................................................................................................................. 15-22
15.2.9 Setting the Printer Parameters................................................................................................................................................ 15-22
15.2.10 PDL ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-25
15.2.11 Counter................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-25
15.2.12 Generating a Report ............................................................................................................................................................. 15-26
15.2.13 Downloading........................................................................................................................................................................ 15-27
15.2.14 Clearing................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-27
15.2.15 ROM Indication ................................................................................................................................................................... 15-28
15.2.16 Resetting the Contact Sensor Position ................................................................................................................................. 15-28
15.2.17 Service Mode Default Setting .............................................................................................................................................. 15-28
15.2.18 Test Mode ............................................................................................................................................................................ 15-40
15.2.19 Service Report...................................................................................................................................................................... 15-51
Chapter 15
15.1 Outline
15.1.1 Outline
0006-2791
The following items may be checked or set in the machine's service mode, which consists of those found in existing fax machines. You may use them as you would
on a fax machine.
The machine's service mode items are grouped into the following 15 blocks:
T-15-1
#1 SSSW: service soft switch
Use it to register/set basic fax functions (e.g., error control, echo remedy, communica-tion error correction).
#2 MENU: menu switch settings
Use it to register/set items related to functions needed at time of installation (e.g., NL equalizer, transmission
level).
#3 NUMERIC param: numerical parameter settings
Use it to enter a numerical parameter for various functions related to the FAX/TEL switch-over.
#4A SPECIAL: Do not change.
#4B NCU: Do not change.
This item is set in conjunction with the setting of #5 TYPE so that the settings will comply with the
communications standards of a specific country/region.
#4C ISDN: not used
#5 TYPE: country/region setting
Use it to select a country/region from the list so that the setting of #1 through #4 will comply with the
communications standards of the selected country/region.
#6 SCANNER: partially available for service
Do not change the settings except '7: CCD', used to adjust the image position; other-wise, the read image
quality can adversely be affected.
#7 PRINTER: printer function settings
Use it to register/set items related to printer basic service functions (e.g., conditions for reducing received
images). Or, settings may also be made for humidity sensor fixed mode.
#8 PDL: not used
#9 COUNTER: counter information
Use it to check various counter information.
#10 REPORT: report output
Use it to generate a report on various service data.
#11 DOWNLOAD: not used
15-1
Chapter 15
#12 CLEAR: data initialization mode setting
Use it to initialize various data by selecting a specific item.
#13 ROM: ROM control
Use it to indicate information related to the ROM on the LCD (e.g., ROM version, checksum).
#14 CS SET: not used
TEST MODE: Use it to execute various testings.
15.1.2 Using Service Mode

0006-2825
100% L TR
TE XT 01
1) Starting user mode menu.
Press the Additional Functions key.
REG I STRAT I ON / SE T T I NG
1. COMONN SE T T I NGS
2) Selecting service mode menu.
Press the # key on the user mode menu.
S ERV I CE MODE
#1 SSSW
3) Selecting a Menu Item.

Press the Left or Right Arrow key.
S ERV I CE MODE
#3 NUMER I C P a r am.
001 : 0
5) Registering/Setting Data.
Enter the data using the keypad,
and press the OK key.
001 : 10
6) Selecting a Menu Item.
Press the Left or Right Arrow key.
002 : 10
7) Press the Stop key/Additional Functions key to end service mode.
F-15-1
15-2
Chapter 15
15.1.3 List of Menus

0006-2828
service data
#1 SSSW SW01 00010000 error/copy control

(service soft SW02 00000000 network connection setting
switch settings) SW03 00000000 echo remedy setting
SW04 10000000 communication fault remedy setting
SW05 00000000 standard function (DIS signal) setting
SW06 10010000 read conditions setting
SW07 00000000 not used
SW12 00000010 1-page timer setting
SW14 00000001 by default paper type;
metric/inch switch-over

SW25 00000000 report indication function setting
SW26 00000000 transmission function setting
SW28 00000000 V.8/V.34 protocol settings
SW33 00000000 counter related
F-15-2
MEMO:
To select the SW number in #1 SSSW, use Paper Select key and Enlarge/Reduce key. To select a bit, use the Left or Right Arrow key.
Do not change the following, reserved for the future; SW7 through 11, 13, 15 through 24, 27, 29 through 32, 34 through 50.
15-3
Chapter 15
#2 MENU 001: not used

(menu switch 002: not used
setting) 003: not used
004: not used
005: ON NL equalizer setting
OFF
006: DIAL line monitor setting

SERVICEMAN [1]
SERVICEMAN [2]
OFF
007: 0dBm transmission level setting

1dBm
2dBm
14dBm
15dBm
008: 3429 V.34 baud rate

3200
3000
2800
2743
2400
009: 33.6 V.34 transmission speed
31.2
28.8
26.4
24.0
21.6
19.2
16.8
14.4
12.0
9.6
7.2
4.8
2.4
010: 17Hz pseudo CI signal frequency setting
25Hz
50Hz
011: items 11 through 20: not used
020:
F-15-3
Do not change the following, reserved for the future: No. 01 through 04, 11 through 20.
15-4
Chapter 15
Initial Range of
setting setting
#3 NUMERIC Param. 001: not used
(numerical 002: 10 (10%) (1~99) RTM signal transmission
parameter setting) condition (1) setting
003: 15 (15times) (2~99) RTM signal transmission
condition (2) setting
004: 12 (12lines) (1~99) RTM signal transmission
(3) setting
005: 4 (4sec) (0~60) NCC pause time
(pre-ID code) setting
006: 4 (4sec) (0~60) NCC pause time
(post-ID code) setting
007: not used
008: not used
009: 6(6 digits) (0~20) direct mail prevention function:
telephone number cross-check,
number of digits
010: 5500 (55sec) (0~9999) T0 timer
011: 3500 (35sec) (0~9999) TS1 timer
012: not used
013: 1300 (13sec) (500~3000) T30 E0L timer
014: not used
015: 120 (1200ms) (0~999) hooking detection time setting
016: 4 (4sec) (0~9) fax/tel switch-over function:
between line acquisition
and pseudo RBTtransmission
017: 100 (1000ms) (0~999) pseudo RBT signal pattern:
ON time setting
OFF time (short) setting
OFF time (long) setting
020: 100 (1000ms) (0~999) pseudo CI signal pattern:
ON time setting
OFF time (short) setting
OFF time (long) setting
023: not used
024: 20 (-20dBm) (0~20) pseudo RBT signal transmission l

evel setting
025: 60 (60sec) (0~999) answering phone connection function:
signal monitor length setting
026: not used
027: 3 (30ms) (0~99) V21 low-speed flag preamble
detection length setting
028: 3 (3s) (0~60) menu pop-up
time setting
029: not used
055: not used

056: 101 (101) total 1 indication
057: 201 (0~999) copy (total 1) indication
058: 0 (0~999) no indication
062: not used
080: not used

F-15-4
Do not use the following, reserved for the future: No. 001, 007, 008, 012, 014, 023, 026, 029 through 055, 062 through 080.
15-5
Chapter 15
#4A SPECIAL
#4B NCU
(NCU setting)
#4C ISDN
#5 TYPE EUROPE
(type setting) U.K.
SWEDEN
SWISS
AUSTRIA
DENMARK
NORWAY
HOLLAND
BELGUIM
AUSTRALIA
FINLAND
N.Z.
ITALY
SPAIN
PORTUGAL
IRELAND
HONG KONG
MALAYSIA
HUNGARY
SAF
KOREA
CHINA
GERMAN
FRANCE
SINGAPORE
CZECH
SLOVENIA
ASIA
POLAND
TAIWAN
EUROPE2
STANDARD
USA
F-15-5
T-15-2
#4A SPECIAL
Do not change the setting.
#4B NCU (NCU setting)
The settings under this item are collectively and automatically set in conjunction with #5 TYPE to suit
the communications standards of a specific country/region.
Not used. (Do not change the setting.)
#4C ISDN
Not used.
#5 TYPE
Use it to select a specific country/region from the list so that the settings under #1 through #4 will comply
with the communications standards of the selected country/region.
15-6
Chapter 15
When changing the TYPE setting, be sure not to select a country/region which is not the country/region of installation.
#6 SCANNER 1. Bit SW
(scanner function 2. SLICE
setting) 3. GAMMA
4. Numeric
5. LUT 1 fno
6. LUT 2 adj
7. CCD
8. MODEL
#7 PRINTER #1 SSSW SW01 00000000 SW01 through 05: not used

(printer function
setting) SW05 10000000
SW06 00000100 reduction setting
SW07 through 12: not

SW13 00000000 humidity sensor fixed mode
SW14 through 20: not
#2 NUMERIC Param
#3 PRINT COUNT
#4 PRINTER RESET YES= (<)

NO= (>)
#5 MLT CLEANING not used
F-15-6
MEMO:
To select the SW number in #1 SSSW of #7 PRINTER, use Paper Select key and Enlarge/Reduce key. To select a bit, use the Left or Right Arrow key.
#6 SCANNER (scanner function setting);

The setting of this item can affect the read image quality. A change may be made to '7. CCD' when adjusting the image position; otherwise, do not use this item.Do
not change the settings, as they are not in use: #7 PRINTER (printer function setting); #1 SSSW: SW01 through 05, 07 through 12, 14 though 20. Also, do not
change the setting of '#2 NUMBER Param'.
15-7
Chapter 15
#8 PDL
#9 COUNTER TOTAL SERVICE1 service-use total counter 1 indication
SERVICE2 service-use total counter 2 indication
TTL total counter indication
COPY total copy counter indication
PDL-PRTprint counter indication
FAX-PRTfax reception print counter indication
RPT-PRTreport print counter indication
SCAN scan counter indication
PICK-UP C1 cassette pickup counter indication
C2 not used
C3 not used
C4 not used
MF manual feed tray pickup counter indication
FEEDER FEED ADF pickup counter indication
JAM TTL machine total jam counter indication
FEEDER ADF jam counter indication
SORTER not used
MF manual feed tray jam counter indication
C1 cassette jam counter indication
C2 not used
C3 not used
C4 not used
MISC not used
F-15-7
T-15-3
#8 PDL
Not used.
15-8
Chapter 15
#10 REPORT 1.SERVICE & SYSTEM service mode data, start date, system
dump list output, etc.
2.SERVICE DATA service mode data, start date output
3.SYSTEM DUMP system dump list output
4.KEY HISTORY REPORT recent key presses history
(1800 presses) output
5.BCH LOG REPORT not used
6.COUNTER REPORT counter output
7.PRINT SPEC REPORT specifications output
#11 DOWNLOAD
#12 CLEAR TEL & USER DATA dial registration mode,
user data initialization
USER DATA user data initialization
SERVICE SW SSSW data initialization
SERVICE DATA system dump list initialization
REPORT ACTIVITY communications control
report initialization
JAM not used
ERR not used
ALARM not used

COUNTER counter initialization
CARD not used
ERR not used
ALL total data initialization
#13 ROM MAIN image processor PCB ROM version
indication
MAIN2
image processor PCB CPU version
ECONT indication
PDL DC controller PCB ROM version
#14 CS SET
TEST MODE [1] ~ [6], [8]
F-15-8
T-15-4
#11 DOWNLOAD
Not used.
#14 CS SET
Not used.
15.2 Service Mode Table
15.2.1 Bit Switch Settings

0006-2856
A bit switch consists of 8 bits, used for registering/setting an item. The switch is configured as follows, and each bit is always either '0' or '1' :
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
0
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
SW01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F-15-9
15-9
Chapter 15
Do not change service data marked "not used" for its initial setting.
#SSSW-SW01: error/copy control

T-15-5
Bit Function 1 0 Factory setting
0 service error code output do not output 0
1 error dump list output do not output 0
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 user setting restriction do not impose impose 0
[Bit 0]
Use it to specify whether or not to generate a service error code. If set to '1', a service error code will be indicated on the report.
[Bit 1]
Use it to specify whether or not to generate an error dump list. When set to '1', an error dump list will be attached to an error TX report or a RX report generated in
the event of an error.
[Bit 7]
Use it to impose or not impose restrictions on user settings. If set to '0', certain items cannot be set by the user, depending on the country setting. If set to '1', on the
other hand, all items may be set by the user, regardless of the country setting.
#SSSW-SW02: network connection conditions setting
T-15-6
0 start-up at memory clear list output fault prohibit do not prohibit 0
1 not used - -
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
[Bit 0]
Use it to specify whether or not to put the machine in standby state if the memory clear list is not generated when the power is turned on after an error has occurred
(e.g., running out of paper).
If set to '1', the machine will generate a memory clear list and enters standby state when the image data is cleared and the power is turned on.
If set to '1', moreover, the following takes place:

1. The alarm sounds, and the machine waits for correction; specifically,
a. The LCD indicates 'CHECK PRINTER'.
b. The machine will not start reception operation in response to arrival of data.
2. When an appropriate correction is made, the machine will automatically generate a memory clear list. If an error (e.g., jam) occurs during output, the machine
goes back to 1. above.
If set to '0', on the other hand, the machine will sound the alarm and enters standby state.
#1 SSW-SW03: echo remedy setting
T-15-7
0 not used - - 0
1 echo product tone in high-speed transmission transmit do not transmit 0
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 Transmission mode; long Yes No 0
15-10
Chapter 15
distance (1)
5 Transmission mode; long Yes No 0
distance (2) or long distance (3)
6 Transmission mode Long Long 0
distance (3) distance (2)
7 tonal signal before transmission of CED signal transmit do not transmit 0
[Bit 1]
Use it to specify whether or not to transmit an echo protection tone for high-speed transmission V.29 (9600 or 7200 bps; modem signal).
If an error occurs often because of a line condition at time of transmission, set it to '1'. If set to '1', unmodulated carrier will be transmitted as a sync signal before
transmission of an image for about 200 msec.
MEMO:
The following error codes are associated with a line condition at time of transmission:
##100, ##104, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##750, ##755, ##760, ##765
[Bit 7]
Use it to specify whether or not to transmit a 1080-Hz tonal signal before transmission of the CED signal. Set it to '1' if an error occurs often because of an error at
time of reception.
MEMO:
The following error codes are associated with an echo at time of reception:
##005, ##101, ##106, ##107, ##114, ##200, ##201, ##790
[Bit 4, 5, 6]
Select the transmission mode, long distance (1), long distance (2), or long distance (3). If errors due to echo occur frequently in transmission to overseas, set the
transmission mode with the dial registration or service soft switch.
MEMO:
Codes for errors that can occur during transmission because of echo:
##005, ##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##280, ##281, ##283, ##284, ##750, ##760, ##765, ##774, ##779, ##784, ##794
TEL registration:
Set "Long distance (1)" when registering the one-touch speed dialing and coded speed dialing transmission mode. If errors do not disappear, try "Long distance (2)"
and "Long distance (3)".
The transmission mode set in one-touch speed dialing and coded speed dialing registration takes priority over the one set with the service soft switch.
These bit switches are applicable to manually dialed numbers only. Look at the following table and set "Long distance (1)" If errors persist, try "Long distance (2)"
or "Long distance (3)".
T-15-8
TX mode Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Long distance (1) * 0 0 1 0 0 * 0
Long distance (2) * 0 1 0 0 0 * 0
Long distance (3) * 1 1 0 0 0 * 0
*: 0 or 1 (depending on the respective setting)
Long distance (1) ignores the first DIS signal sent by the other fax.
Long distance (2) sends an 1850-Hz tonal signal when the DIS signal is transmitted.
Long distance (3) sends a 1650-Hz tonal signal when the DIS signal is transmitted.
#1 SSSW-SW04: communication fault remedy setting
T-15-9
0 Monitor loop current Yes No 0
1 Check CI frequency Yes No 0
2 number of last flag sequence for procedure signal 2 1 0
3 reception mode after transmission of CFR signal high-speed high-speed/ 0

low-speed
4 length of time during which to ignore low-speed 1500ms 700ms 0

signal after transmission of CFFR signal
15-11
Chapter 15
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 CED signal at time of manual reception do not transmit transmit 1
[Bit 0]
Selects whether or not to monitor loop current. When 'Yes' is selected, if loop current cannot be detected before dialing, or if the loop current is cut during or trans-
mission, the line is released.
[Bit 1]
In automatic recieving, CI frequency check can be selected. If 'Yes'is selected, the upper and lower limits of the CI frequency are checked, and automatic recieving
can only go ahead if both values meet German regulations.
[Bit 2]
Use it to specify the number of last flag sequences for the procedure signal (300 bps). Select '2' if the other party fails to receive the procedure signal transmitted
by the machine normally.
MEMO:
The following error code are associated with transmission:
##100, ##280, ##281, ##750, ##753, ##754, ##755, ##758, ##759, ##760, ##763, ##764, ##765, ##768, ##769, ##770, ##773, ##775, ##778, ##780, ##783, ##785,
##788,
[Bit 3]
Use it to select reception to use after transmission of the CFR signal.
If an error occurs often because of the line condition at time of reception, set it to '1'and, at the same time, set 'ECM RX' to 'OFF' for user data.
MEMO:
The following error codes are associated with the line condition at time of reception:
##107, ##114, ##201
Be sure to change bit 4 before changing this bit; resort to this bit only if an error still occurs.
When set to '1' only high-speed (image) signals will be received after the transmission of the CFR signal.
[Bit 4]
Use it to select the length of time during which low-speed signals are ignored after transmission of the CFR signal.
Select '1500 msec' if reception of image signals is not good because of a poor line condition.
[Bit 7]
Use it to specify whether or not to send the CED signal at time of manual reception.
Set it to "transmit" if the other party does not start transmission when manual reception is initiated.
#1 SSSW-SW05: standard function (DIS signal) setting
T-15-10
0 not used - -
1 not used - -
2 not used - -
3 transmit bit 33 and thereafter for DIS signal prohibit do not 0

prohibit
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
[Bit 3]
Use it specify whether or not to transmit bit 33 and thereafter for the DIS signal.
If 'Prohibit' is selected, Super Fine reception from a non-Canon machine can no longer be used.
#1 SSSW-SW06: read condition setting
15-12
Chapter 15
T-15-11
0 not used - -
1 not used - -
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 original read width LTR A4 1
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
[Bit 4]
Use it to select a read width for originals.
If 'LTR' is selected, the machine will read LTR originals at LTR width (212 mm).
#1 SSSW-SW12: page timer setting
T-15-12
0 1-page time-out length for transmission/ 1 0 0

reception
1 1 0 1
2 1-page time-out length for transmission 1 0 0

(HT transmission)
3 1 0 0
4 1-page time-out length for reception 1 0 0
5 1 0 0
6 not used - -
7 page timer setting by transmission/ set do not set 0

reception
The machine is designed to stop communication when transmission/reception of a single page takes 32 min or more. To set a time-out length, refer to the next page.
If '1' is selected for bit 7, the 1-page time-out length will be as set by bit 0 and bit 1.
T-15-13
Time-Out Length for Transmission/Reception
time-out length Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
8 min 0 * * * * * 0 0
16 min 0 * * * * * 0 1
32 min 0 * * * * * 1 0
64 min 0 * * * * * 1 1
15-13
Chapter 15
T-15-14
Time-Out Length for Transmission (text mode)
time-out length Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
8 min 1 * * * * * 0 0
16 min 1 * * * * * 0 1
32 min 1 * * * * * 1 0
64 min 1 * * * * * 1 1
T-15-15
Time-Out Length for Transmission (image mode other than text mode)
time-out length Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
8 min 1 * * * 0 0 * *
16 min 1 * * * 0 1 * *
32 min 1 * * * 1 0 * *
64 min 1 * * * 1 1 * *
T-15-16
Time-Out Length for Reception
time-out length Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
8 min 1 * 0 0 * * * *
16 min 1 * 0 1 * * * *
32 min 1 * 1 0 * * * *
64 min 1 * 1 1 * * * *
#1 SSSW-SW14: inch/meter resolution setting

T-15-17
0 paper size identification 1 0 0
1 paper size identification 1 0 0
2 inch/meter resolution conversion scanning main/sub scanning sub scanning only 1

direction
15-14
Chapter 15
3 not used - -
4 declare inch resolution declare do not declare 0
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
[Bit 0, 1]
Use a combination of bit 0 and bit 1 to set the size of paper (default side).
- if 0 and 0, A/B-configured paper.

- if 0 and 1, inch-configured paper
- if 1 and 0, A-configured paper
- if 1 and 1, A/B-configured paper
[Bit 2]
Use it to specify whether to convert an inch resolution into a metric resolution for images read at time of G3 transmission only in sub scanning direction or in both
main and sub scanning direction.
The setting made here is effective only if bit 1 of SW05 of #1 SSSW is set to '1'.
[Bit 4]
Use it to specify whether or not to declare an inch resolution to the other party at time of G3 communication.
If set to '1' a declaration will be made using the DIS, DCS, or DTC signal to the effect that the machine is designed to read and record images at an inch resolution.
MEMO:
The type of image and the direction of scanning for inch/meter resolution conversion are determined by combinations of bits 1 and 2 of SW05 and bit 2 of SW14
of #1 SSSW as well as the type of dialing used.
- When One-Touch Dial/Coded Dial and Keypad/Redial Key Is in Use
T-15-18
SW05 SW14 Image and scanning direction subject to inch/meter conversion
bit1 bit2 bit2 bit3
0 0 0 - do not execute inch/meter conversion
0 0 1 -
0 1 0 -
0 1 1 -
1 0 0 - text image/sub scanning
1 0 1 - text image/main scanning and sub scanning
1 1 0 - text and photo image/sub scanning
1 1 1 - text and photo image/main and sub scanning
#1 SSSW-SW25: report indication function setting
15-15
Chapter 15
T-15-19
0 transmission telephone number of other party number of caller 0

number indicated on report
1 not used - -
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
[Bit 0]
Use it to select the number to be indicated on the report, generated at the end of transmission.
T-15-20
Number of caller: Select it to indicate the telephone number of the caller on the report.
Number of other party: Select it to indicate the telephone number sent by the other party (CSI
signal data).
MEMO:
If a change is made using a means other than one-touch dialing or speed dialing, the telephone number sent by the other party (CSI signal data) will be indicated
on the report even when 'Number of caller' is selected.
#1 SSSW-S26: transmission function setting

T-15-21
0 not used - -
1 not used - -
2 broadcast transmission ask do not ask 0

confirmation
3 broadcast transmission ask do not ask 0

prohibition
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 other party at time of single party all parties 0

broadcast transmission
suspension
7 error TX report at time of do not generate generate 0

transmission suspension
[Bit 2]
Use it to specify whether or not to indicate a confirm message to prevent the user from making a broadcast by mistake when entering an address for a broadcast
transmission.
[Bit 3]
Use it to specify whether or not to use broadcast transmission to prevent the user from making a broadcast by mistake when entering an address for a broadcast
15-16
Chapter 15
transmission.
[Bit 6]
Use it to specify whether or not to suspend a communication to all parties when a broadcast transmission is suspended.
[Bit 7]
Use it to specify whether or not to generate an error TX report when a transmission is suspended by pressing the Stop key.
#1 SSSW-SW28: V.8/V.34 protocol settings
T-15-22
0 Caller V.8 protocol No Yes 0
1 Called party V.8 protocol No Yes 0
2 Caller V.8 protocol late start No Yes 0
3 Called party V.8 protocol late No Yes 0

start
4 V.34 reception fallback Prohibited Not 0

prohibited
5 V.34 transmission fallback Prohibited Not 0

prohibited
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
[Bit 0]
Select whether to use the V.8 protocol when calling. If NO is selected, the V.8 protocol is inhibited at calling and the V.21 protocol is used.
[Bit 1]
Select whether to use the V.8 protocol when called. If NO is selected, the V8 protocol is inhibited when called and the V.21 protocol is used.
[Bit 2]
If ANSam signal is not received during transmission (mainly manual transmission), select whether to use the V.8 protocol when the other fax machine declares the
V.8 protocol in DIS signal. If NO is selected, the CI signal is not transmitted and the V.8 protocol is not used even if the DIS that specifies the V.8 protocol is
received.
[Bit 3]
Select whether to declare the V.8 protocol in DIS signal for reception (mainly caller manual transmission). If NO is selected, the V.8 protocol cannot be used because
it is not declared in DIS signal.
[Bit 4]
Select whether the receiver falls back during V.34 reception. If "Prohibit" is selected, the receiver does not fall back.
[Bit 5]
Select whether the transmitter falls beck during V.34 transmission. If "Prohibit" is selected, the transmitter does not fall back.
#1 SSSW-SW33: counter-related
T-15-23
0 not used - - 0
1 indicate serial No. on counter No Yes

check screen
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
[Bit 1]
15-17
Chapter 15
Use it to specific whether to indicate the machine serial No. on the Counter Check screen, appearing when the Counter key is pressed.
If 'Yes' is selected, the serial No. will be indicated. If 'no' is selected, on the other hand, the serial No. will not be indicated.
15.2.2 Menu Switch Settings

0006-3001
T-15-24
No. Item Selection Initial setting
005 NL equalizer ON, OFF OFF
006 telephone line monitor DIAL/SERVICEMAN DIAL
[1]/SERVICEMAN[2]/OFF
007 transmission level (ATT) 0 through 15 (ex: 15=-15dBm) 10
008 V.34 modulation speed upper limit 3429, 3200, 3000, 2800, 2743, 2400 3429
009 V.34 data speed upper limit from 2.4 to 33.6 kbps 33.6
010 pseudo CI signal frequency 50Hz, 25Hz, 17Hz 25Hz
005 NL equalizer
Use it to turn on/off the NL equalizer.
Turn on the NL equalizer if an error occurs often because of the line condition at time of
communication.
MEMO:
The following error codes are associated with the line condition at time of transmission.
##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##750, ##755,
##765, ##774, ##779, ##784, ##789
The following error codes are associated with the line condition at time of reception
##103, ##107, ##114, ##201, ##790, ##793
006 telephone line monitor

Use it to set telephone line motor functions:
DIAL: Select it to generate a monitor sound for the telephone line from the start of transmission to DIS.
SERVICEMAN [1]: Select it to generate a monitor sound of the telephone line from the start of a communication to its end.
SERVICEMAN [2]: not used
OFF: Select it to mute the monitor sound for the telephone line for the
speaker.
007 ATT transmission level

Use it to set the transmission level (ATT).
Increase the transmission level if an error occurs often because of the line condition at time of a communication.
MEMO:
The following error codes are associated with the line condition at time of transmission:
##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##280, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##284,
##750, ##752, ##754, ##755, ##757, ##759, ##760, ##762, ##764, ##765,
##767, ##769, ##770, ##772, ##774, ##775, ##777, ##779, ##780, ##782,
##784, ##785, ##787, ##789
The following error codes are associated with the line condition at time of reception:
##103, ##106, ##107, ##201, ##793
008 V.34 modulation speed upper limit

Use it to set an upper limit to the modulation speed (baud rate) for the V.34 primary channel.
009 V.34 data speed upper limit

Use it to set an upper limit to the data transmission speed for the V.34 primary channel
between 2.4K and 33.6K bps in increments of 2400 bps. (0: 2.4K to 13: 33.6K bps).
010 pseudo CI signal

Use it to set a frequency for the pseudo CI signal.
At times, certain types of external telephones fail to ring while fax/tel switch-over takes
place. If so, change the frequency of the pseudo CI signal.
15-18
Chapter 15
15.2.3 Numeric Parameter Setting

0006-3019
T-15-25
No. Item Range of settings Initial setting
2 RTN transmission condition (1) 1 to 99% 10
3 RTN transmission condition (2) 2 to 99 times 15
4 RTN transmission condition (3) 1 to 99 lines 12
5 NCC pause length (pre-ID code) 0 to 60 sec 4
6 NCC pause length (post-ID code) 0 to 60 sec 4
9 number of digits of telephone numbers in 0 to 20 digits 6

comparison between transmitting and receiv-ing
machine
10 line connection identification time length 0 to 9999 (10ms) 5500
11 T.30 T1 timer (for reception) 0 to 9999 (10ms) 3500
13 T30.EOL timer 500 to 3000 (10ms) 1300
15 hooking detection time length 0 to 999 (10ms) 120
16 time to tentative response at time of fax/tel switch- 0 to 9 sec 4

over
17 pseudo RBT signal pattern ON length 0 to 999 (10ms) 100
18 pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length (short) 0 to 999 (10ms) 0
19 pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length (long) 0 to 999 (10ms) 200
20 pseudo CI signal pattern ON time length 0 to 999 (10ms) 100
21 pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length (short) 0 to 999 (10ms) 0
22 pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length (long) 0 to 999 (10ms) 200
24 fax/tel switch-over pseudo RBT transmission level 0 to 20 dBm 20
25 answer telephone CNG motor time length 0 to 999 sec 60
27 V.21 low-speed flag preamble detection time length 1 to 99 (10ms) 3
28 menu selection screen display time length 1 to 60 sec 3
56 count type select 1 101 101
57 count type select 2 0 to 999 201
[No. 02. 03, 04]

Use it to set conditions for RTN signal transmission. If an error occurs often when the RTN signal is transmitted at time of reception, increase the parameters to
loosen the RTN signal transmission conditions.
MEMO:
The following error codes are associated with the transmission of the RTN signal at time of reception:
##104, ##107, ##114, ##201
The RTN signal transmission condition (1) is the ratio of the number of error
lines in relation to the total number of lines per page of reception images.
The RTN signal transmission condition (2) is the reference value*2 for burst errors*1.
The RTN signal transmission condition (3) is the number of errors not
reaching the reference value for burst errors.
15-19
Chapter 15
*1: transmission errors spanning several lines.

*2: If set to '15', a transmission error spanning 5 consecutive lines is identified as a burst error.
If any of these conditions is detected while an image signal is being revised,
the RTN signal will be transmitted after receiving the procedure signal from
the transmitting machine. A higher parameter will make the transmission of the RTN signal more difficult.
[No. 05]
Use it to set the length of item (pause) automatically put between the access code an the ID code when a number is dialed on an NCC (new common carrier) line.
[No. 06]
Use it to set the length of time (pause) automatically put between the ID code and the telephone number of the other party when a number is dialed on an NCC (new
common carrier) line.
[No. 09]
Use it to set the number of TSI comparison digits (last XX digits) for a telephone number cross check.
[No. 10]
Use it to set the length of time for line connection identification. If an error occurs often
because of the line condition at time of a communication, increase the parameter.
MEMO:
The line condition detection time length refers to the length between when
the dial signal is transmitted and when the line condition is cut in relation to
the transmitting side, while it is the length between when the DIS signal is
transmitted and when the line is cut in relation to the receiving side.
[No. 11]
The setting of the T1 timer varies from country to country (PTT). The T1 timer is variable.
[No. 13]
If the length of data for a single line is too long (e.g., computer fax), increase the 1-line
transmission time for possible reception to prevent a reception error.
[No. 15]
Use it to set the hooking detection time.
[No. 16]
Use it to set the time length between when the line is acquired and when the pseudo RBT is transmitted when making a fax/tel switch-over.
[No. 17, 18, 19]

Use it to set a pattern of the pseudo RBT signal transmitted when making a fax/tel switchover.
[NO. 20, 21, 22]

Use it to set the pattern of the pseudo CI signal transmitted when making a fax/tel switchover.
[No. 24]
Use it to set the pseudo RBT transmission level used when making a fax/tel switch-over.
[No. 25]
Use it to set the length of time during which the absence of sound on the line, 2nd NSS signal, or CNG signal transmitted by the other party is monitored after the
answering phone acquires the telephone line when answering machine mode is selected.
[No. 27]
Use it to change the detection evaluation time. (Command analysis is started when the V.21 low-speed command preamble is detected continuously for a specific
period of time.)
[No. 28]
Use it to set the length of time during which the Menu Select screen is indicated on the LCD.
[No. 56 through 61]

Use it to confirm the count type indicated on the Counter Check screen, which appears in response to a press on the Counter key.
When '0' is selected, count type will not be indicated.
No.56: fix to total 1 (101) for the counter 1 reading.

No.57: use it to select a count type for the counter 2 reading.
If above selections have been made, the counters will be displayed in order of counter numbers.
<Soft Counter Specifications>
The soft counters are classified as follows according to input numbers:
101: total
102: not used
103: not used
104: not used
201: copy
202: not used
203: not used
204: not used
301: print (indicates sum of prints from PC and report prints)
302: not used
303: not used
304: not used
331: PDL (indicates prints from PC only)
332: not used
333: not used
334: not used
15-20
Chapter 15
505: scan
506: not used
507: not used
508: not used
701: received print
702: not used
703: not used
704: not used
801: report print
802: not used
803: not used
804: not used
T-15-26
Guide to the Table
yes: available for the machine.
Setting Basic counter
Copy PDL print Received print Report print Scan
total total 1 101 yes yes yes yes
copy total 1 201 yes
print total 1 301 yes yes
PDL 1 total 1 331 yes
received print
total 1 701 yes
report print
total 1 801 yes
scan total 1 505 yes
15.2.4 SPECIAL Setting

0006-3063
Do not change the setting; otherwise, the machine may malfunction.
15.2.5 NCU Setting

0006-3065
The settings of this item are collectively set in relation to the setting of #5 TYPE so that all values will comply with the communications standards of a specific
country/region.
15.2.6 ISDN Setting

0006-3066
Not used.
15.2.7 Country/Region of Installation

0006-3070
When a country/region is selected for the indicated list, the data under #4 NCU will be set to suit the communication standards of the county/region.
Be sure not to select a different country/region from the country/region of installation.
15-21
Chapter 15
15.2.8 Setting the Original Reading Functions

0006-3078
T-15-27
Item Description
1. Bit SW Do not change the setting; otherwise, the read image quality can be lost.
2. SLICE
3. GAMMA
4. Numeric
5. LUT 1 fno
6. LUT 2 adj
7. CCD partially hanged
8. MODEL not used
T-15-28
7. CCD Settings
No. Item Unit of adjustment
1 to 18 Do not change. -
19 shading position adjustment*1 (*2)
21 left/right edge read start position adjustment (book mode) 1 unit = approx. 0.03 mm
23 leading edge read start position adjustment (book mode) 1 unit = 0.1 mm
24 leading edge read start position (ADF mode) 1 unit = 0.1 mm
25 trailing edge read end position adjustment (ADF mode) 1 unit = 0.1 mm
26 to 33 Do not change. -
34 original feed speed adjustment (ADF mode) 1 unit = approx. 0.5 mm
*1: Make adjustments only When white lines occur. (See 3.1.12 of Chapter 7.)
*2: 1 of the 4 shading levels is selected by inputting a number from 0 to 3.
(In the case of being imputed a number over 4, the shading level is equal to that selected 0.)
The factory settings of these adjustments differ from machine to machine. For instructions on adjustment, see 1.2.4 of Chapter 7 or 1.3.4 of Chapter 7.
15.2.9 Setting the Printer Parameters

0006-3082
T-15-29
#1 SSSW Setting
#7 PRINTER-#1 SSSW-SW06 (reduction setting)
0 reduction at time of image divi-sion prohibit do not prohibit 0
15-22
Chapter 15
#1 SSSW Setting
#7 PRINTER-#1 SSSW-SW06 (reduction setting)
1 not used - -
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
[bit 0]
Use it to specify whether or not to reduce the received image of an extra-long original if it can be printed in divisions after reducing to the maximum reduction ratio
(70%).
prohibit:
select it to divide and print on the next page (Direct).
For instance, if an extra-length original as long as 2.5 A4R original is received, it will be
divided into 3 A4R sheets for printing; the image will be in Direct.
do not prohibit:
select it to print the image by reducing it to fit a single page (in divided print mode).
For instance, if an extra-length original as long as 2.5 A4R originals is received, it will be reduced to 70% to print on 2 A4R sheets.
T-15-30
#7 PRINTER #1 SSSW-SW13 (humidity sensor fixed mode)
0 humidity sensor fixed mode selected 1 0 0
1 1 0 0
2 not used - - -
3 not used - - -
4 not used - - -
5 not used - - -
6 not used - - -
7 not used - - -
[bit 0, 1]
15-23
Chapter 15
Use bits 0 and 1 to select humidity sensor fixed mode; the combinations of modes and bit SW settings are as follows:
T-15-31
Bit1 Bit0 Mode
0 0 fixed mode disabled
0 1 L/L mode
1 0 N/N mode
1 1 H/H mode
T-15-32
fixed mode disabled: use it for normal environment.
L/L mode: use it if the environment is L/L, and the site of installation is subject to an
extremely high level of temperature/humidity.
N/N mode: use it if the environment is N/N, and the site of installation is subject to an
extremely high/low level of temperature/humidity.
H/H mode: use it if the environment is H/H, and the site of installation is subject to an
extremely low level of temperature/humidity.
T-15-33
#2 NUMERIC Param. Setting
Do not change the setting; otherwise, the machine may malfunction.
T-15-34
#3 PRINT COUNT
Use it to indicate the number of prints.
T-15-35
#4 PRINT RESET
Use it to reset the printer; or, use it to clear service error 'E000'.
T-15-36
#5 MLT CLEANING
15-24
Chapter 15
Not used.
15.2.10 PDL
0006-3099
T-15-37
#8 PDL
Not used.
15.2.11 Counter
0006-3102
The machine is equipped with various counters, whose readings may be used to obtain an idea of when to replace specific parts.
T-15-38
The COUNTER items are as follows:
Level 1 item Level 2 item Level 3 item Description
COUNTER
TOTAL (total-orientated counter)
SERVICE1 service-use total counter 1
SERVICE2 service-use total counter 2
TTL total counter
COPY total copy counter
PDL-PRT print counter
FAX-PRT fax reception print counter
RPT-PRT report print counter
SCAN scan counter
PICK-UP (pickup-related counter)*1
C1 cassette pickup counter
C2 not used
C3 not used
15-25
Chapter 15
The COUNTER items are as follows:
Level 1 item Level 2 item Level 3 item Description
C4 not used
MF manual feed tray pickup counter
FEEDER (ADF-related counter)
FEED ADF pickup counter
JAM (jam counter)
TTL machine total jam counter
FEEDER ADF jam counter
SORTER not used
MF manual feed tray jam counter
C1 cassette jam counter
C2 not used
C3 not used
C4 not used
MISC not used
*1: Not incremented at time of printing from the PC.
Clearing the Counter Readings

Start service mode, and select [#11 CLEAR]; then, press the OK key. Thereafter, select [COUNTER], and press the OK key to clear all counter readings.
MEMO:
Generating a Counter Report
Start service mode, and select [#10 REPORT]; then, press the OK key.
Thereafter, select [COUNTER REPORT], and press the OK key to obtain a counter report.
15.2.12 Generating a Report

0006-3114
The following is a list of the reports that may be generated, showing particulars of each:
15-26
Chapter 15
T-15-39
Item Description
SERVICE&SYSTEM service data list, system dump print list
SERVICE DATA service mode #1 through #7, #13; start date
SYSTEM DUMP number of communications, number of receptions, number of recording sheets,

number of errors
KEY HISTORY REPORT 1800 most recent key presses
BCH LOG REPORT not used
COUNTER REPORT counter readings
PRINT SPEC REPORT TYPE setting, printing speed, memory size, ROM indication, adjustment data
15.2.13 Downloading
0006-3120
Not used.
15.2.14 Clearing
0006-3122
T-15-40
Item Level 2 item Description
TEL & USER Use it to clear all areas under user registration/setting.
DATA Use it to clear the tel registration data* and user data. *One-touch dial,
speed dial, and group dial numbers.
USER DATA Use it to clear user data. SSSW and TEL registration data are not
cleared.
SERVICE SW Use it to clear the settings under SSSW. The user data is not cleared.
SERVICE DATA Use it to clear the counters (numerator), date, and start data form the
system dump list.
REPORT ACTIVITY Use it to clear the contents of the communications control report.
15-27
Chapter 15
Item Level 2 item Description
JAM not used.
ERR not used.
ALARM not used.
COUNTER Use it clear the counter data.
CARD not used.
ERR not used.
ALL Use it to clear all settings/registration data excluding the counter

readings (denominator, numerator) from the system dump list and #5.
15.2.15 ROM Indication

0006-3130
The following is a list of the items/particulars for ROM indication mode:

T-15-41
Item Description
MAIN Use it to indicate the version of the ROM on the image processor PCB.
MAIN2 Use it to indicate the version of the CPU on the image processor PCB.
ECONT Use it to indicate the version of the ROM on the DC controller PCB.
PDL Use it to indicate the version of the ROM on the printer controller PCB.
15.2.16 Resetting the Contact Sensor Position

0006-3150
Not used.
15.2.17 Service Mode Default Setting

0006-6917
T-15-42
TYPE EUROPE U.K. SWEDEN SWISS AUSTRIA DENMARK NORWAY
#1
SSSW
SW01 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000
15-28
Chapter 15
SW02 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW03 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW05 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW06 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW07 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW09 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW13 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW15 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011
SW17 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW18 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW21 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW22 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW23 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW24 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW25 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW26 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW27 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW28 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW29 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW30 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW33 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
15-29
Chapter 15
#2
MENU
05: OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
06: DIAL DIAL DIAL DIAL DIAL DIAL DIAL
07: 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
08: 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429
09: 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6
10: 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz
T-15-43
TYPE HOLLAND BELGUIM AUSTRALIA FINLAND N.Z. ITALY SPAIN
#1
SSSW
SW01 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000
SW02 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW03 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW05 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW06 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW07 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW09 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW13 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW15 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011
SW17 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW18 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW21 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
15-30
Chapter 15
SW22 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW23 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW24 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW25 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW26 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW27 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW28 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW29 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW30 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW33 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
#2
MENU
07: 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
08: 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429
09: 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6
10: 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz
T-15-44
TYPE PORTUGAL IRELAND HONG MALAYSIA HUNGARY SAF KOREA

KONG
#1
SSSW
SW01 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000
SW02 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW03 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW05 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW06 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW07 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW09 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
15-31
Chapter 15

KONG
SW11 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW13 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW15 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011
SW17 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW18 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW21 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW22 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW23 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW24 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW25 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW26 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW27 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW28 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW29 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW30 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW33 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
#2
MENU
07: 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
08: 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429
09: 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6
10: 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz
15-32
Chapter 15
T-15-45
TYPE CHINA GERMAN FRANCE SINGAPORE CZECH SLOVENIA ASIA
#1
SSSW
SW01 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000
SW02 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW03 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW05 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW06 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW07 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW09 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW13 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW15 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011
SW17 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW18 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW21 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW22 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW23 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW24 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW25 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW26 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW27 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW28 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW29 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW30 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW33 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
15-33
Chapter 15
#2
MENU
07: 13 10 10 10 10 10 10
08: 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429
09: 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6
10: 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz
T-15-46
TYPE POLAND EUROPE2 TAIWAN STANDARD USA
#1 SSSW
SW01 00010000 00010000 not used not used 00010000
15-34
Chapter 15
#2 MENU
05: OFF OFF not used not used OFF
06: DIAL DIAL not used not used DIAL
07: 10 10 not used not used 10
08: 3429 3429 not used not used 3429
09: 33.6 33.6 not used not used 33.6
10: 25Hz 25Hz not used not used 25Hz
T-15-47
#3
NUMERIC
Param
02: 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
03: 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
04: 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
05: 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
06: 4 1 4 4 4 4 4
09: 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
10: 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500
11: 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500
13: 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300
15: 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
16: 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
17: 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
18: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
19: 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
15-35
Chapter 15
20: 100 40 100 100 100 100 30
21: 0 20 0 0 0 0 30
22: 400 200 400 400 400 400 400
24: 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
25: 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
27: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
28: 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
56: 101 101 101 101 101 101 101
57: 201 201 201 201 201 201 201
58: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
59: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
60: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
61: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#5 TYPE EUROPE U.K. SWEDEN SWISS AUSTRIA DENMARK NORWAY
T-15-48
#3
NUMERIC
Param
02: 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
03: 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
04: 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
05: 4 4 4 4 4 4 15
06: 4 4 4 4 4 4 3
09: 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
10: 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500
11: 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500
13: 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300
15: 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
16: 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
17: 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
18: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
19: 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
15-36
Chapter 15
20: 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
21: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
22: 400 300 400 400 400 400 400
24: 10 10 10 12 10 10 10
25: 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
27: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
28: 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
56: 101 101 101 101 101 101 101
57: 201 201 201 201 201 201 201
58: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
59: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
60: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
61: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#5 TYPE HOLLAND BELGUIM AUSTRALIA FINLAND N.Z. ITALY SPAIN
T-15-49

KONG
#3
NUMERIC
Param
02: 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
03: 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
04: 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
05: 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
06: 4 4 1 4 4 4 4
09: 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
10: 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 3500 5500
11: 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500
13: 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1310
15: 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
16: 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
17: 100 100 40 100 100 100 100
18: 0 0 20 0 0 0 0
19: 400 400 200 400 400 400 400
20: 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
15-37
Chapter 15

KONG
21: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
22: 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
24: 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
25: 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
27: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
28: 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
56: 101 101 101 101 101 101 101
57: 201 201 201 201 201 201 201
58: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
59: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
60: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
61: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#5 TYPE PORTUGAL IRELAND HONG MALAYSIA HUNGARY SAF KOREA

KONG
T-15-50
#3
NUMERIC
Param
02: 10 8 10 10 10 10 10
03: 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
04: 12 6 12 12 12 12 12
05: 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
06: 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
09: 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
10: 4500 9000 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500
11: 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500
13: 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300
15: 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
16: 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
17: 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
18: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
19: 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
20: 100 100 150 100 100 100 100
21: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
22: 400 400 300 400 400 400 400
15-38
Chapter 15
24: 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
25: 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
27: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
28: 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
56: 101 101 101 101 101 101 101
57: 201 201 201 201 201 201 201
58: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
59: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
60: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
61: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#5 TYPE CHINA GERMAN FRANCE SINGAPORE CZECH SLOVENIA ASIA
T-15-51
#3
NUMERIC
Param
10: 5500 5500 not used not used 5500
11: 3500 3500 not used not used 3500
13: 1300 1300 not used not used 1300
15-39
Chapter 15
56: 101 101 101 101 101
57: 201 201 201 201 201
58: 0 0 0 0 0
59: 0 0 0 0 0
60: 0 0 0 0 0
61: 0 0 0 0 0
#5 TYPE POLAND EUROPE2 TAIWAN STANDARD USA
15.2.18 Test Mode

0006-3199
When using test mode, be sure to execute items according to the menu indicated on the display. The menu items in test mode are grouped into 7 blocks.
1. D-RAM Test (1: D-RAM)

Use it to be sure that data is properly written to and read from the D-RAM.
2. CCD Test (2: CCD TEST)

Use it to execute auto adjustment (contact sensor LED intensity or original read position) or to initialize the CCD read position parameter.
3. PRINT Test (3: PRINT)

Use it to generate a test pattern for service.
4. MODEM NCU Test (4: MODEM NCU)

Use it to execute a relay operation test or modem DTMF and tonal signal transmission/reception tests.
5. AGING Test (5: AGING TEST)

Not used.
6. FACULTY Test (6: FACULTY TEST)

Use it to check the operation of microswitches, sensors, speakers, and ADF.
7. BOOK Test (8: BOOK TEST)

Use it to turn on the contact sensor or to initialize the book reading position parameter.
List of Test Mode Items

To use test mode, press the Additional Functions key and # key; then, select 'SERVICE MODE' and select 'TEST MODE' using the Left or Right Arrow key, and
press the OK key.
To end test mode, press the Stop key and then the Additional Functions key.
15-40
Chapter 15
TEST MODE [1] - [6], [8]

E120 : ###-##-##
1: D-RAM 1: D-RAM 14848K

[1] - - - [3] ******
1: D-RAM 14848K
******
1-3: IRAM TEST (not used)
2: CCD TEST
[1] - - - [8]
3: PRINT 3: PRINT (disabled)

[0] - - - [9] , [*] , [#] 3-0: AMI PATERN
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-1: WHITE
3: PRINT
3-2: BLACK
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-3: STRIPES
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-4: CHECKERS
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-5: CHECKERS-2
3: PRINT
3-6: ENDURANCE
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-7: BLACK/WHITE
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-8: BIAS
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-9: CHECKERS-3
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-*: PRINTING AREA
3: PRINT (disabled)
3-#: CRG TEST
F-15-10
15-41
Chapter 15
4: MODEM 4-1. RELAY 1 RELAY 1 100000

NCU RELAY [0] - - - [5] 1-0: CML ON
[1] - - - [8] [1] - - - [2]
RELAY 1 010000
1-1: P ON
RELAY 1 001000
1-2: S ON
RELAY 1 000100
1-3: H ON
RELAY 1 000010
1-4: D ON
RELAY 1 000001
1-5: R ON
RELAY 2 RELAY 2 000000000010

[0] - - - [9], 2-0: IPSEL2 ON
[*],[#]
RELAY 2 100000000000
2-1: NZ ON
RELAY 2 010000000000
2-2: CI1 ON
RELAY 2 001000000000
2-3: CI2 ON
RELAY 2 000100000000
2-4: AST ON
RELAY 2 000010000000
2-5: C1 ON
RELAY 2 000001000000
2-6: C2 ON
RELAY 2 000000100000
2-7: NOR ON
RELAY 2 000000010000
2-8: DCSEL ON
RELAY 2 000000001000
2-9: DCL1M ON
RELAY 2 000000000100
2-*: IPSEL1 ON
RELAY 2 000000000001
2-#: IPSEL3 ON
F-15-11
15-42
Chapter 15
4-2: FREQ 4-2: FREQ

[1] - - - [7] 462 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1100 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1300 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1500 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1650 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1850 Hz
4-2: FREQ
2100 Hz
4-4: G3 Tx 4-4: G3 Tx
[0] - - - [8] 300 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
2400 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
4800 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
7200 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
9600 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
TC7200 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
TC9600 bps
F-15-12
4-4: G3 Tx
12000 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
14400 bps
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST 4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

, 0:
[*] ,
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST
1:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

2:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

3:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

4:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

5:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

6:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

7:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

8:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

9:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

#:
F-15-13
15-43
Chapter 15
4-6. TONE Rx 000
4-8: V.34 G3 Tx TEST 4-8: V.34 G3 Tx TEST

[0] --- [5] UP-DOWN Baud: 3429 Speed: 33.6
4-8: V.34 G3 Tx TEST

Baud: 3200 Speed: 31.2
5: AGING TEST (not used)
F-15-14
6: FACULTY TEST 6-1: G3 4800 bps Tx

[1] - - - [9], [#] 4800 bps
6-2: REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION SW OFF
6-3: SENSOR DS of DES of DDS of
[1]---[4] CRG on DCVS on
HPS on BCVS of
TBS on WTS of
CT1 on A4
MLT on A4 TN on
JAM of
6-4: ADF
6-5: STAMP not used

[1] - - - [2]
6-6: SPEAKER 6-6: SPEAKER

FREQ : [1] VOL : [2] FREQ TEST
6-6:SPEAKER
VOL [*]:MIN [#]:MAX
6-7: OPERATION PANEL
6-9: LINE DETECT C1=OFF 0 Hz
[1] - - - [3] HOOK=ON/ON FC=OFF (not used)
CNG DETECT (not used)

CNG=OFF OFF
CNG DETECT
CNG=OFF OFF
6-#: ESS TEST
F-15-15
8: BOOK TEST 8-1: BOOK FEED TEST

[1] - - - [6] P.0000/0000
8-2: BOOK ADJ

P.0000/0000
8-3: CS POS ADJ (ADF)
8-4:
8-5: BOOK TEST
8-6: BOOK TEST

F-15-16
D-RAM Test (1: D-RAM)
Press '1' on the keypad on the Test Mode menu to select D-RAM (SDRAM) Test mode.
Thereafter, press '1' or '2' on the keypad to execute the following:
15-44
Chapter 15
'1' on Keypad
Press it to execute a data write/read check for the entire area of the D-RAM (SDRAM). If an error occurs during the check, the machine will stop the check and
indicate an error on the LCD.
'2' on Keypad
Press it to execute a data read check for the entire area of the D-RAM (SDRAM). If an error occurs during the check, the machine will stop the check and indicate
an error on the LCD.
Indicated only when image data exists in the D-RAM.

PIX RECORD CLEAR ? OK: press the OK key to clear the image data in the D-RAM.
OK<OK>, NO<STOP> NO: press the Stop key to return to TEST MODE.
Press the OK key.
1:D-RAM 14848K
[1] - - - [3]
Press '1' on the keypad. Normal end
1:D-RAM 14848K 1:D-RAM 14848K

*******...... complete (no error)
14848K : indicates the total size of memory

of the D-RAM (in bytes).
* : indicates the memory size for
data write operation.
. : indicates the memory size for Error indication
data read operation.
WRT= 33CC RD= 33EC
ADR= BF840201
1:D-RAM 14848K Press the Start WRT : data written.
...... key to resume. RD : data read.
ADR : address.
14848K : indicates the total memory of Error end
the D-RAM (in bytes).
. : indicates the memory size for data 1:D-RAM 14848K
write operation. complete (error)
F-15-17
CCD Test (2: CCD TEST)
A press on '2' on the keypad on the Test Mode menu will select CCD Test mode. Press '3', '7', or '8' on the keypad to execute the following:
'3' on Keypad
Press it to execute original read position auto adjustment (if equipped with ADF) so as to adjust the contact sensor position used for reading with the ADF in use
automatically. (See 1.3.4.2 of Chapter 7.)
'7' on Keypad
Press it to initialize the contact sensor parameters, including those that are not initialized by 'all clear' in service mode.
'8' on Keypad
Press it to execute contact sensor LED intensity auto adjustment so that the contact sensor output correction is made and contact sensor parameters are automatically
set. (See 1.2.4.1 of Chapter 7.)
PRINT Test (3: PRINT)
Press '3' on the keypad from the Test Mode menu to select Print Test mode. A press on '2' or '6' on the keypad during the test will generate any of the following 2
types of test patterns.
Do not use the others, as they are especially designed for use by the factory and R&D.
'2' on Keypad
3-2: Press it to generate BLACK, which is a solid black print.
'6' on Keypad
3-6: Press it to generate ENDURANCE, which is a black band.
To stop test printing, press the Stop key.
Check to make sure that the print Check it to make sure that the
pattern is free of contraction, print pattern is free of white
elongation, dirt, or black lines. line or uneven density.
F-15-18
MODEM NCU Test (4: MODEM NCU)
Use it to execute a transmission test for MODEM NCU. In a modem test, you can make sure that the signals from the modem are transmitted normally by listening
to the sound of signals from the speaker.
You can also use it to make sure that the received tonal signal and DTMF signal are correctly detected by the modem. To end the test, press the Stop key.
15-45
Chapter 15
T-15-52
Type Description
Relay test Use it to turn on/off a selected relay to execute a switch-over test.
G3 signal transmission test Use it to generate the G3 signal coming from the modem using the
telephone line terminal and the speaker.
DTMF signal reception test Use it to generate the DTMF signal coming from the modem using
the telephone line terminal and the speaker.
Tonal signal reception test Use it to monitor a specific frequency and the DTMF signal
received from the telephone line terminal by causing them to be
indicated on the LCD (i.e., the presence/absence as detected). The
reception signal is generated by the speaker.
V.34 G3 signal transmission test The modem sends V.34 G3 signals from the modular jack and
speaker.
Relay Test
Press '1' on the keypad on the Modem NCU Test menu to select relay test mode. Use the keypad to operate the various relays of the NCU.
The LCD is turned on or off in relation to the transmission of the relay operation signal as is operated on the keypad; for this reason, you cannot use the LCD to
check a fault on a single relay.
RELAY 1 010000 1 : relay ON

1-1 : P ON 2 : relay OFF
0 1 0 0 0 0
Relay CML P S H D R
Keypad 0 1 2 3 4 5
F-15-19
Frequency Test
A press on '2' on the keypad from the MODEM NCU Test menu selects the frequency test. In this test, signals of the following frequencies from the modem are
transmitted using the telephone line terminal and the speaker. To select a different frequency, use the keypad.
T-15-53
Keypad Frequency
1 462 Hz
2 1100 Hz
3 1300 Hz
4 1500 Hz
5 1650 Hz
6 1850 Hz
7 2100 Hz
MEMO:
The frequency and the output level of individual frequencies are in keeping with the output level set in service mode.
G3 Signal Transmission Test

A press on '4' on the keypad from the MODEM NCU Test menu selects the G3 signal transmission test. In this test, the following G3 signals from the modem are
transmitted using the telephone line terminal and the speaker. To select a different transmission speed, use the keypad.
T-15-54
Keypad Frequency
0 300 bps
15-46
Chapter 15
Keypad Frequency
1 2400 bps
2 4800 bps
3 7200 bps
4 9600 bps
5 TC7200 bps
6 TC9600 bps
7 12000 bps
8 14400 bps
MEMO:
The output level of individual signals is in keeping with the setting made in service mode.
DTMF Signal Transmission Test

A press on '5' on the MODEM NCU Test menu selects the DTMF signal transmission test. In the test, the following DTMF signals from the modem are transmitted
using the telephone line terminal and the speaker. The number pressed on the keypad selects a specific DTMF signal.
MEMO:
The output level of individual signals is in keeping with the setting made in service mode.
Tonal/DTMF Signal Reception Test

A press on '6' on the keypad from the MODEM NCU Test menu selects the tonal signal/DTMF signal reception 0 test. In this signal, the tonal signal/DTMF signal
received from the telephone line terminal can be checked to find out if it was detected by the modem.
Tonal signal reception test
4-6 : TONE Rx 000
0 0 0
changes from '0' to '1' in response to detection of a signal of 1300 ± 25 Hz.
DTMF signal reception test
4-6 : TONE Rx 000

1234567890
The received DTMF signals are indicated
starting from the right using the 2nd
character of the display.
F-15-20
V.34 G3 signal transmission test
The V.34 G3 signal transmission test menu is selected by pressing the 8 key from the MODEM NCU test menu. The V.34 G3 signals below are sent from the modem
using the modular jack and the speaker by pressing the start key.
The Baud rate can be changed with the numeric keys, and the Speed can be changed with the cursor key .
T-15-55
Numeric key Baud rate
0 3429 baud
1 3200 baud
2 3000 baud
3 2800 baud
4 2743 baud
5 2400 baud
15-47
Chapter 15
T-15-56
Cursor key Speed
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12000 pbs
14400 bps
16800 bps
19200 bps
21600 bps
24000 bps
26400 bps
28800 pbs
31200 bps
33600 bps
AGING Test (5: AGING TEST)

Not used.
FACULTY (function) Test (6: FACULTY TEST)
A press on '6' on the keypad from the TEST MODE menu selects the FACULTY test. A press on the keypad (1 through 7, 9, #) during the test will bring up the
following menu:
T-15-57
Keypad Item Description
1 G3 Signal Transmission Test Transmits a G3 signal at 4800 bps to the

telephone line and the speaker.
2 not used
3 Sensor Test Executes an operation test on a specific sensor.
4 ADF Test Executes an operation test on the ADF.
5 not used
6 Speaker Test Executes an operation test on the speaker.
7 Control Panel Test Executes an operation test on the LCD/LED/

control panel keys.
9 Live Connection Reception Test Executes an operation test on the signal sensor on
the NCU board and the frequency counter.
# ESS Test Executes an operation test on the ESS function.
G3 Signal Transmission Test (6-1: G3 4800 bps Tx)

A press on '1' on the keypad on the FACULTY TEST menu selects the G3 transmission test. In this test, a G3 signal is transmitted using the telephone line terminal
and the speaker at 4800 bps.
Sensor Test (6-3: SENSOR)

This mode is used to check the state of a specific sensor of the machine on the LCD. A press on '3' on the keypad from the FACULTY TEST menu selects the sensor
test. The LCD indication changes as the sensor goes ON and OFF.
15-48
Chapter 15
The paper leading edge sensor (PS102), LGL paper sensor (PS101), and delivery sensor (PS3) cannot be checked by running a sensor test.
6-3:SENOR
[1] - - - [4]
DS of DES of DDS of
CRG on DCVS on
DS: original sensor*1 (PS6); 'on' if present, 'of' if absent.

DES: registration sensor*1 (PS7); 'on' if present, 'of' if absent.
DDS: original delivery sensor*1(PS8);'on' if present, 'of' if absent.
CRG: not used
DCVS: Reader unit slide detecting switch (SW1) and toner supply cover open/closed detecting switch (SW2):
'on' reader unit in position and toner supply cover closed,
'of' reader unit not in position or toner supply cover open.
*1: indicates the state of a specific sensor of the ADF.

HPS on BCVS of
TBS on WTS of
HPS: contact sensor home position sensor (PS1):

'on' contact sensor in home position,
'of' contact sensor not in home position.
BCVS: ADF (copyboard cover) open/close sensor (PS2); 'on' cover open, 'of' cover closed.
TBS: toner bottle sensor (PS11):
'on' toner bottle fitted,
'of' toner bottle not fitted (cartridge not fitted).
WTS: waste toner full sensor (PS12):
'on' if present, 'of' if absent.

CT1 on A4
CT1: cassette paper sensor (P103); 'on' paper present, 'of' paper absent.

MLT on A4 TN on
JAM of
MLT:manual feed tray paper sensor (PS4); 'on' paper present, 'of' paper absent.
TN: not used.
JAM: not used.
F-15-21
ADF Test (6-4: ADF)
Use it to check the operation of the ADF.
Press '4' on the keypad while the FACULTY TEST menu is indicated to select ADF test.
Place an original in the original placement area, and press the Start key so that the original will be moved at a specific speed.
Select this item, press 10 originals in the ADF, and press '8' on the keypad to execute registration
arch auto adjustment (only if equipped with ADF functions). (See 1.3.4 of Chapter 7.)
Speaker test (6-6: SPEAKER)

Use it to check the operation of the speaker.
Press '6' on the keyboard while the FACULTY TEST menu is indicated to select speaker test. In the test, tonal signal sounds of between 200 Hz to 5 kHz at 100-
Hz intervals are generated white changing the volume. Check to see if the speaker generates these signals.
6-6: SPEAKER
FREQ:[1] VOL:[2]
Press '1' on the keypad. Press '2' on keypad.

6-6: SPEAKER 6-6: SPEAKER
FREQ TEST VOL[*] :MIN [#]:MAX
Press the Start key Adjust the volume

to change the of the signals; at *,
transmission frequency. min.; at #, max.;
may be changed in
steps by pressing the
Start key.
F-15-22
Control Panel Test (6-7: OPERATION PANEL)
This test is used to check the operation of the control panel.
A press on '7' on the keypad from the control panel selects the OPERATION PANEL Test menu, enabling the following tests:
- LCD Test
A press on the Start key under OPERATION PANEL test will start LCD test, in which the screen will be filled with the character H; another press will cause
the screen to turn totally black.
- LED Lamp Test
A press on the Start key after the LCD test selects the LED lamp test, turning all lamps in the control panel to go ON.
- Control Key Test
A press on the Start key after the LED lamp selects control key test 1. Press the key indicated
on the LCD; if it goes out, the operation is normal.
When all characters have gone out, control key test 2 (if equipped with fax functions) is started. As in the case of operation key test 1, press the key indicated
on the LCD; the operation is correct if it goes out.
Key Correspondence for Control Key Test 1 (if not equipped with fax functions)
15-49
Chapter 15
[E] [A] [C]
OK
[J] [H] [D] Same as LCD indications.

[F] [I] [G] [B]
F-15-23
Key Correspondence for Control Key Test 1 (if equipped with fax functions)
[R] [N] [H] [I ] [B] [D] [G] [F]
Function
Fax Monitor R
Redial / Pause
ABC DEF
Memory D.T.
Reference
Coded Dial
Report Tone/+ GHI JKL MNO

Directory
OK
Delayed Space
Transmission Receive Mode PQRS TUV WXYZ
Book Sending Delete

Fax Resolution
Clear
[A] [Q] [O] [P] [L] [E]

[J] [M] [K] [C] Same as LCD indications.
F-15-24
Key Correspondence for Control Key Test 2 (if equipped with fax functions)
[9] [8] [7]
Function
[1]
Fax Monitor R
[2] Redial / Pause

Memory D.T.
Reference
Coded Dial
[3]
Report Tone/+
Directory
[4]
Delayed Space
Transmission Receive Mode
[5]
Book Sending Delete
Fax Resolution
[6]
Clear
[a] [b] [c]

F-15-25
The following is the flow of work for the control panel test:
15-50
Chapter 15
6 - 7 : OPERA T I ON PANE L
LCD test Press the Start key.
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Character H is indicated.
Press the Start key.
The screen turns totally black.
Press the Start key.
6 - 7 : OPERA T I ON PANE L
L ED TE S T All LED lamps go ON.
LED lamp test Press the Start key.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * # ABCDEFG A press on the key causes its

H I J K LMNOPQR corresponding character to go out.
Control
key test (1)
1 2 34 5 6 7 89 a b c A press on a 1-touch dial key causes

its corresponding character to go out.
Control key test (2)
After all characters are gone, press the Stop key to end the test.
F-15-26
Line Connection Reception Test (6-9: LINE DETECT)
A press on '9' on the keypad from the FACULTY TEST menu selects the LINE DETECT test. On Test Menu 1, you can check C1, FC, state of hooking of the
eternal telephone, and the detection of signals by the NCU package.
Test Menu 1
A press on '1' on the keypad from the LINE DETECT menu selects test menu 1. In this test, the LCD indication changes from 'OFF' to 'ON' when C1, FC, or off-
set of the external telephone is detected in relation to the telephone line.
Test Menu 3
A press on '3' on the keypad from the LINE DETECT menu selects test menu 3. In this test, the LCD indication changes from 'OFF' to 'ON' when CNG is detected
in relation to the telephone terminal.
ESS Test (6-#: ESS TEST)

A press on the # key from the FACULTY TEST menu executes the ESS (Energy Save Stanby: hereafter, ESS) test. In the course of execution, the test causes the
machine to be in ESS mode, causing all LEDs except the Energy Saver key in the control panel to go OFF.
The machine ends ESS mode for the following:
- The Energy Saver key is pressed.

- Print data arrives from the PC.
- A fax arrives.*1
- Off-hook set is detected.*1
- The report output time arrives.*1
- The timer call time arrives.*1

BOOK Read Test (8: BOOK TEST)
A press on '8' on the keypad from the TEST MODE menu selects the BOOK test. A press on '4' or '6' on the keypad during this test initializes the corresponding
parameter as described below:
'4' on the Keypad

The book read position parameter (#6 SCANNER 7: CCD 21, 23) is initialized.
'6' on the Keypad
The BOOK read parameter (#6 SCANNER 7: CCD 18*1, 19, 21, 23) is initialized.
*1: The term "CCD18 setting" refers to the setting for original read position adjustment executed by a press on '3' of the keypad under 'CCD TEST' of 'TEST MODE'.
15.2.19 Service Report

0006-3306
Manually Generating Reports

The following reports may be generated manually in service mode:
15-51
Chapter 15
T-15-58
Type of report Operation
SYSTEM (SERVICE) DATA LIST Select an item under [#10REPORT] from the service mode
menu, and press the OK key. Or, press Function key and Report
key in this order in service mode. Then select the list to output,
and press OK key.
SYSTEM DUMP LIST
KEY HISTORY REPORT
COUNTER REPORT
PRINT SPEC REPORT
SYSTEM (SERVICE) DATA LIST

The following shows the service soft switch settings and the service parameter settings:
02/01/2001 13:49 FAX 001
*********************
* * * SYSTEM DATA LIST * * *
*********************
#1 SSSW
SW01 ----- 00010000
SW02 ----- 00000000
SW03 ----- 00000000
SW04 ----- 10000000
SW05 ----- 00000000
SW06 ----- 10010000
SW07 ----- 00000000
SW08 ----- 00000000
SW09 ----- 00000000
SW10 ----- 00000000
SW11 ----- 00000000
SW12 ----- 00000010
SW13 ----- 00000000
SW14 ----- 00000001
SW15 ----- 00000000
SW16 ----- 00000011
SW17 ----- 00000010
SW18 ----- 00000000
SW19 ----- 00000000
SW20 ----- 00000000
SW21 ----- 00000000
SW22 ----- 00000000
SW23 ----- 00000000
----- 00000000
----- 00000000
00000000
00000000
F-15-27
SYSTEM DUMP LIST
The following shows a record of communications and error communications:
02/01 2001 13:54 FAX 001
CLEAR DATE 02/01/2001
* 12 TX = 0
*3 A4
RX
=
=
0
0
B4 = 0 A3 = 0
*4 A4 = 0 B4 = 0 A3 = 0 LTR = 0 LGL = 0
*5 14400 = 0 12000 = 0 TC9600= 0 TC7200= 0
* 14400 = 0 12000 = 0
9600 = 0 7200 = 0 4800 = 0 2400 = 0
* 67 STD
MH
=
=
0
0
FINE
MR
=
=
0
0
SUPER =
MMR =
0
0
ULTRA = 0
*8 G3 = 0 ECM = 0
JBIG = 0
*9 PRINT = 9 / 209 READ = 1 / 140

*
* 10 #000 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#700 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0
F-15-28
*1: TX; total number of transmitted pages.
*2: Number of transmitted pages by original size.
*3: RX; total number of received pages.
*4: Number of received pages by original size.
15-52
Chapter 15
*5: Number of transmitted/received pages by modem speed.

*6: Number of transmitted/received pages by mode (Standard, Fine, Super Fine, Ultra Fine).
*7: Number of transmitted/received pages by coding method.
*8: Number of transmissions/receptions by mode.
*9: Number of prints, total number of prints; number of pages read, total number of pages read.
*10: Number of occurrences of specific error codes.
T-15-59
Guide to Indication
##000 1 7 3 0 0
Number of Number of Number of
##000 errors ##001 errors ##002 errors
The report indicates the most recent 3 communication errors:
*1
#1 LATEST ##0793
* 23 START TIME
OTHER PARTY
02/08 19:30
*4 MAKER CODE 10001000

*5 MACHINE CODE 10011100 00000000
* Rx : (bit 1)
* 67 Tx : (bit 1) 00000000 01110010 00011111 00100010 00000000 00000000 00000000 (bit56)
00000000 01110111 00010001 00100011 00000001 10101011 11000001 (bit56)
* (bit57) 00000001 00000001 00000100 00000000 00000000 (bit96)
*8 Rx : NSS TSI DCS

Tx : NSF DIS CFR
PIX
*1
#2 ##0765
F-15-29
*1: Service error code.
*2: START TIME: date and time (in 24-hr notation).
*3: OTHER PARTY; telephone number sent by other party.
*4: MAKER CODE; manufacturer code.
*5: MACHINE CODE: code by model.
*6: Bit 1 through 48 of DIS, DCS, or DTC received.
*7: Bit 1 through 48 of DIS, DCS, or DTC transmitted.
*8: RX: received procedure signal.
TX: transmitted procedure signal.
KEY HISTORY REPORT

The report indicates the most recent 1800 key presses:
02/01/2001 13:55 FAX 001
*********************
* * * KEY HISTORY REPORT * * *
*********************
02/01 13:55:48 SET_KEY 02/01 13:55:47 NEXT_KEY 02/01 13:55:47 PREV_KEY

02/01 13:55:46 PREV_KEY 02/01 13:55:45 PREV_KEY 02/01 13:55:45 PREV_KEY
02/01 13:55:45 PREV_KEY 02/01 13:55:44 NEXT_KEY 02/01 13:55:44 NEXT_KEY
02/01 13:55:43 NEXT_KEY 02/01 13:55:42 NEXT_KEY 02/01 13:55:41 NEXT_KEY
02/01 13:55:41 NEXT_KEY 02/01 13:55:40 NEXT_KEY 02/01 13:55:40 SET_KEY
02/01 13:55:39 PREV_KEY 02/01 13:55:39 PREV_KEY 02/01 13:55:38 SHARP_KEY
02/01 13:55:37 USER_KEY 02/01 13:54:06 SET_KEY 02/01 13:54:06 PREV_KEY
02/01 13:54:05 NEXT_KEY 02/01 13:54:05 NEXT_KEY 02/01 13:54:05 NEXT_KEY
02/01 13:54:04 SET_KEY 02/01 13:54:04 PREV_KEY 02/01 13:54:04 PREV_KEY
02/01 13:54:02 SHARP_KEY 02/01 13:52:54 STOP_KEY 02/01 13:52:54 STOP_KEY
02/01 13:52:54 STOP_KEY 02/01 13:52:40 STOP_KEY 02/01 13:51:26 STOP_KEY
02/01 13:51:40 STOP_KEY 02/01 13:51:22 NEXT_KEY 02/01 13:51:21 SET_KEY
02/01 13:51:25 NEXT_KEY 02/01 13:51:20 PREV_KEY 02/01 13:51:19 SET_KEY
02/01 13:51:19 PREV_KEY 02/01 13:51:16 USER_KEY 02/01 13:51:16 SHARP_KEY
02/01 13:50:17 USER_KEY 02/01 13:50:52 STOP_KEY 02/01 13:50:52 USER_KEY
02/01 13:50:53 STOP_KEY 02/01 13:50:52 STOP_KEY 02/01 13:50:51 STOP_KEY
02/01 13:50:52
13:50:51 STOP_KEY 02/01 13:50:51 STOP_KEY 02/01 13:50:49 STOP_KEY
02/01 13:50:51
F-15-30
COUNTER REPORT
15-53
Chapter 15
The various counter readings are indicated (3.14.1 of Chapter 2):
02/01/2001 13:58 FAX 001
**************************
*** COUNTER REPORT
***
T0TAL
**************************
SERVICE1 = 15
SERVICE2 = 15
TTL = 15
COPY = 1
PDL-PRT = 0
FAX-PRT = 0
RPT-PRT = 10
SCAN = 1
PICK-UP
C1 = 15
C2 = 0
C3 = 0
C4 = 0
MF = 0
FEEDER
FEED = 0
JAM
TTL = 0
FEEDER = 0
SORTER = 0
MF = 0
C1 = 0
C2 = 0
C3 = 0
C4 = 0
MISC
WST-TNR = 15
F-15-31
PRINT SPEC REPORT
The report indicates the TYPE settings, printing speed, memory size, ROM version, and adjustment data.
02/01/2001 14:00 FAX 001
TYPE ----- EURO

LBP SPEED ----- 13SHEETS
TOTAL MEMORY ----- 6656K
MAIN ----- EURO-22-03
MAIN2 ----- WLD-03-01
ECONT ----- 0038
CAPT ----- 0005
READ ADJ PRM

18 : ----- 3551
21 : ----- 0025
23 : ----- 0010
24 : ----- 0045
25 : ----- 0258
34 : ----- 0050
35 : ----- 0130
F-15-32
Automatically Generated Reports
The following reports are generated automatically:
T-15-60
Type of report Operation
Error TX report Enable automatic generation on the report settings menu in user
(w/ error code list, dump list) mode menu (i.e., use bits 0 and 1 of SW01 of service data #1
SSSW).
RX report (w/ error code list, dump list) Enable automatic generation on the report settings menu in user
mode menu (i.e., use bits 0 and 1 of SW01 of service data #1
SSSW).
Error TX Report (for service)

A service error code list and an error dump list may be attached to the error TX report. To do so, use service SSSW-SW01 in service mode.
If 'attach' is selected for 'transmission image' under 'transmission result report' of [REPORT SETTING] in user mode, a part of the 1st page of the transmission
15-54
Chapter 15
image will be attached when memory transmission is used.
02/08/2001 19:29 FAX 001
**************************
*** ERROR TX REPORT ***
**************************
TX FUNCTION WAS NOT COMPLETED
TX/RX NO 0004
DESTINATION TEL # 12
DESTINATION ID
ST. TIME 02/08 19:28
TIME USE 01`31
PGS. 0
RESULT NG *1 ##0765
*2 START TIME 02/08 19:28
*3 OTHER PARTY 12
*5 MACHINE CODE 10011100 00000000
*6 Rx : (bit 1) 00000000 01110011 10011101 00100010 00000000 00000000 00000000 (bit56)

*7 Tx : (bit 1) 00000000 01100000 00011111 00100010 00000000 00000000 00000000 (bit56)
*8 Rx : NSS CSI DIS CFR PPR

Tx : NSS DCS PIX PPS-EOP PIX PPS-EOP PPS-EOP PPS-EOP DCN
F-15-33
*2: START TIME; date and time (in 24-hr notation).
*3: OTHER PARTY; telephone number sent from other party.
*4: MAKER CODE; manufacture code.
*5: MACHINE CODE; model code.
*6: Bits 1 through 48 of received DIS, DCS, or DTC.
A service error code list and an error dump list may be attached to the RX report in response to an error reception. To attach, use SSSW-SW01 in service mode.
02/08/2001 19:33 FAX 001
**************************
*** RX REPORT
***
**************************
INCOMPLETE RECEPTION
TX/RX NO 5001
DESTINATION TEL #
DESTINATION ID
ST. TIME 02/08 19:30
TIME USE 03`02
PGS. 1
RESULT NG *1 ##0793
*2 START TIME 02/08 19:30

*3 OTHER PARTY
*5 MACHINE CODE 10011100 00000000
*6 Rx : (bit 1) 00000000 01100110 00011111 00100010 00000000 00000000 00000000 (bit56)

*7 Tx : (bit 1) 00000000 01110111 00010001 00100011 00000001 10101011 11000001(bit56)
(bit57) 00000001 00000001 00000100 00000000 00000000 (bit96)
*8 Rx : NSS TSI DCS PIX

Tx : NSF DIS CFR
F-15-34
*2: START TIME; date and time (in 24-hr notation).
*3: OTHER PARTY; telephone number sent from other party.
*4: MAKER CODE; manufacture code.
*5: MACHINE CODE; model code.
15-55
Chapter 16 Service Tools
Contents
Contents
16.1 Service Tools..............................................................................................................................................................16-1

16.1.1 List of Special Tools ................................................................................................................................................................ 16-1
16.1.2 List of Solvents and Oils.......................................................................................................................................................... 16-1
Chapter 16
16.1 Service Tools
16.1.1 List of Special Tools

0006-3476
The following tools are required in addition to the standard set of tools when servicing the machine:
T-16-1
No. Tool name Tool No. Shape Rank* Remarks
1 Digital multimeter FY9- A For making

2002 electrical
checks.
2 NA-3 Test Sheet FY9- A For adjusting/

9196 checking
images.
*Rank:
A: Every service person is expected to carry one.
16.1.2 List of Solvents and Oils

0006-4310
T-16-2
No. Name Use Composition Remarks
1 Alcohol Cleaning: e.g., glass, Fluoride-family hydrocarbon, - Do not bring near fire.
plastic, rubber; external alcohol, surface activating
covers. agent, water.
- Procure locally.
- IPA (isopropyl
alcohol) may be
substituted.
2 Lube, Lubricating; e.g. Polyalphaolefinoil, lithium - Tool No. HY9-0007

soap, polybutene
MOLYKOTE EM- contact sensor drive rail,

50L, Grease drive assembly, hinge of the
manual feed tray, ADF
delivery roller and pick up
shaft of the ADF.
3 Electricity Lubricating; e.g. - - Tool No. CK-8006
grease (IF-20) connection of the vertical

path roller and the gear,
connection of the
delivnection of the delivery
roller and bushing.
16-1
Feb 20 2008

Service Manual: Ir1200 Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual: Ir1200 Series

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual: Ir1200 Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

2.2.1 Before Starting .........................................................................................................................................................2- 1

Chapter 3 Basic Operation

Chapter 4 Original Exposure System

4.2.2 Copyboard glass...................................................................................................................................................... 4- 3

Chapter 5 Laser Exposure

Chapter 6 Image Formation

Chapter 7 Pickup/Feeding System

7.2.1.2 Types of Jams.......................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 1

7.6.7.4 Removing the Front Cover..................................................................................................................................................... 7- 12

Chapter 8 Fixing System

8.4.3.5 Disconnect connector .............................................................................................................................................................. 8- 8

Chapter 9 External and Controls

9.3.7.1 Removing the Rear Cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 9- 10

9.3.15 Right Door ............................................................................................................................................................9- 26

Chapter 10 Original Feeding System

10.4.7.4 Removing the ADF Drive Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 10- 25

10.4.16.2 Removing the Right Cover ............................................................................................................................................... 10- 55

Chapter 11 Maintenance and Inspection

Chapter 12 Standards and Adjustments

12.4.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................. 12- 2

Chapter 13 Correcting Faulty Images

Chapter 14 Self Diagnosis

Chapter 15 Service Mode

15.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 15- 1

Chapter 16 Service Tools

1.1 Product Specifications....................................................................................................................................................1-1

1.1 Product Specifications

1.1.1 Names of Parts

1.1.1.1 External View (ADF type)

[1] Reader unit slide lever [8] Control panel

[2] Reader unit [9] Cassette

[3] White sheet [10] Delivery tray

[4] White roller [11] Power cord connector assembly

[5] Copyboard glass [12] Modular cable connector assembly*1

[6] Manual feed tray [13] USB cable connector assembly

*1: If equipped with fax functions.

1.1.1.2 External View (copyboard type)

[1] Reader unit slide lever [7] Control panel

[2] Reader unit [8] Cassette

[3] Copyboard cover [9] Delivery tray

[4] Copyboard glass [10] Power cord connector assembly

[5] Manual feed tray [11] USB cable connector assembly

[1] Drum shutter stopper [4] Right door

[2] Cartridge cover [5] Shipping screw slot

1.1.1.3 External View (ADF)

[1] [2] [3]

[1] Original placement area [3] Delivery slot

[2] Open/close cover [4] Slide guide

1.1.1.4 External Covers